Home

eta/VPG version 3.3 User Manual

1. User may now inpu NO Returns to step 1 ABORT PG prom YES NO If NO is selected plotel elements will be The plotel elements will be included in the new part The new part will be ON and CURRENT r This function checks the continuity of the solid elements A free surface is the 6 97 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR face is occupied by one solid element VPG will replot the solid elements o Any unexpected quad or tri surface indicates ment connectivity Usage of a solid element that n screen displaying only the free surfaces potential errors in the solid ele 1 CHE E SURFACE The following five messages will appear in the command line area of the screen gt XXXX SURFACES FOUND C X URFACES CHECKED gt RUCTING FREE SURFACES T The following are brief descriptions of the options for the FREE SURFACE CK FRE gt HECKING FOR FREE SURFACES gt XXX S CONT gt xxxx FREE SURFACES FOUND he user is now placed in a FREE SURFACE sub menu 2 sub menu DISTANCE between the points and nodes IDENTIFY ELEMENT RFACE sub menu Each plate element ID is identical to the solid element ID i e one solid element with the ID xyz will have the plate at correspond with ID xyz IDENTIFY NODE node numbers and the X Y Z global coordinates EATE EL FROM SURF Creates plate elements on the free
2. on the screen Note If deleting the CURRENT PART the user must select a new current part in order to continue model generation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A LINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART The user selects a target part gt XXXX LINES XXXX SURFACES AND XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART YYYY 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT DELETE SELECTED PART OPTION PARTS ONLY PART NODES ABORT The user selects a deletion option PARTS ONLY deletes the part s selected along with any element definition and geometric entities All nodes will remain as UNREFERENCED NODES PARTS NODES will delete the UNREFERENCED NODES in addition to element and geometry data ABORT will return the user to the PART MENU 3 Once the user selects the option VPG prompts gt XXXX LINES XXXX SURFACES AND XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART YYYY gt O K TO DELETE PART YYYY YES NO YES deletes the selected part and its lines surfaces and elements NO deselects the part 10 3 10 KEEP PART Description This function retains the ON status of the selected part s and turns OFF the deselected parts The program automatically re scales the selected part s to fill the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO KEEP gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART The user selects a target part VPG highlights the selected line s or element s 2 Once the user selects the desired part s VPG prompts gt PART xxxx part name IS SELECTED
3. 9 8 9 ROTATION VIEW Description part from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the parts on the screen Clicks APPLY and the program will not display gray color Please see the Figure 9 24 current database DISPLAYED Enables the user to select all the parts that displaying on the current window VERSE Enables th EA SELECTION Turn all the select DO Enables the use button SAVE Enables the user to save the current part attributes in file A Select file dialog box will pop up and prompt the user to specify a name after clicking this button RECALL Enables the user to load the previously saved parts attribute file and set as the current parts attribute This function is used to finish virtual rotation or screen rotation for virtual rotation model rotates about global axis for screen rotation model rotates about screen axis Figure 9 24 Part Attributes control window No Contour 9 25 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 8 10 USER DEFINED VIEW Description This function is used to save the current viewing orientation and recall the previously saved view User may save up to 10 views in a session The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 9 25 Figure 9 25 User View Control Window Usage SAVE VIEW Saves the current viewing orientation The program assigns a default view name as shown in Figure 9 2
4. C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 ELEMEN The ELEMENT menu contains the commands to create and modify elements and to instantly mesh IG e elements via line data selection an eate solid elements via line data selectio and COARSE EL ands in the ELEMENT menu are organized as follows T ES surfaces The 2 3 and 4 LINE MESH commands create plat d the 6 8 9 and 12 LINE SOLID MESH commands cr n Elements can be modified to suit a particular model with the MODIFY SPLIT EMENT commands The comm VPG su ports a wide range of element types for LS DYNA and NASTRAN refer to Appendix A VPG Ca ograms 6 3 1 COARSE ELEMENT Descripti p pabilities for F E A Pr on This function coarsens 2 CQUAD4 elements or 2 TRIA elements or a combinati Usage on of a TRIA and a CQUAD4 into one element 1 VPG prompts the user to select 2 3 or 4 elements 6 35 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Once desired elements have been selected sens the selected elements and prompts for more 2 DONE coar ABORT or EXIT will exit this function 6 3 2 CHANGE Desc The larger elements were created from groupings of four smaller elements ID ription This function allows the user to change an existing element n or CURRENT umber Parts do not need to be ON Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select elements W ELEMENT
5. PAN This command enables the user to translate the model on the screen by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is m the cursor reap ars at the oved off the graphics display window pe 9 6 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING opposite edge of the window to con eft mouse button to stop the pan operation The user may activate this function by pressing Control and Middle mouse button while oving the mouse Release the mouse button to exit the function tinue the operation Click the l m CURSOR ZOOM e user picks a point about which to zoom The model is centered about this point and the user Th may move the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out The user may activate this function by pre sing Control and right mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse button to exit the function Note If the cursor is moved off the graphics display window in functions ROTATE PAN or CURSOR ROOM the cursor re appears at the opposite of the window automatically to continue the operation s WIND e user de OW ZOOM Th fines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user pr button and drags the cursor diagonally until the desired window size in full screen esses and holds the left mouse is reached Releases the left button the area included in the window will be displayed FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines a free region by
6. on This function creates elements of specific type by connecting selected nodes or points The element type refers to the analysis program defined at the creation of the database Depending on the analysis program NASTRAN or LS DYNA VPG offers a list of element types and prompts the user to select one Because the NASTRAN element types are more comprehensive they are documented first in the following pages with the LS DYNA elements follow ing PRE PROCESSOR CR ATE BEAM ELEMENT CBAR NASTRAN Descripti E on This section covers the options for the BEAM ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts point keyboard entry or any combination of the three Once the desired nodes points have been selected VPG prompts E PT OR VECTOR FOR CBAR ORIENTATION gt ENTER CBAR OFFSET VALUE 2 Once offset value has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CBAR ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node 3 gt PICK NOD 6 38 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Up to three values may be entered to define a vector in the bar s local XY plane f the bar will be plotted at the first node of the bar element as it is generated gt ENTER CBAR VECTOR i e 0 0 1 CR RBE2 NASTRAN Descrip The local Y axis o 4 If user enters VECTOR then VPG prompts EATE RIGID LINK tion This section cove
7. 6 172 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 173 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual PRE PROCESSOR DATABASE CROSS SECTION Description The definition cards in the CROSS SECTION subsection define a cross section for resultant forces written to an ASCII Section Force file Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW CROSS SECTION ID X OR E TO EXIT 2 After entering new cross section ID VPG prompts gt SELECT CROSS SECTION TYPE PLANE see step 3 SET see step 7 3 If the user selects PLANE VPG will first prompt for a part set gt SELECT PART SET VPG then prompts for a coordinate system for the cross section 4 Next the user will be prompted for the origin of the cross section 5 VPG then prompts gt ENTER LENGTH L ALONG U AND M ALONG V 0 FOR INFINITE 6 After entering the U V increments VPG displays the cross section The following commands are available for creating and altering new cross sections CREATE defines a new cross section DELETE deletes a defined cross section DISPLAY ON OFF toggles the cross section display on off MODIFY redefines a cross section SHOW SECTION CUT lists the defined cross sections in the VPG menu WINDOW VIEW 6 173 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR EXIT pts for a
8. APPENDIX A VPG Hardware and Software Requirements APPENDIX B Supported IGES Entity Types APPENDIX C RADIOSS LS DYNA NASTRAN Conversion iv C h a p t e r 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Documentation The eta VPG Documentation consists of Manuals and Tutorials This manual serves as the primary description of all eta VPG functions and provides the user with a description of each of these functions and the necessary mechanics of how to use them The Tutorials demonstrate how to implement the various functions in eta VPG for use in specific finite element modeling applications INTRODUCTION This documentation was created to complete the following objectives 1 Provide a description of general purpose pre and post processor functions for constructing finite element analysis FEA models and reviewing analysis results 2 Provide descriptions of the usage of utility modules for meeting VPG specific application requirements Examples of this are tire model generation road surface library usage suspension template usage fatigue life prediction calculation and signal processing 3 Describe methods to interface with external data reading and writing files to various MCAE solvers and accepting data from commercial CAD software Accompanying this manual is a set of Tutorials specifically designed to introduce modeling and application topics to the user The Tutorials provide examples to demonstrate th
9. Allows user to modify already created FRICTION cards DELETE This fu LIST This function lists already crea 6 181 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR DEFINE HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY Description This function is to define a list of hexahedral solid elements clusters that make up a single nt resultants that are written into the SWFORC Usage spot weld for computing the force and mome output file 1 VPG prompts CREATE This function creates an HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY card DELETE This function deletes already created HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY cards LIST This function lists already created HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY cards in pop up window MODIFY Allows user to modify already created HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY DEFINE SPRING ORIENTATION Descriptio cards n The definition card in the SPRING ORIENTATION subsection defines orientation iscrete sp vectors for d rings and dampers Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts IT 2 Once the vector ID has been established VPG prompts gt SELECT SPRING ORIENTATION OPTION gt ENTER NEW VECTOR ID X OR E TO EX After defining the vector it is displayed with its vector number in the display window YNA User s Manual for further description DEFINE SET ADAPTIVE Descriptio Note Refer to the LS D n This function is to control the adaptive refinement level by element or part set Usage
10. The functions of the THERMAL MATERIAL MENU are similar to the functions of the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU See the preceding pages for a complete description of these functions 6 151 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 11 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN he functions in this menu are organized as follows The functions in the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU are designed to define and modify the material properties in the database Parts are displayed according to the color of their material definition Parts without material definition are displayed in white T PRE PROCESSOR By switching solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP menu the gn and create materials that are solver code specific The user may assign and e materials at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed n is given in the following sections Note If the analysis code is set to LS DYNA see section 6 10 6 11 1 ASSIGN MATERIAL Description user can assi creat description of each functio This function assigns materials to selected parts Usage 1 If no materials are present in the database VPG gives the message NO MATERIALS DEFINED IN DATABASE and returns to the command prompt 2 Otherwise VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL Users may select an existing material by entering one by name or by picking an element on the screen that is assigned to the
11. gt ENTER FIRST NODE ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT This prompt is repeated until all sets are given a new set ID If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIS Once set is selected VPG pro gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW NODE SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO E 6 7 11 REVIE sc on This function displays the defined set elected the nodes of that set are displayed in the s in the MENU WINDOW When a set is s CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 12 SHOW SET NODE Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined node sets VPG displ PRE PROCESSOR ays an ID number next to each node Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all node sets CURSOR AT NODE ALL NODE SETS UNDO EXIT urns the user to the NODE SET sub menu N node set ID number may be assigned to each node viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific node set at a time 6 7 13 ANNOTATE ELEMENT D VPG displays all node sets and ret ote Because more than one escription This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 112 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 fter selecting a set VPG prompts gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPT
12. gt MATERIAL ID xx DUPLICATED FROM MATERIAL ID x 6 10 7 CREATE Description This function creates a new material Usage 6 148 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 After selecting create VPG offers the following material categories 2 Selecting either category yields an LS DYNA material card list When the desired material is selected from the list VPG displays its definition card s The user can then edit the material card for the desired properties 6 10 8 DELETE Description This function deletes the user selected materials from the database VPG displays th user exits the m 6 10 9 DEFIN Description e material card list Selected materials are marked with an asterisk When the aterial card list the selected materials are deleted E PROPERTIES This function defines or modifies the properties of a selected material Usage 1 VPG pr U o user selects a material its MATERIAL DEFINITION window appears L DEFINITION window ompts the user to select a material sers may select an existing material by picking an element or material name f a material 2 After the 3 The user may modify the properties manually in the MATERIA Define Properties 6 149 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 10 ERASE UNREF MATL Description This function automatically deletes all materials that ha
13. 1 VPG prompts ELETE This function deletes already created SET ADAPTIVE cards LIST This function lists already created SET ADAPTIVE cards in pop up window CREATE This function creates an SET ADAPTIVE card D MODIFY 6 182 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Allows user to modify already created SET ADAPTIVE cards DEFINE SPOTWELD Description This function is to define criteria for spotweld failure stress or parameter for rupture Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION VPG prompts DEFINE This function creates an SPOTWELD card This function lists already created SPOTWELD cards in pop up window REMOVE This function deletes already created SPOTWELD cards DEFINE STAGED CONSTR PART Description 2 select an option LIST This function offers a simple way to define parts that are removed added and used temporarily during the analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE This function creates an STAGED CONSTR PART card DELETE This function deletes already created STAGED CONSTR PART cards LIST This function lists already created STAGED CONSTR PART cards in pop up window MODIFY Allows user to modify already created STAGED CONSTR PART cards DEFINE TABLE Description The definition card in the TABLE subsection defines a table Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the TABLE DEFINITION window appears Note Refer to the L
14. 2 After local coordinates are defined VPG prompts gt ENTER MASS INERTIA Ixx Ixy Ixz Iyy Iyz amp Izz 6 48 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 3 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINT CREATE SPH LS DYNA Descripti S FOR ELEMENT on This function defines a SPH element on a node This se rs the options for the SPH subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usag ction cove e 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER LUMPED MASS 2 After entering a value VPG prompts IC NODES Select nodes and click DONE SPH elements will be created CR A NST NODE SET LS DYNA Descri VALUE gt P K E TE CO ption This section covers the options for the CONST NODE SET subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER APPLICABLE DOF 1 TO 7 TYPE 0 TO EXIT 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE FIRST NODE FOR CONST NODE SET 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES CREAT Description E CONST INTERPOLATION LS DYNA This section covers the options for the CONST INTERPOLATION subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT NUMBERS DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT Defines the degrees of freedom VPG prompts gt SELECT REFERENCE NODE FOR CONST INTERPOLATION 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR DEFAULT END FOR CONST INTERPOLATION 4 2 123456 gt ENTER WEIGHTING FACTOR WT 1 REAL OR
15. APPENDIX C C 14 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY 7 5 OTHERS General Comments Delete NODE SET ELEMENT SET NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 1 LOAD CURVE FUNCTION LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM SKEW_MOV RADIOSS 4 4 Conversion to LS DYNA amp NASTRAN 8 CONVERTING FROM RADIOSS TO DYNA 8 1 ELEMENT RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 BEAM BEAM JOINT If RADIOSS s JOINT has 4 nodes VPG will convert it into two CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY and one CONSTRAINED_JOINT_CYLINDRICAL Otherwise VPG will convert it into CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY MASS MASS QUAD SHELL RBODY If RADIOSS RIGID BODY does not have mass and inertia VPG will convert it into CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY Otherwise VPG will convert it into CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA RADIOSS s primary node RBID will be used as DYNA s NODEID in second card of CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA RIVET CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD If user need MAT100 spotweld instead Of CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD user can use function SPOTWELD TO MAT100 SP under ELEMENT OPTION MODIFY TYPE to convert it RLINK CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY SHELL SHELL SHEL16 SOLID SOLID SOLID SPRING If this spring has element property type 4 8 12 13 VPG will convert it into BEAM Otherwise VPG convert it into spring TRUSS BEAM XELEM CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY 8 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete VOID RIVET KJOINT NSTR
16. Description o elements that VPG does not prompt for whe TEL and SPOTWELD elements This function creates surfaces from shell elements 6 70 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Usage VPG prompts to identify fillets and segment mesh Input the largest radius for fillets to identify value between 5 50mm User can input new radius and click this button many times SEGMENT MESH Input Normal Angle between 1 30 degree and do segment mesh User can input new angle val d click this button many times 2 After click SEGMENT MESH user can adjust region if there is no need to adjust regions user can jump over this step select elements and add them to the target region select regions one by one and they are merged into one region click merge and right mouse to cancel the merge right mouse again to exit merge region select elements to make up a new region 3 After adjust regions user can generate surfaces now GENERATE SURFACE VPG will generate surfaces according to the regions 6 3 28 AU Description 1 IDENTIFY FILLETS PRE PROCESSOR ue an ADD TO REGION MERGE REGION middle mouse to accept the CREATE A REGION TO REMESH This function will automatically remesh the shell elements in database 6 71 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Usage 1 VPG prompts to do segment mesh SE
17. Once th screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A 3 If NO the user returns to step 2 If YES VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION M R L MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e g 0 0 1000 This will move transform the selected node s 1000 units along the W axis ROTATE gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT RIGHT HAND RULE W OR GLOBAL Z 4 DES heir new location o return to step 1 ELECT NODES e nodes have been chosen VPG translates them to their new location cting again will repeat the translation 6 7 After gt ected in step 5 are transformed ABOUT LOCAL RADIAL PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER INCREME ABORT NTAL RADIUS VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTIONS TO SELECT After the nodes have been chosen NO VPG translates them to t Selecting again will repeat the translation Clicks EXIT t 5 VPG prompts gt S After th Sele Afte gt r selecting nodes and clicks DONE VPG prompts SELECT REFERENCE LOCATION selecting a node VPG prompts SELECT TARGET LOCATION Select a target node then the nodes sel 6 86 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 4 18 ON OFF UNREF NODES Descript n io This function toggles unreferenced nodes ON OFF for viewing purposes 6 87 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 The vali but the values may be adjusted to suit the user s n
18. P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Af r 4 te Check VPG prompts gt ETRATED 6 5 22 CH Description setting parameters click LEMENTS BE PEN xxxx E ECK UNCONNECTED This function allows the user to check unconnected parts or assemblies Unconnecte art ted via rigid elements a node t de Us d p s are defined as any shell or solid mesh that is not connec o no connection or age 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu CHECK PART or CHECK ASSEMBLY prompts the following 2 G gt CTED PARTS TURN OFF The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 2 O Description V prompts P gt xxxx PARTS UNCONNECTED gt UNCONNECTED PARTS TURN ON CONNE 3 N RMAL ALIGNMENT This function allows the user to check normal alignment Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE TYPE OF ELEMENTS EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu RIGID LINK or SPRING ELEMENT prompts the following 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER TOLERANCE ANGLE DEFAULT IS 8 0 DEGREES Any real number is a valid entry If there are no failed elements VPG prompts 6 100 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK If there are failed elements VPG prompts gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt ADJUST THE NORMAL FOR RIGID LINK SPRING ELEMENTS AUTO
19. POST PROCESSING Usage Figure 9 75 rv peration Window The Cu e O There is s list box Th move it URVE OBJEC COP This fun PAS This fun urve window NOTE to other software such as MS Word since the format t rmat of eta Post Processor If the user wants to paste to rd function is available way DELETE This fun the selected curve s from the current curve window 9 12 6 16 C CURVE OPT The Curve O n for the curve data a curve list box on the left of th Op ation window The curve names are li e er st on thi h press the left mouse and e user can select one or several curve name s throug C T OPERATION Y ction allows the user to copy the selected curve s TE ction allows the user to paste the copied curve s to the current c The user cannot paste the curve hat copy from curve is the inner fo other software using the Clipboa ction allows the user to delete URVE DATA OPERATION ION ptions includes 9 kinds of operatio 9 73 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING NEGA This fu e the Y axis value of selected curves through multipl TIVE nction allows the user to chang ying 1 SCALE This function allows the user s erimposes the scale curv up e that scales the Y axis value of selected curves through multiplying a given Y scale factor INTEGRATIE This function allows the user to superimpose the integral of the curve on the graph which the
20. This function allows the user to define the default settings for printing or saving image files The options are shown in Figure 9 12 9 16 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Figure 9 12 Print Window 9 7 5 1 PRINTER Description The user can select a printer or select a format to save to a file Usage a Enter the printer name in the field or select from the drop down list and click option is selected the user can choose a format by selecting rop down list i RM supports ated Post e formats is selected ter a filename to y to a file of t at 9 7 5 2 Descri PRINT to print the image b If PRINT TO FILE the options in the d n FORMAT window DYNAFO Postscript PS Encapsul script EPS GIF and JPEG fil Note When PRINT TO FILE the program will prompt the user to en save the current displa he specified form PAPER ption The user can specify the paper size for the image print out Usage and or margin c Select the button at the top left to c size es are LETTER 4 8 26x11 69 and B5 7 17x10 13 ecify a paper size per by entering size in the width and field next to fine the margin of the shorter edge of the paper The program automatically determines the margin of the longer edge in order to maintain the original aspect ratio of the picture This hoose a paper Note The supported siz 8 5x11 inches A Users can also sp height fie
21. This function deletes already created CONTACT VOLUME cards MODIFY Allows user to modify already created CONTACT VOLUME cards DEFINE COORDINATE SYSTEM Description CREATE DELETE LIST This function lists already created CONTACT VOLUME cards in pop up window This function allows the user to define a local coordinate system using nodes points or vectors Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCAL SYSTEM TYPE NODES Defines a local coordinate system using three nodes SYSTEM Defines a local coordinate system from a previously defined coordinate system or key entry VECTOR Uses a vector to define the coordinate system When using the MODIFY function to modify a coordinate system VPG displays the CSYS DEFINITION CARD after the DEFINE COORDINATE CARD LIST allowing the user to key in the exact XYZ coordinates of the system DEFINE CURVE Description This function defines a load curve Usage 1 When CURVE is selected VPG displays the following options CREATE When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER DATA TIME amp VALUE FOR POINT 1 OR END 6 180 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR At least two points must be defined to create a curve ints are defined the curve is displayed DYNA User s Manual for further description EF CURVE This function allows the user to DELETE either ALL or SELECTE
22. es is picked even frames in the list window are selected and prepared for animation are selected and prepared ser to select more than frames ared for animation The left mouse button picking works in conjunction with CTRL and SHIFT whereupon the user can select any desired frames E NGE window allows the user multiple options for determining the frames to be animated shown as Figure 9 52 The RANGE option allows the user to input a select range of frames and the increment they will be run at The input field for the RANGE option is not accessible until the option is selected es clicks ENTER to make the PLAY rames Operations Figure 9 51 Frames Options Figure 9 52 Fr her options the corresponding frames are highlighted in the FRAME wind GLE FRAME is EVEN FRAMES Once Even Fram ODD FRAMES Once Odd Frames is picked odd frames in the list window for animation SELECT FRAMES Once Select Frames is picked eta Post allows u prep RANG The RA After inputs desired valu enabled RESET 9 47 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING This function clears all previously selected frames 9 11 3 ANIMATION OPERATIONS Descrip tion This function allows the user to animate the selected frames shown as Figure 9 53 Figure 9 53 Animation Control Panel PLAY eta Post stars to animate the selected frames When the PLAY icon is selected the other three icons PAUSE ST
23. escription VPG returns to the PA 6 7 24 CURRENT PART D This function lists the defined part sets in a pop up window The user can then s Usage elect the current set from those listed 1 VPG prompts T SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all part sets EXIT Once the set is selected VPG prompts SELECTED X 6 7 25 DELETE PART Description gt SELEC CURSOR AT ELEMENT 2 gt SET X IS PRE PROCESSOR gt CURRENT PART SET IS This function allows the user to remove part sets by ID number VPG is specifically configured to recognize part sets for this procedure For deleting part nodes refer to the command DELETE NODE earlier in this section Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all PART sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT ALL PART SETS EXIT 2 If the user selects ALL PART SETS in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL PART SETS Y N YES NO If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL PART SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE If NO VPG returns the user to the PART SET submenu 3 If the user selects an individual part set in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE PART SET xxxx YES 6 117 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR NO If the user selects YES VPG deletes the part set and returns the user to step 1 If the user selects NO VPG retains the part set and returns the user t
24. ite element models A 6 8 1 BOUNDARY CARDS The BOUNDARY CARDS functions create and verify constraints and loads on f e BOUNDARY CARDS MENU are organized as follows Usage inite element models The functions in th 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION Note All of these options share this standard submenu The submenu yields varying ways to access and create definition cards for the above BOUNDARY CARDS gt CREATE Defines a new card DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them 6 120 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR EXIT BOUNDARY CARDS ACOUSTIC COUPLING Description This function defines acoustic coupling boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled th descri ermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further ption De BOUNDARY CARDS AMBIENT EOS scription This function defines ambient Equation of State boundary conditions for a rmal or coupled thermal structural ana the lysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description ECTION Description BOUNDARY CARDS CONV This function defines convection boundary conditions for a thermal or cou
25. lick M 6 79 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE 6 4 12 1 MOVE NODE TO PT NODE 1 If NODE TO PT NODE is selected VPG prompts UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This previous position 2 Afte gt command returns the last node moved to its If a coincident node is encountered skip to step 3 and then to step 2 r se cation for the nodes PICK NEW LOCATION lecting a node VPG prompts for a new lo PRE PROCESSOR er may move to an existing point node by mouse or keyboard e Th ntry DO AB 3 If multiple o cident nodes are found near the cursor VPG prompts NT NODES FOUND LEMENT FOR NODE gt SELECTED NODE IS NOT CONNECTED TO DUPL NODE gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR NODE After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 1 If N e us NE or REJECT LAST returns the user to step 1 ORT exits this function and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu r coin gt COINCIDE gt SELECT E If an ELEMENT center is selected by the CURSOR and it is unconnected to the target node VPG prompts 12 2 OV M E NODE TO MID POINT ODE TO MID POINT is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE 6 80 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This co evious
26. nc n creates a surface by rotating a selected section line the generatrix the axis of revolutio 1 VPG prompts THE AXIS OF REVOLUTION gt WO POINTS The user may select a line defined by only two points to be the axis TWO PO REJ T UNDO The user has been prompted to select the first of two points required to define revolution Once the first point has been selected VPG prompts gt T a gt S VOLUTION ult NT allows user to combine line segments into one line T rejects last selection 2 VPG p gt ENTER S The user m to generate a surface or pr 360 degree angle 6 2 18 SHOW Descriptio gt SELECT SELECT THE FIRST POINT FOR THE AXIS ABORT LINE T of revolution INTS Default EC LAST POINT EXIT PRE PROCESSOR the axis of SELECT THE SECOND POINT FOR THE AXIS he user selects the second point then VPG displays a vector representing the xis of revolution ELECT A LINE AS THE GENERATRIX OF RE LINE defa SEGME REJEC DONE rompts TART AND END ANGLE DEFAULT 0 360 ay enter a desired start angle and end angle ess ENTER to generate a n This function highlights the selected surface and UV lines in white color Choosing CLEAR in NS MODULE removes highlights Usage the VPG DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIO gt SELECT SURFACE 1 VPG prompts 6 25 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R CUR
27. 0 TO gt SELECT INDEPENDENT NODES Step 3 is repeated until the user selects DONE or ABORT 6 49 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR CREATE AL DYNA Description DS LS This se r the ALDS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS This functi bitrary Location Deformable Spotweld elements Usage ction covers the options fo on will create ALDS Ar 1 ts gt SELECT MASTER PARTS gt SELECT AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART r selecting parts click EXIT PG prompts CK ALDS LOCATION Click cursor on the screen ALDS is created The contact between ALDS and CREAT M SPOTWELD LS DYNA Descripti After define the section beam card VPG promp 2 Afte V gt PI elements they connect are created automatically E MAT100 BEA on This section covers the options for the MAT100 BEAM SPOTWELD subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 After define the section beam and mat100 card VPG prompts gt SELECT MASTER PARTS gt SELECT AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART gt PICK MAT 100 SPOTWELD LOCATION Click cursor on the screen MAT100 beam spotweld is created The contact between spotwelds and elements they connect are created automatically CRE MAT100 BRICK SPOTWELD LS DYNA 2 After selecting parts click EXIT VPG prompts ATE Description This section covers the options for the MAT100 BRICK SPOTWELD subsection TE ELEMENTS Usag
28. 10 27 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY REMOVE STRAIN Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined strain values obtained from a thickness calculation 10 3 23 VIEW Description The functions in the VIEW menu are used to adjust the display of the items on the screen See section 10 1 10 3 24 SPECIAL PART KEYWORD Description The functions in this menu are used to define special keywords about PART Those keywords are as following All options use following functions CREATE create a special part keyword card DELETE delete already created special part keyword cards LIST shows a list already created special part keyword cards MODIFY prompts the user to select a special part keyword card to modify 10 4 UTILITY MENU The commands in the UTILITY menu make up VPG s tool kit Many of these commands are also located in other menus as well Figure 10 4 Utilities Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 28 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY 10 4 1 ANGLE Description The ANGLE command measures the angle between three selected points and or nodes VPG calculates the measurements of four angles for this command The first is the true angle the angle in the plane of the selected points The remaining three angles are measured from the TOP SIDE and REAR views of the model Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT VERTEX 2 VPG prompt
29. 3 EXIT terminates this function after replotting and rescaling the selected parts 10 3 11 LIST Description This function lists the part names with the corresponding PID numbers and Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 20 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY ON OFF status Parts that are currently ON are listed in their part color Parts that are currently OFF are listed in white 10 3 12 MASS CALCULATION Description This function determines the mass of a part a group of parts or the entire model Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT 2 Once the file name is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND ALL PARTS SELECT PART EXIT 3 VPG displays the SUMMARY OF MASCAL window with the part s properties and displays in the dialogue window the part s density 10 3 13 ON OFF Description This function toggles selected parts ON and OFF and the parts listed can be sorted by Part ID or Part Name with the triangle icon in the part list window The following options are given as a submenu See Figure 10 3 3 Figure 10 3 3 Part On Off Menu Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 21 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART PART NAME clicking on the listed parts will turn them on off CURSOR AT ELEMENT selects part by element DEFAULT CURSOR AT LINE selects part by line CURSOR AT SURFACE selects part by surface INVERSE ON OFF
30. A series o into VPG IGES ig model CATIA5 catpart In order to neutral line da CGS INCA and DES DXF etc Once the user has entered the command the files with the appropriat ile V i 5 7 1 3 READ LS DYNA FILE Thi tion allows the user to read both keyword and non keyword LS DYNA dyn k ct the desired file tions area The user an then select the desired file Figure 5 7 2 File Format 1 1 R D EA CAD DATA f functions in this menu allow the user to read converted wireframe and surface data The supported file formats include iges VPG lin VDA vda DXF dxf CATIA4 s STEP stp step and UG prt PRO E prt asm provide flexibility in accepting line data from different CAD systems VPG uses a ta format to communicate with these CAD systems IGES PDGS standard e suffix will be listed in the options area The user can then select the desired f 5 7 1 2 READ ABAQUS FILE PG reads ABAQUS files directly with its built in translator The VPG ABAQUS file extension s inp s func mod key files directly into VPG VPG supports versions 88 to 971 Keyword Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix dyn k mod key will be listed in the VPG FILE WINDOW The user can then sele 5 7 1 4 READ GENESIS FILE This function allows users to read GENESIS dat files directly into VPG Once the user has entered the command the files with the s
31. DONE or EXIT 6 4 10 IDENTIF Description Y NODE POINT This orresponding global location in terms of its X Y Z Usag function identifies any point node and its c coordinates and node or point number e 1 pts gt PICK NODES POINTS VPG prom If ALL NODES is selected VPG displays the appropriate numbers at the node locations n the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz If NODE is selected VPG displays the number of the node nearest the cursor location The following message will echo on the command line ODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz e point nearest the cursor essage will echo on the command line EXIT c turns the user to the NODE Note To clear the label 6 4 11 LABEL Desc If KEY IN NODE NUMBER is selected VPG displays the appropriate node location The following message will echo o gt N If POINT is selected VPG displays the number of th location The following m gt POINT xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz ompletes the command sequence and re OPTIONS menu display select CLEAR from the VPG DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS module ription This function toggles the node labels ON OFF When the s the numbers of the nodes in the database user selects LABEL VPG display 6 4 12 MOVE NODE Des ription c This function moves referenced or unreferenced nodes to any location on the disp Usage lay screen 1 C OVE NODE VPG prompts
32. Description d description of each fun elected analysis DITIONS LS DYNA N OL This function allows users to create and manipulate NASTRAN subcases Specific descriptions of each of the commands are provided in the following sections Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION SU Desc ption BCASE CONTROL CREATE SUBCASE ri This function incorporates load sets and SPC sets into a subcase The user may ase Usage use any combination of load sets and SPC sets in each subc 1 The NASTRAN SUBCASE DEFINITION window pops up and VPG prompts the user to next available set number in sequence ets If there are no SPC sets defined in the database then VPG will enter the CREATE SPC SET menu SUBCASE CONTROL DELETE SUBCASE Description enter a series of identifiers The subcase number defaults to the The user enters the name of the subcase The user can choose from a list of all available SPC s and prompt the user to define the SPC set This function deletes selected subcases from the VPG database 6 134 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts All available subcases are listed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window Note DE SPC and Load sets in the subcase SUBCASE C NTROL SHOW SUBCASE Description gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO DELETE LETE SUBCASE does not delete the O This function displ
33. Description This option allows the user to add connections to the database from a file that stores the connection information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME TABASE FILE NAME the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select l to exit 2 If the file pt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT LE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the AUTO ASSEMBLY menu 6 19 2 WRITE TO D gt ENTER DA The files with the name of a previously saved file or cance does not exist the prom FI FILE escription The function allows the user to output connection information to a file The functions in this menu are organized as follows The user selects one kind of connection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 6 202 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 If the file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes the chosen connection information to the file and returns the user to the WRITE CONNECTION menu 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N YES Overwrite the file with new data NO Exit and do nothing 6 19 3 CREATE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to create connections of five types For the details of this function refer to sectio
34. IC ALL VPG prompts enters AUTOMAT 6 161 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER FIRST PROPERTY ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If the user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each property The ated for each property in the database gt ENTER PRID number FOR PROPERTY name OR E TO EXIT 4 If the user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT PROPERTY NAME gt ENTER PART NAME OR EXIT LEM C OR PROPERTY NAME P OF A PROPERTY A r selects the property VPG prompts for a new ID gt P gt E D number FOR PROP name 6 12 17 IMPOR M SECTION Description following prompt will be repe If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values gt PICK AN E fter the use ROPERTY name IS SELECTED NTER PRI T BEA This function defines a beam section by importing from file or table Usage gt SELECT OPTIONS 1 VPG prompts for the option BY FILE VPG opens a file and imp VPG pops a table use orts a beam section BY TABLE r defines the table for beam section EXIT exits this function 6 162 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 13 CONTACT INTERFACE The function sliding and codes The functions are organized as follows s in the CONTACT INTERFACE MENU define and modify contact interface data wall for transient no
35. INATES ENTER X Y Z COORD The user enters the values for the X Y and Z coordinates e g 100 0 and 0 NODE Default POINT SHOW LAST C S e the last coordinate system has b Onc The user may select a node bination of these op any com nc a reference point has been sele gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE DONE After the user sele and continues to step 3 KEY IN XYZ The user may enter up to 3 reference points globally to define a local coordinate system 2 16 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s NODE The user may select up to 3 nodes to define a coordinate system POINT The user may select up to 3 points to define a coordinate system REJECT LAST llows the user to deselect the last reference point during the selection process This defines a local coordinate system that is parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global Y axis and the local origin at the first reference point Z AS LOCAL W AXIS 3 Once the user defines the desired coordinate system VPG displays it and prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A S VPG prompts for the next command 1 ABORT er returns to the menu 2 In certain commands such as COPY DELETE etc VPG prompts the user to select elements nod s surfaces etc A list of options will appear in the MENU WINDOW The default sele option is cursor pick at the en
36. MAT_NULL 1 ELAST 1 MAT_ELASTIC 2 PLAS_JOHNS or PLAS_ZERIL 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 3 HYDPLA 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 4 HYD_JCOOK 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 6 HYD_VISC 9 MAT_NULL 10 LAW10 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_FOAM 14 COMPSO 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC 15 CHANG 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC 19 FABRI 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC 21 DPRAG 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM NOTE There is no direct conversion of RADIOSS s material type 21 to DYNA s MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM VPG uses the following example as DYNA s material type 57 for seat foam APPENDIX C C 16 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C UNITS kg mm ms GPa MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM seat foam 571258 8200E 08 0 0045 2222 0 4 0 0 0 0 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DEFINE_CURVE 2222 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0625 0 119800001 0 122500002 0 383390009 0 177499995 0 377400011 0 234999999 0 413399994 0 280699998 0 444999993 0 344999999 0 466100007 0 397000015 0 497999996 0 444900006 0 53670001 0 49000001 0 561600029 0 528999984 0 601000011 0 564999998 0 653999984 0 597000003 0 721000016 0 622500002 0 818000019 0 644900024 0 897000015 0 660000026 0 949999988 0 666999996 0 989000022 0 670000017 0 99000001 0 671999991 1 0 0 699000001 1 20000005 0 75 1 51999998 0 800000012 2 19000006 0 808000028 2 30299997 22 DAMA 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 23 LAW23 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 24 CONC 16 MAT_PSEUDO_TENSOR 25 COMPSH 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_EL
37. NE IN LOCAL UV ECTION UV PLANE REATE LOCAL COORDINATES IC ODE PT FOR ORIGIN prompts the user to create a local coordinate sys ugh explanation of how to create a lo al Coordinate System Section 2 16 4 VPG prompts CCEPT Y N YES go t O go to step 7 RFACE VPG CT SURFACE ABORT step 6 6 VPG prompts YES go to step 9 7 VPG gt PICK NODE PT VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system to isplays the desired coordinate system CCEPT Y N A 9 6 83 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 4 15 RE M Descriptio NU BER NODES n R ption of creating a summary tabl part The user may renumber node Usage enumbers all nodes in the existing database There is also an o e report of the node ranges between each s by sequence or parts 1 VPG p gt EN RING OPTION rompts TER RENUMBE 2 ALL PA 3 4 ARTING NODE NUMBER FOR EACH PART Y N YES ENTER STARTING NODE NUMB R FOR PART xxxx Once a number has been entered the prompt will read database already exists VPG Surface with projection of elements E be projected onto the surface using PROJECT NODE lements to RTS go to step 4 M TI UL PLE PARTS go to step 5 VPG prompts for gt ASSIGN ST a starting node number gt E gt NODE x TO xx ASSIGNED NEXT NODE NO xxxx gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR
38. Once the part is selected VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS TURNED ON gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON This step is repeated until the user selects exit 10 3 6 CHANGE PART COLORS Description This function allows the user to change the color of a part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO CHANGE COLOR gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target part VPG prompts gt PART xxxx part name IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT The user selects the desired color from the color bar 10 3 7 CREATE Description This function creates a new part in the VPG database The user must name the new part with any combination of up to eight alphanumeric characters Usage 10 16 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 17 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY 1 VPG displays following DYNA part type If PART OPTION is selected go to step 2 if PART COMPOSITE OPTION is selected go to step 3 2 If PART OPTION is selected VPG displays the PART DEFINITION window as below See figure 10 3 2 Figure 10 3 2 Part Definition Window The user edits the window to create the part If SECID MID EOSID HGID or TMID is selected the user is prompted to edit another window for these properties before retuning to the PART DEFINITION window OK completes the part and returns the user to the PART CONTROL menu The materials and properties of a new part do not hav
39. SELECT A LINE TO ALIGN NODES After selecting a line VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES TO ALIGN 2 NODES BETWEEN PT NODE ription This command generates nodes that are spaced equally between two existing selected n and are labeled w Usage odes or points The new nodes are displayed as unreferenced free nodes ith asterisks 1 VPG gt S prompts for each point node ELECT NODE POINT 1 6 74 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R EXIT returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu The user can select the node nearest the cursor by pressing the left mouse ter N VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE POINT 2 2 gt lid 3 T nate button instead of typing the let VPG prompts ENTER NUMBER OF NODES BETWEEN TWO NODES POINTS Any positive integer is va he user has the option to enter EXIT to termi PRE PROCESSOR Asterisks een two existing nodes 6 4 3 CHECK DUPLICATE ID Des represent unreferenced nodes that have been created betw cription This function renumbers any duplicate node numbers found in the VPG database Users are un may import files he dupli s according to the value of the maximum node number 1 Usa able to create duplicate node numbers from within the program However users containing duplicate nodes from other programs VPG will renumber t cate ge 1 If any d ges echo on screen and in the VPG msg user files located in t
40. Seatbelt LS DYNA S CELAS1 amp CELAS2 Spring NASTRAN S Mass LS DYNA NASTRAN M Joint LS DYNA SPJ RVJ Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 40 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY Gouraud shading is the default setting for VPG Flat Shading W Edge displays the element outline in a shaded display Flat Shading with feature line displays feature line in a shaded display user can adjust width or color for edge and feature line TRANSPARENCY FACTOR Description This function sets a degree of transparency for the shading option Factors closer to 0 0 zero increase opacity while factors closer to 1 0 one decrease opacity FILL HIDE METHOD Description VPG provides two methods of FILLHIDE a hidden surface plot for all of the displayed elements STENCIL BUFFER and POLYGON OFFSET Various graphics cards may provide an improved display appearance by using either method It is known that on SGI IRIX workstations specifying the STENCIL BUFFER option may result in improved graphic display performance AUTOMATIC DELETE NODES WHEN DELETING ELEMENTS toggle Description This option controls when deleting elements whether to prompt user delete nodes making up those elements The default option is on VPG will not prompt user whether to delete nodes relative nodes will be deleted directly 10 4 13 SUMMARY REPORT Description This function will export summary of database as report 10 5 DISPLAY OPTIONS Description The functions of the DIS
41. Some or all of the unreferenced nodes may be deleted using the DELETE UNREFERENCED NODE option VPG will not merge nodes belonging to the same element i e zero length This function generates a new set of unreferenced nodes at a user specified location from either referenced or unreferenced nodes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES Once the nodes have been selected DONE concludes this step 2 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system 3 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A If YES the user goes to step 4 If NO the user returns to step 2 If ABORT the user exits the function COPY and returns to the NODE OPTIONS menu 4 If the user selects YES VPG prompts for the number of copies and the type of transformation gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES positive integer gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e g 0 0 1000 This entry will copy the selected node s 1000 units along the W axis ROTATE gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT Enter the angle increment right hand rule for local W or global Z ABORT 6 4 7 CREATE NODE Description This function generates UNREFERENCED NODES on points or by entering the coordinates 6 77 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PR
42. This function changes the UV line density of the selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 VPG labels the edge numbers on the surface and prompts the user to enter the number of UV lines along edges 1 and 2 3 VPG creates a set of UV lines along edges 1 and 2 These UV lines are included in the original part ly the appearance of the selected surfaces It does not a T PRE PROCESSOR Note This operation changes on change the integrity of the surf ce 6 2 12 SURFACE INTERSEC Description This function creates a line at the intersection between two selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt the user to choose a surface 2 Afte gt 3 After sel s a line at the line is included in the current part SELECT THE FIRST SURFACE r selec SELEC ting the first surface VPG prompts the user for the second surface T THE SECOND SURFACE e ting the second surface VPG automatically create c intersection of the two surfaces The newly created 6 22 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 2 13 UV LINE ON Description OFF toggle This function controls the on and off display of UV lines on a surface the outcome of meshing trimming or splitting of surfaces De r p Note Toggling the UV lines off has no effect on 6 2 14 SCALE sc i tion This function allows the user to scale selecte s loba h d surfa
43. Translational 3 N1 N3 N5 Direction amp Plane of Translation TJ 6 47 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Locking 3 N1 N3 N5 Axis amp Plane LJ t the second part rigid body with material type 20 for the joint All the required coincident nodes on the second part will be created and added second rigid body as CONSTRAINED_EXTRA_NODES_NODES The following will take create locking as example Usage The program then prompts the user to selec to the 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT JOINT TYPE 2 VPG prompts 3 VPG prompts gt P 4 After part is selected VPG prompts N RIGID BODY FOR THE JOINT RIGID BODY TO DEFINE THE 1 AXIS OF JOINT 6 VPG prompts gt PICK 3RD NODE ON RIGID BODY TO DEFINE THE PLANE OF THE JOINT CREATE PLOTEL ELEMENT LS DYNA Description gt ENTER RELATIVE PENALTY STIFFNESS 1 0 gt SELECT 1ST PART RIGID BODY ONLY FOR JOINT ICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART gt PICK NODE O 5 VPG prompts gt PICK 2ND NODE ON ST PRE PROCESSOR This section covers the options for the PLOTEL ELEMENT subsection of C E Usage REATE LEMENTS gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT CREATE INERTIA LS DYNA Desc iption 1 VPG prompts This step is repeated until user enters ABORT or EXIT r This section covers the options for the INERTIA subsection of CREATE ELEM Usage ENTS 1 VPG prompts to define local coordinates
44. all menus material o tact types and element types will be con istent with LS DYNA models On ab the user can define the default manner in which various entities will be s background colors and the 4 15 VIEW This menu allows users to manipulate the model in the Display Window Views may be saved and recalled by the user 4 16 MACRO The MACRO menu allows the user to record commands executed by VPG and the replays those command in an automated fashion 4 17 HELP The Versi submenu allows user to identify the build date and version of the VPG software The Online Help menu provides access to the on line version of this user manual in a searchable format processing menu The damage for LS DYNA results of this fatigue g this menu option the rocessor application is rary database is then then opened Once the Postprocessor a restored 4 14 UTILITIES The UTILI m models c n s the DISPLAY t disp yed the default shading parameters menu position configuration of the top menu la s on 4 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r Chapter FILE MANAGER Chapter 5 File Manager The options available in FILE MENU allow the user to input data from different analysis programs into VPG A detailed description of each function in the FILE menu is given in the following sections 5 1 NEW This function allows the user to create a Figure 5 1 File Menu new data se f
45. and WINDOW Boxes that are selected DISPLAY ON OFF Toggle switch LIST Lists the box ID numbers in a pop up window MODIFY Allows the user to modify a selected box with new point node or xyz coordinates This command also displays the UL coordinates representing the two corners of the box in global coordinates RENUMBER Renumber the selected box ID numbers or all boxes SHOW ys the nodes and elements of a box in white The box may be by cursor pick or by box ID VIEW Sends the user to the VIEWING OPTIONS MENU hen CREATE is selected VPG prompts D X OR E TO EXIT w box ID VPG prompts NER OF THE BOX This function creates a ne and defines the two opposing corners using either nodes poin coordinates DELETE are displayed in gray When the user exits the menu they are deleted Displa selected EXIT 2 W gt ENTER NEW BOX I 3 After entering ne gt DEFINE FIRST COR 4 OX After selecting the first corner VPG prompts gt DEFINE SECOND CORNER OF THE B Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 178 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR DEFINE BOX DRAWBEAD Description Defines a specific box or tube shaped volume around a draw bead Usage VPG prompts CREATE ard This function deletes already created BOX DRAWBEAD cards LIST This function lists already created BOX DRAWBE
46. and the section included the region is displayed in full screen ACTIVE WINDOW This command allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed geometry model for more detaile The user defines the region by dragging a window over the desired ow volume in space as d viewing or editing eta VPG displays th area e elements lines and surfaces within the wind active Other objects on the screen remain masked and inactive FEATURES FILL Rescales the model to include all entities belonging to parts that are currently turned on FILL auto ic r out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen mat ally zooms in o TOP VIEW Automatically displays the model from the TOP or in the XY plane SIDE VIEW in the XZ plane Automatically displays the model from the SIDE or REAR VIEW Automatically displays the model from the REAR or in the YZ plane ISOMETRIC VIEW Automatically displays the model from the isometric plane 60 degree isometric CLEAR R tities from the screen emoves the highlighted en REDRAW MODEL PG updates the scree Occasionally the use of specific commands p e g when operating the dynamic zoom at e rmal are displayed it is necessary to activate the REDRAW c sent the element normal eta V n after each command requires updating of the image with an additional ste the sam time that the element no ommand to resize the arrows that repre 2 10 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C
47. gt SELECT e nearest to the cursor gt X type INCLUD SET 3 C RENT cripti This function allows the user to select the current set from a list of previously defined sets Usage 6 105 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST e part 2 Once the set s is selected VPG prompts gt SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET TE Description List of all sets CURSOR AT element nod EXIT The selected set is current 6 6 4 DELE This function allows the user to remove sets by ID number Selecting the set name also indicates where the set has been used such as in boundary conditions VPG is Usage specifically configured to recognize sets for this procedure prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST C ode part A E 2 If the user selects ALL type SETS in step 2 the sets are highlighted in red in the VPG MENU WINDOW gt OK TO DELETE ALL type SETS Y N YES NO If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL type SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE ighlighted sets will be deleted 6 6 5 REMOVE EMPTY SETS NODE Description 1 VPG List of all sets URSOR AT element n LL type SETS XIT PRE PROCESSOR If NO VPG returns the user to the set submenu 3 If the user selects an individual set in step 1 the set will be highlighted in red When the user exits the subm
48. the Mesh Check window is displayed as follows gt INPUT MESH CH y modify any of the model checking parameters in the table and RT window is displayed summarizing the model mesh quality by parts The user ma selects OK A MESH CHECK REPO 6 5 26 GA REP Desc P AIR ription This function will fill in the gaps between selected elements 6 103 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 After selecting elements and click DONE VPG prompts NO If YES is selected gap between elements will be repaired free nodes will be 6 6 SET MENU LS DYNA Th an The follo ing options are available in the SET MENU when the analysis code is set to LS DYNA prompts gt ACCEPT REPAIRING RESUTL YES generated after merging elements If NO is selected nothing is done e functions in the SET MENU create sets that facilitate the organization of data specification d output control data w Note When the analysis code is set to NASTRAN see section 6 7 Each option contains a similar submenu with the following options for manipulating the output control of their re ve set groups ANNOTATE CURRENT DELETE LIST REVIEW LIST specti CREATE REMOVE EMPTY SETS REMOVE UNREF SETS INCLUDE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS REMOVE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS RENUMBER SET 6 104 eta VPG version 3 3 User
49. 2 Screen Y 3 Screen Z axis is d ction from the screen to the Usage lar axi The user defines e ta by entering the angle of a particu th ro tion s The angle is i e tat e direction i e follows w te ation seful after executing the defined as positive f th ro ion corresponds to a counterclockwis the right hand rule 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER 3 ANGLES TO ROTATE The user may no en r the desired X Y Z angles of rot P AT R N are especially u Note The functions RE E OTATION and REVERSE ROTATIO above command Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY 10 1 9 VIRTUAL AXES ROTATION Description This function allows the user to rotate an object about the global or virtual X e keyboard Y and Z axes according to an angle specified via th Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER 3 ANG S TO ROTATE r nt LE The use e rs e desired global X Y Z angles of rotation e th e functions R TATION and R specially useful after executing the mm d 10 1 10 DEFINE TITLE Note Th EPEAT RO EVERSE ROTATION are e above co an Description This function allows the user to enter a title or a text label on the display screen Usage 1 VPG prompts CT s ct the TL CURSOR LOCATION EXIT th desired location and clicking the left mouse button 3 VPG prompts ses enter The text appears at the usly selected location 10 1 11 CURSOR ZOOM Description gt INPUT CHARA ER SIZE 1
50. 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMBINED ROAD SURFACE NAME The combined road surface will have a new name 4 Once the name is entered VPG prompts gt ROAD SURFACES COMBINED SUCCESSFULLY 7 8 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 1 7 EXPORT ROAD Description This option allows the user to save a user defined or modified road surface to a user defined road surface library Multiple road surface libraries can be created with multiple road surfaces in each Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SAVE ROAD SURFACE IN LIBRARY ed library gt ENTER ROAD SURFACE NAME y ieve a saved road surface access the USER DEFINED key in the SELECT is specified VPG lists the road surfaces in the MENU WINDOW gt ENTER ROAD LIBRARY FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT This creates the road surface library file or specifies a previously defin 2 VPG prompts Once the road surface name is entered the road surface is saved to the road surface librar 3 To retr FROM LIBRARY menu VPG prompts for the library name Once the library VPG MODULES 7 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 Th Au the Th of u tress strain history and tribution information are needed for chassis suspension durability analyses the beam model is rec str ormation on suspension definition see the eta VPG Applications nual Section 1 3 Currently two Front and eigh
51. 3 User Manual UTILITY COPY CURVE Description This function copies load curves Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST 2 After selecting a curve or several curves and click EXIT copied curve s will be added into the list CHECK SUSPENSION CURVE Description This function checks curves used in suspension bushing 10 4 9 SHOW LINES Description This function identifies any existing line and its direction VPG highlights the selected line and marks its points with arrowheads that are oriented in the direction of the line 10 4 10 DATABASE STATISTICS Description This function displays statistics about the VPG database regarding geometry models materials and interfaces and user can export the result to an excel format file The figures are displayed in the following window Figure 10 4 10 Database Statistics Window 10 4 11 HARDCOPY DEFAULTS Description This function allows the user to define the default settings for printing or saving image files Refer the detailed descriptions in section 5 9 10 4 12 SETUP DEFAULTS Description The SETUP DEFAULTS window contains various preprocessing utilities that are toggle switch activated See the figure below Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 37 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY Figure 10 4 12 Setup Defaults Menu A detailed description of each option is given in the following section ANALYSIS PROGRAM Description This option adjusts the property and material data to match th
52. 6 14 17 SENSOR Description This function provides a convenient way of activating and deactivating boundary conditions airbags discrete elemen d walls single points constraints and constrained nodes Usage ts joints contact rigi 1 When CREATE is sel cted VPG prompts to select option e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 18 TERMINATION Description This function defines the analysis termination point in reference to a particular node or body The nodal stop condition works on the global coordinate position while the body stop condition works on the relative global translation Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 15 SUPERELEMENT NASTRAN T EMENT S E menu allow the user to assign and modify SUPERELEMENT I D numbers within a VPG database field 9 of a NASTRAN bulk data GRID card The following options are available in the SUPERELEMENT menu he functions in the SUPEREL A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note The SUPERELEMENT option does not appear in the PRE PROCESSING MENU when the analysis software is LS DYNA 6 15 1 ASSIGN RESIDUAL Description This function allows the user
53. ALE FSI These types of models are useful for simulating airbag inflation or explosive blasts This capability is available in LS DYNA Drop Test Module The Drop Test Menu DTM allows users to quickly set up and execute drop tests for electronics aerospace and product packaging design simulations 1 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features This chapter provides an overview of the main features of eta VPG Detailed descriptions of the use of these features are provided in subsequent chapters 2 1 GENERAL The eta VPG Processor has a complete graphical user interface that is operated on Windows Windows NT and above and UNIX Linux based workstations including IBM HP SUN and SGI operating systems The model generation input file preparation and results processing activities are all performed in an identical environment The solution can be executed on both local and or remote server systems FEATURES 2 2 PRE PROCESSOR eta VPG s extensive Preprocessing capabilities contain all of the functions necessary for expedient high quality finite element modeling Users can read in data with VPG s CAD interface build their model from scratch read in an existing model or a combination of the approaches CAD INTERFACE eta VPG enables users to read in CAD geometry data from the following CAD systems Catia Version 4 Catia
54. Analysis results are seamlessly imported from VPG s LS DYNA and NASTRAN solvers to the post processor for quick easy interpretation of analysis results Once entered VPG s full complement of post processing functions allow the user to graphically display and manipulate simulation result files with contour and deformation animation contour plots and fills and geometry deformation 2 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s VPG s post processing functions provide the user with numerous ways of animating and viewing the analysis results The user has the options of animating select frames viewing single frames altering the time step rotating the model or viewing only select parts of the model The post processing function automatically prompts the user for the result file when activated VPG post processes the following types of result data D3PLOT d3plot01 etc DYNA DEFORMED GEOMETRY defgeo HISTORY his NASTRAN PUNCH pch NASTRAN OUTPUT2 op2 NASTRAN PACKED PUNCH pac VPG provides an option to create a more compact post processing file This binary file called a pp file due to its extension pp is created after reading the result file into eta VPG Once the pp file is created the user may read this file to save both disk storage space and time when reloading the analysis results The pp file requires less space than the analysis result
55. CELAS1 SPRING Create a node for spring direction RBAR RIVET CONM2 MASS CBEAM BEAM CROD TRUSS CTUBE BEAM ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL SHELL 13 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY VPG deletes PGAP properties NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 4 PSHELL 1 SHELL PSOLID 14 GENERAL_SOLID PBAR 3 BEAM PBEAM 3 BEAM PELAS 4 SPRING PROD 2 TRUSS PTUBE 3 BEAM 13 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 4 MAT1 1 ELASTIC 13 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 4 SPC BCS NODE FORCE CLOAD SHELL PRESSURE PLOAD INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY 13 5 OTHERS VPG deletes all other cards that can t be converted APPENDIX C C 28 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 4 LOAD CURVE FUNCTION LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM FRAME
56. CHECK JOINT Description This will identify all spring elements that are non zero length and give the user the option of placing these elements in a n PART Y N 2 If the user selects Y the elements detected will be placed in a new part named NON ZERO If NO the function is terminated 3 Selecting YES wil t at least one other beam sp term This function allows the user to check for loose joint elements Usage prompts ENTS FOUND gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N If YES is selected the PART DEFINITION window pops up After clicking OK to MODEL CHECKER menu MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 20 CHE NERTIA Description 1 VPG gt xxxx UNCONNECTED JOINT ELEM YES NO close the window the user returns to the the If NO is selected the user returns to CK MASS_I This function allows the user to check for loose mass and inertia Usage 1 If loose mass or inertia entities are found VPG prompts gt XX LOOSE MASS INERTIAS FOUND INCLUE ELEMENTS IN NEW PART Y N 6 5 21 CHECK PENETRATION Description This function allows the user to check penetration Those penetrated elements in art are shown highlighted Usage master p 1 VPG prompts gt S 2 VPG p gt SELECT SLAVE PART 3 The Penetration Check window pops up See the following figure ELECT MASTER PART rompts 6 99 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E
57. CONTACT_2D_PENALTY CONTACT_2D_PENALTY_FRICTION APPENDIX C C 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C CONTACT_2D_SLIDING_ONLY CONTACT_2D_SLIDING_VOIDS CONTACT_2D_TIED_SLIDING CONTACT_GEBOD Convert slave type 2 3 5 6 into segment set Convert master type 2 3 into segment set DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 CONTACT_AIRBAG_SINGLE_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_GENERAL 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_NODES_TO 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_ONE_WAY 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID _TO_SURFACE CONTACT_CONSTRAINT_NODES 7 SLIDE VOID _TO_SURFACE CONTACT_CONSTRAINT_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID _TO_SURFACE CONTACT_DRAWBEAD 8 SLIDE CONTACT_ERODING_NODES_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_ERODING_SINGLE_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_ERODING_SURFACE_TO 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE CONTACT_FORCE_TRANSDUCER 7 SLIDE VOID _PENALTY CONTACT_FORCE_TRANSDUCER 7 SLIDE VOID _CONSTRAINT CONTACT_FORMING_NODES_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_FORMING_ONE_WAY 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_FORMING_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_NODES_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE CONTACT_RIGID_NODES_TO_RIGID_BODY 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_ONE_WAY_TO 6 SLIDE VOID _RIGID_BODY CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_TWO_WAY_TO 6 SLIDE VOID _RIGID_BODY CONTACT_SINGLE_EDGE 7 SLIDE VOID
58. CONTACT_SINGLE_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SLIDING_ONLY 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SLIDING_ONLY_PENALTY 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIEBREAK_NODES_TO 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE CONTACT_TIEBREAK_SURFACE_TO 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE CONTACT_TIED_NODES_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO 7 SLIDE VOID _SURFACE CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE 2 TIED CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_FAILURE 2 TIED RIGIDWALL RIGIDWALL 3 6 OTHERS Delete T SHELL SET Delete all other cards that can t be converted DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 APPENDIX C C 10 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C DEFINE_COORDINATE_NODES SKEW_MOV DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM SKEW_MOV DEFINE_COORDINATE_VECTOR SKEW_FIX DEFINE_CURVE FUNCTION 4 CONVERTING FROM NASTRAN TO DYNA 4 1 ELEMENT General Comments When some RBE2s share the common nodes merge them into one RBE2 Delete RBE3 amp CGAP elements NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 CBAR BEAM RBE2 CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY CONSTRAINED_NODE_SET According to the Dof SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID CELAS2 DISCRETE Create DEFINE_SD_ORIENTATION to define the spring direction CELAS1 DISCRETE Create DEFINE_SD_ORIENTATION to define the spring direction RBAR CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD CONM2 MASS amp INERTIA CBEAM BEAM CROD BEAM CTUBE BEAM ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL SHELL 4 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY General Comments Delete PGAP properties Convert spring stiffness
59. DYNA User s Manual for further description INI TRESS Description T COND CARDS S This card defines initial stress and plastic strains in the Hughes Liu beam elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS TEMPERATURE Description This card defines initial nodal point temperatures using nodal set ID s or node numbers These initial temperatures are used in a thermal only analysis or a coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT CO ICS Desc PRE PROCESSOR ND CARDS VEHICLE KINEMAT ription This card defines initial vehicle kinematics Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual rther description for fu ITY Description INIT COND CARDS VELOC This card defines initial nodal point translational velocities using nodal set ID s This may also be used for sets in which some nodes have other velocities Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS VOID Description T part set ID s or part numbers Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND Description his card defines initial voided CARDS VOLUME FRACTION This card defines initial volume fraction Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 130 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 8 4 LOAD CARDS Description The LOAD CARD submenu cont
60. Desc 6 25 BUTTERWORTH FILTER ription This function allows the user to smooth the curves according to the Butterworth filter specifications Usage Select the Butterworth type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular butto Click T L nd prompt the user to input 9 79 nter the appropriate coeff wi he default values for n below the FILTER ing the Select button the DATA CON RO windows will pop up a parameters as Figure shown The user may e the corresponding icient parameters in the DATA CONTROL ndows which displays t Figure 9 79 DATA CONT Window for Butterworth Filter ROL 9 12 Desc 6 26 PASSBAND FREQUENCY ription The maximum passband frequen is determined th cy rough the equation Passband ber of Points on Graph Time Duration The default value is 10 of the p 9 12 Desc u assband frequency ser Total Num 6 27 STOPBAND FREQUENCY ription Stopband frequency is formula Stopband Passban ted duser Passbanmax Pass e ass 9 12 MA Desc banduser The default value depends on th P banduser 6 MAXIMUM 28 PASSBAND RIPPLE X PASSBRIPP ription Passband rip v e e en 0 0 and 1 0 dB ple alu is b twe 9 12 6 29 MINIMUM STOPBAND ATTENUATION MIN ATT 1 0 DB Description Stopband attenuation must be greater than 1 0 dB The stopband frequency and maximum passband ripple should not be too close to either the given low or high end li
61. Description This function shows a xploded view for the mode n e l user can the Identify Node and Identify Element while the view is exploded This view cannot be saved in the exploded iew Nodes and elements will configuration and is only a graphical di the exploded v not be transformed or translated by use of this function splay of Usage a dialog 1 VPG opens window 10 8 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY Explode by user can se ct by part or part set If P le art Set is selected the sets will xp ault is 0 00 a n surroundings explode surroundings e be grouped in the display t a Explode Scale se e lode scale level def Identify Node identify ode under explode Identify Element identify an elem nt under e OK exit and terminate explod effect O F 10 1 18 NORMAL COLOR ON F Description This function toggles normal co mode on or off f lor or showing element normal or orientation UTILITY Usage 1 VPG prompts gt NORMAL ORIENTATION COLO ON or R R on will be shown with colour instead gt NORMAL ORIENTATION COLO OFF When this option is on the normal or orientati of arrow 10 1 19 RIGID NODE ON OFF Description This function toggles the rigid b y node on od or off when creating rigid link Usage N or own as highlighted spots when 10 1 20 ROTATE CENTER ON OFF Desc 1 VPG prompts gt RIGID BODY NODE FILTER IS O gt RI
62. Directly selec URSOR TO DEF 6 27 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR TRIM SURF Description ACE CIRCLE This function cuts circles on a selected surface The user defines the location of the circle via mou Usage se pick 1 VPG promp gt SELECT THE CENTER OF THE CIRCLE The user defines the center of the circle anywhere on the surface gt SELECT A POINT ON THE CIRCLE The user may select a second point on the surface to define the radius of the circle VPG proceeds to draw the circle 2 The user should then select exit VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY ABORT SURFACE BOUNDARY Selects the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the outer boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE Deselects the curve selected for the trim operation DONE EXIT ts 6 28 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR ts T CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY REJECT LAST CURVE DONE EXIT 4 VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N YES generates a trimmed surface NO generates a trimmed surface and retains a copy of the original surface 5 The user is returned to step 1 of TRIM SURFACE command TRIM SURFACE INTERSECTION LINE Description 3 VPG promp
63. ELEMENT Descript This function lists the defined element sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed Usage gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 gt ELEMENT SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET 6 7 16 DELETE ELEMENT Description 1 VPG prompts List of all element sets Once the set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED This function allows the user to remove element sets by ID number VPG is lly configured to recognize element sets for this procedure For deleting element node r to the command in section 6 7 4 specifica s refe 6 114 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST ALL ELEMENT SETS UNDO EXIT T SETS in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL ELEMENT SETS Y N YES NO gt ALL ELEMENT SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE If NO VPG returns the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu 3 If the user selects an individual element set in step 1 VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED If the user selects EXIT VPG deletes the element set After again selecting EXIT the user returns to the ELEMENT SET menu 6 7 17 INCLUDE ELEMENTS Description List of all element sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT 2 If the user selects ALL ELEMEN If YES VPG issues the following message This functio
64. EXIT D 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt 6 7 30 REVIEW LIST escription This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the parts of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 31 SHOW SET PARTS Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined part sets VPG Usage displays the appropriate ID numbers on the screen next to each defined part 1 VPG prompts CURSOR AT ELEMENT VPG displays the selected part sets and returns the user to the PART SET submenu Note Because more than one ID number may be assigned to each part viewing all of the ID numbers at once larify the screen by displaying one specific part set at a time D gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all part sets EXIT may be confusing The user may c 6 7 32 SET ON OFF PART escription This function allows the use It allows for convenient organization r to turn on and off parts included in a selected part set of parts in a complicated model and manipulation of large numbers of parts in a sub assembly level 6 119 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 8 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS LS DYNA The functions of the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU create and verify constraints and loads on fin detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Description
65. FUNCTIONS eta VPG includes a comprehensive selection of functions for creating and modifying line data and CAD surfaces In addition to automeshing functions element generation through 2 line 4 line 6 line and 8 line mesh creates beam shell and solid elements COMPREHENSIVE MODEL MODIFICATION FUNCTIONS All aspects of the model may be modified using the pre processing menus All defined material elements nodes contacts and analysis parameters may be modified deleted copied etc as required by the user FULL SYSTEM ASSEMBLY The ASSEMBLY menu allows users to create assemblies which may be modified as a group This includes part replacement and connectivity attributes of the model 2 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s AUTOMESHING eta VPG s automeshing function easily eliminates 90 of the time required to mesh trimmed and standard surfaces The automeshing function creates quadrilateral elements with a minimum of triangular elements Various automeshing algorithms are available including Triangular Meshing Paving Mesh and Topology Automeshing A tetra element automesher is available generating both 4 noded and 10 noded solid elements MATERIAL ELEMENT PROPERTIES eta VPG supports all LS DYNA and NASTRAN material and element property cards eta VPG s ability to create and assign material and element properties directly on a displayed model greatly reduces the
66. Figure 9 17 Light Adjustment Control Window Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING AMBIENT DIFFUSE and SPECULAR color by clicking the color box next to the property type The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 9 17 The user may click and drag the marker in the color map window to change the color of the selected material The program updates the model display with the new material color in the graphic display window It also shows the new material color in the color box on the low left side of the control window The user can compare the new material color with the original color on the right The user may also click and dr adjust the brightness of the selected material The RB re shown in the column on the right side of the control window The user may change these values to change the material color The user may choose any of the four scales to show the RGB B Hex or HSV When the obtained click OK to accept the color and exit the control window Otherwise indow T Close the light property control window and exit the function P ag the slider in the vertical bar to G values of the material color a values Byte RG desirable color is click CANCEL to reject the color and exit the control w SHININESS The user may click and drag the slider to adjust the shininess of the selected material RESET MATERIAL Resets the material color to the default setting EXI 9 8 7 COLOR MA Description Eta P
67. G FEATURE LINES VP prompts gt GENERATE PLOTEL ELEMENTS OR LINES FOR EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu PLOTEL or LINE SEGMENTS prompts the following VPG prompts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS or LINE SEGMENTS IN A NEW PART in the current part 6 5 16 SECTI Desc ption 3 Y N NO Plotel elements or Line segments will be included YES VPG prompts for a new part ON CUT ri This function cuts through the plate and solid elements at a UV plane that the user l elements at that plane Usage defines and creates plote 1 G gt C ORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN n plotels VPG prompts the user to create a local system 2 Once em is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the p pt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A gt ENTER DISTANCE OF SECTION PLANE FROM W 0 t a distance along the W axis from the selected origin of the coordinate The cross section of plotels will be created at the distance W in the UV plane 3 V pts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N added to the current part and the user will return to the MODEL CHECKER menu 4 If YES is selected the PART DEFINITION window pops up 6 5 17 CHECK FREE SURFACE Desc iption VP prompts REATE LOCAL CO VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to create sectio the desired coordinate syst rom YES Any real value is a valid response
68. IS SELECTED user enters EX art from gr signed to it VPG returns to step 1 DYNA Th lected element sections from the database Sections are displayed in t Selecting a section places an asterisk by its name When the user exits the menu all asterisked sections will be deleted The following menu options allow the user to in C select part by drag window M int region SELECT ALL U U 6 12 9 DEFINE PROPERTIES NASTRAN Desc is function deletes se he section card list select the desired sections SECTION NAME select section by name also displays section formation in dialogue window URSOR AT ELEMENT select section by element default WINDOW ULTI PT REGION select part by user defined multi po PRE PROCESSOR NDO ALL NDO LAST ription This function allows the user to define or modify the selected property Usag e 1 Select a property by picking an element or property name of a property 2 After the user selects a property VPG displays a definition card for editing the element property and prompts SECTION ID X IS SELECTED e The user may manually on card 6 12 10 VPG prompts the user to select a property gt 3 VPG displays the user defined properties in a tabl e properties and or their values in the definiti modify th DEFINE SECTION LS DYNA Desc ption ri This function allows the user to define or modify the selected property Usage 1 VPG dis
69. N2 N1 and N2 cannot be greater than 199 The user may choose a desired section line once the user selects the section lines for N1 and N2 SECTION U V LINE gt SELECT SECTION LINE TO SPLIT SURFACE SURFACE INTERSECTION gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE Once the user selects the second surface the first surface splits at the intersection of the two surfaces The user may split the second surface at the same intersection SPLINE CURVE gt SELECT NEXT POINT FOR SPLINE CURVE The user may pick up to 500 locations on the surface in order to complete a spline curve LINEAR SEGMENTS CT NEXT POINT FOR LINEAR SEGMENT user may pick up to 500 locations on the surface to complete a select lines in database as split lines 2 Upon selection of the surfa gt SELECT OPTION TO User selects a displayed section line to split a surface TWO POINTS ON BOUNDARY gt SELECT FIRST POINT ON BOUNDARY gt SELECT SECOND POINT ON BOUNDARY gt SELE The piecewise linear curve CURVE IN DATABASE gt SELECT LINES The user may OVERLAP SURFACE gt SELECT AN OVERLAP SURFACE 6 24 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R The user may select an overlap surface as split line DEFINE LCS gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN This will lead user to create a coordinate system 6 2 17 SECTIO Description EXIT N REVOLUTION This fu tio up to 360 about a vector n Usage
70. NUMBE gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR NE R 2 selects a desired element VPG prompts the user to enter the new CR TO IGNORE ser enters a number that already exists the prompt will read gt ELEMENT NUMBER yyyy ALREADY EXISTS REQUEST DENIED gt ENTER NEW EL NO FOR xxxx OR CR TO IGNORE 6 3 Descripti Once the user element number gt ENTER NEW EL NO FOR xxxx OR xxxx is the original element number 3 If the u 3 COPY on This function allows the user to generate a set of duplicate elements The user eously translate rotate or offset in the normal direction the copied elements may simultan Usage 1 2 he next step where VPG VPG prompts the user to select the elements to be copied gt SELECT ELEMENTS Once the desired elements have been se prompts lected DONE continues to t 6 36 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R gt ENTER COPY OPTION M R N P A 3 p 5 select tive to the selections made in step 4 TS If ROTATE was selected gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT r the angle increment right hand rule about the W axis ment s normal YES places all copied elements in their original part NO places all copied elements into the CURRENT PART Descrip Then VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES rompts 4 VPG gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is asking for a desired coordinate syste
71. PART xxxx These prompts will continue for every part in the If the user enters a STARTING NUMBER that 6 84 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R gives the message that the location has already been assigned and BER SUMMARY IS WRITTEN ON FILE ntb 0 will assign MAX NODE NO 1 E NUMBER INC BETWEEN PARTS gt 0 DEFAULT TO 1000 1 NO GAP BETWEEN PARTS may be entered gt RENUMBER SUMMARY IS WRITTEN ON FILE ntb 5 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART After parts are selected VPG prompts gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR CHOSEN PART Any integer may be entered 6 4 16 SC Desc returns the user to the beginning of this step gt RENUM Zero NO gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER 1 TO EXIT Once a number has been entered the prompt will read gt ENTER NOD Any integer ALE ription This section applies a scale factor to any or all X Y and Z components for some or all node ange the sign on any or all of the X Y Z components The parts will be magnified if the scale factor is greater than 1 and reduced if the scale factor is less than 1 The user may reflect and or enlarge or reduce a part without retaining a copy of the original grids elements Usage s in a global or local direction The scale factor may be positive or negative ch VPG prompts S EATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt P VPG prompts th
72. PART TURN ON OFF dialog window is displayed once selected 2 8 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s VIRTUAL X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global X axis when the cursor is moved up or down VIRTUAL Y ROTATION he displayed model will dyna T mically rotate about the global Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down VIRTUAL Z ROTATION ayed model will dynamica The displ lly rotate about the global Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down SCREEN X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen X axis when the cursor is moved up or down SCREEN Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down FEATURES The dis del will dynamically rotate about the screen Z axis when the cursor is moved up o SCREEN Z ROTATION ayed mo pl r down Note Screen axis rotation uses the display screen as a plane of rotation The screen X axis is horizontal The screen Y axis vertical and screen Z axis is perpendicular to screen X and Y FREE ROTATION This function is a combination of SX and SY Moving the mouse up down manipulates SX Moving the mouse left right manipulates SY Moving the mouse diagonally combines the movements of both commands Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation This function can also be activated by pressin
73. Parts must have a material property and thickness defined with a material density specified Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT User inputs a file name 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND ALL PARTS Output all mass information of all parts to the input file SELECT PART Output the mass information of the selected part to the input file EXIT Returns the user to the MASS MENU 6 194 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR functions for replacing parts and part sets The functions in this menu are organized as follows 6 17 ASSEMBLY LS DYNA The functions of the ASSEMBLY AUTO menu are designed to add and modify connections in the database It also includes A 6 17 1 READ FROM FILE D detailed description of each function is given in the following sections escription This opti tores the on allows the user to add connections to the database from a file that s Usage connection information 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 If the file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the ASSEMBLY AUTO menu 6 17 2 WRITE TO FILE Description The func
74. RADIOSS V3 1 V4 1 and V4 4 VPG not only reads RADIOSS files but also allows translation of RADIOSS files to NASTRAN or LS DYNA960 format The capability of this interface has been improved in VPG 3 2 to allow the import export of RADIOSS and translation into LS DYNA version 970 When reading in a RADIOSS file VPG adopts a RADIOSS environment with RADIOSS terminology VPG allows model manipulation of RADIOSS materials element properties boundary conditions local coordinates loads initial velocities contact and rigid walls To translate a RADIOSS file to another analysis format such as LS DYNA or NASTRAN the user changes the analysis program in the Setup Menu This will translate all RADIOSS materials element properties boundary conditions etc to the new analysis environment VPG will prompt the user for certain user defined information in the translation The translation of the code requires that certain assumptions be made in the equivalencies of elements properties contacts etc Where no equivalency could be found due to the fact that one code supports or defines an entity that another code does not the closest substitution is made In these cases the user should check the database translation to be sure that the entity is defined adequately in the translated model a complete list of all translations follows When converting RADIOSS to LS DYNA or vice versa the user should always check the definition of spring elements loading condit
75. S O R VPG supports all contact types in LS DYNA If general 3D contact type is selected the program will display all six cards required to define contact The following notes apply to card 2 PRE PROCESSOR Unnecessary data fields are in gray and unselectable lave and Master segment type is Segment Set 0 The user needs the segment type before defining the Slave and Master Set ID If the Segment Type is modified the corresponding Segment Set ID needs to be redefined ELETE Desc on Default S to define 6 13 3 D ripti This function deletes previously defined interfaces 6 164 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE VPG displays the defined interfaces in the CONTACT CARD LIST with the options gt SELECT ALL ABORT UNDO EXIT C k marks the selected interfaces with an asterisk Exiting the CONTACT CARD LIST will delete all asterisked interfaces 6 13 4 MODIFY Description ursor pic This function allows the user to redefine interface properties Upon selection of the MO mmand the CONTACT CARD LIST is displayed with a list of the interfaces A and its definition card is then displayed for the user to modify 6 13 5 LIST ion DIFY co n interface is selected by cursor pick Descript This function lists the defined interfaces in the CONTACT CARD LIST 6 13 6 RENUMBER Des
76. SHELL RBE3 SEATBELT 6 56 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Description This function allows the user to reflect a copy of desired elements across a local or global coordinate plane Usage ATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG asks for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system 3 acquired it will be displayed on the screen gt I 4 If the user selects YES VPG prompts gt ENTER PLANE OF MIRROR XY YZ XZ 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Once the desired elements have been selected VPG prompts gt CRE Once the desired coordinate system is and the prompt will read ACCEPT Y N A f the user selects NO VPG returns to step 2 5 VPG prompts whether or not to keep the elements in their original parts E MIRRORED ELEMENTS IN ITS ORIGINAL PART YES NO will place all selected ements into their source part will place all selected s into the CURRENT PART 6 3 11 MODIFY gt INCLUD PRE PROCESSOR Y N A YES el NO element Desc on ripti This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any displ NOT need to be in the CURR he element type of the selected element and prompt the user to recreate it Details are covered in CREATE ELEMENTS earlier in this section I ser to edit element attributes i e eid pid nid if the ATTRIBUTE TABL
77. SPRING PELAS 14 GENERAL SOLID PSOLID 6 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All materials MAT1 6 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION General Comments Delete PRESSURE LOAD RADIOSS V4 1 gt NASTRAN SPC SPC CONCENTRATED LOAD NODE FORCE APPENDIX C C 13 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY 6 5 OTHERS General Comments Delete NODE SET SHELL SET BEAM SET SOLID SET SPRING SET TRUSS SET Delete all others cards that can t be converted RADIOSS V4 1 gt NASTRAN FUNCTION LOAD CURVE SKEW moving LOCAL COORDINATE SKEW fixed LOCAL COORDINATE 7 CONVERTING FROM NASTRAN TO RADIOSS 7 1 ELEMENT General Comments Delete RBE3 amp CGAP elements NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 1 CBAR BEAM RBE2 RIGID BODY SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID CELAS2 SPRING 3rd node is created if necessary to define the direction CELAS1 SPRING 3rd node is created if necessary to define the direction RBAR SPOTWELD CONM2 MASS CBEAM BEAM CROD TRUSS CTUBE BEAM ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL SHELL 7 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY General Comments Delete PGAP properties NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 1 PSHELL 1 SHELL PSOLID 14 GENERAL_SOLID PBAR 3 BEAM PBEAM 3 BEAM PELAS 4 SPRING PROD 2 TRUSS PTUBE 3 BEAM 7 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 1 MAT1 1 ELASTIC 7 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 1 SPC SPC NODE FORCE CONCENTRATED LOAD SHELL PRESSURE PRESSURE LOAD
78. TO CUT SURFACE UV VW UW UV PLANE 6 2 ATE Descripti PG prompts gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIG VPG prompts the user to cr has the option to select the global coordinate system 2 Once the desired coordinate system has b VW PLANE UW PLANE 26 CHECK DUPLIC on This function checks duplicate surfaces in database Usage 6 33 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompt gt C s REATE LOCAL COORDINATES TOLERANCE search tolerance of the checked surfaces DENSITY sample point density level of the checked surfaces Ok accept current input t input 2 Afte if th Back return to las Cancel exit this function without executing r defining above parameter VPG begins to check duplicate surfaces in database ere is no duplicate surfaces found otherwise VPG prompts 6 2 27 SKI Descript YES duplicate surfaces are added to a new part user needs to enter a name for this new part No duplicate surfaces are reserved in original parts N SURFACE ion This function creates a surface by several lines Usage 1 VP CT Reject last select lines DONE surface after selecting lines user can go on selecting lines to G prompts gt SELECT LINES IN ORDER ABORT LINE Select skin lines this is the default option REJE generate generate surfaces EXIT 6 34 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual
79. The use YES locations VPG creates some default mater the file reading These are assign set material set property set and interface contact set for boundary conditions interface rigid walls time history etc VPG can read multiple RADIOSS input files into the same database 1 9 READ NASTRAN SOL 700 FILE on llows the user to read a NASTRAN SOL 700 dat file directly into VPG Once user has entered the command the files with the suffix dat will be listed in the opti a The user may then select the desired file READ SUSP A e Appendix gives a complete descrip er that section when converting an O RT s the user to output from the current database The options ne above See Figure 5 8 1 are simil o 5 7 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r Figure 5 8 1 Export file Window A detail section 5 8 1 WRITE ABAQ FILE VPG disp ys the CONTROL PARAMETER window Users may select the parameters with the d enter new values through the keyboard The parameters are ABAQUS re details 1 Ente r ABAQUS files is sugge s VPG prompts the following message EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N erwrite the existing file pt for a file name S will only output the active parts parts that are turned ON NO will output all parts in the database VPG prompts E HEADING OF THE FILE The user can enter up to 60 characters 5 8 2 WR This functi n allows the us
80. UNDEFORM SHAPE This function enables user to toggle the undeformed geometry of the model on off The deformed shape plot is displayed in its original color The plot of the undeformed shape is displayed in white over the deformed shape efined value allowing the user to magnify or vidual ste EFORM OPERATIONS SCALE FACTOR This command adjusts the default scale factor of the deformed shape plot The default is 1 It scales plot components to a user d Figure 9 49 Deform Control Window 9 46 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING ize their visual display For example if the plot state is set to deformation the user could magnify the deformation by a factor of ten to see small deformation not ring animation 9 11 2 FRA Description This function allows user to select the desired frame s to plot single frame or animate more than one frame deformation shown as Figure 9 50 There are 6 options shown as Figure 9 51 minim readily visible du ME OPERATIONS Figure 9 50 F ame Range FRAMES The FRAMES window allows the user to select the individual frame s for the plot or animation The frames selected are highlighted in blue When frames are selected in ot ow SIN Th function allows user to pick single one frame and eta Post plots the deformation simultaneously ALL FRAMES Once All Frames is picked all frames in the list window are selected prepared for animation
81. VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH mpt for more lines nd prompt for more lines REMESH will not accept mesh and prompt for new N1 N2 N3 N4 6 3 21 SOLID MESH Description N3 optional an in N4 optional an integer value for the side opposite N2 where N2 is not greater than 2 N4 and N4 is not greater than 2 N2 i e 3 YES will accept mesh and pro NO will not accept mesh a This function opens a menu listing the following solid meshing options SOLID MESH 6 LINE SOLID MESH Description T or 8 node solid element generation in a volume T nd bottom surfaces which are enclosed by 3 lines each The lines direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible The created elements will be inclu PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usa his function is intended for automatic 6 he volume is defined by top a must previously be defined line ded in the CURRENT ge 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES AT BOTTOM LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 6 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 6 LINE MESH The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the user selects the desired
82. Version 5 Unigraphics version 18 Unigraphics NX and NX2 Pro Engineer STEP IGES The IGES interface reads files generated from any CAD system Supported IGES entity types include Name Type Null Entity 0 Circular Arc Entity 100 Composite Curve Entity 102 Conic Arc Entity 104 Chapter 2 2 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s Copious Data Entity 106 Plane Entity 108 Line Entity 110 Parametric Spline Curve Entity 112 Parametric Spline Surface Entity 114 Point Entity 116 Ruled Surface Entity 118 Surface of Revolution Entity 120 Tabulated Cylinder Entity 122 Transformation Matrix Entity 124 Rational B Spline Curve Entity 126 Rational B Spline Surface Entity 128 Offset Surface Entity 149 Boundary Entity 141 Curve on a Parametric Surface Entity 142 Bounded Surface Entity 143 Trimmed Parametric Surface Entity 144 Subfigure Definition Entity 308 Associativity Instance Entity 402 Property Entity 406 Singular Subfigure Instance Entity 408 FEATURES For the German automotive industry VDA file format is supported Supported VDA entity types include POINT CIRCLE CURVE SURF CONS FACE If CAD data is not available eta VPG has a complete geometry and surface building capability which acts as an integrated CAD data generator This is detailed in Chapter 6 EXTENSIVE MODEL BUILDING
83. W some elements For specific translation properties see the RADIOSS co 1 VPG promp gt ENTE Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name alread gt FILENAME ALRE YES will overwrite the existing file NO will prompt for a file name 3 gt SELECT RADIOSS VERSION 2 VERSIO 4 VPG prompts The user enters 5 VPG prompts 5 13 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r YES outputs only the elements displayed on the screen NO outputs all of the existing elements in the database gned to the parts in the database VPG prompts the user to define the lt or by part Supported properties are listed in Appendix A VPG Thi output a NASTRAN SOL 700 dat data file directly from the After entering the appropriate selection the user returns to the FILE MANAGER menu Note If the properties materials are not assi properties materials by default by global defau Capabilities for F E A Programs WRITE NASTRAN SOL 700 FILE 5 8 9 s function allows the user to VPG database 1 VPG prompts FORMAT OPTION User selects output format as single field or double field UNIT SYSTEM User selects unit system for output file 2 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO 3 VPG prompts to enter termination time The output file is written after entering this value 5 9 PRINT This function creates a pos
84. amount of editing required Definition cards appear at specific junctions in the session prompting the user for material element properties A Material Library is available in the LS DYNA environment allowing users to select common ferrous and aluminum materials from a pre populated set of material definitions Users may define materials and store them in a user defined database Users also have the option to specify the analysis software NASTRAN LS DYNA RADIOSS PAMCRASH prior to assigning properties FEATURES CONTACT INTERFACE eta VPG seamlessly interfaces with LS DYNA allowing the user to create and assign impact sliding or automatic interfaces for VPG applications eta VPG displays contact properties in easily read and modified CONTACT CARDS with a high degree of speed and flexibility BOUNDARY CONDITIONS eta VPG s BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu allows the user to quickly create and verify constraints and loads on VPG models MODEL INTEGRITY CHECKING FUNCTIONS The functions in eta VPG s MODEL CHECKER menu quickly validate models for element orientation size skew connectivity and interior angles Model validation default values are easily adjusted to suit the user s needs CONSTRAINTS eta VPG supports all LS DYNA Constraint Cards for quick easy definition and manipulation of joints welds rivets etc 2 3 POST PROCESSOR eta VPG integrates a general purpose complete post processor for data post processing of analysis result files
85. and By default th raph is plot on the current curve window if the ld open a NEW CURVE WINDOW for t the graphs usly opened graph unless it set as the current window e new g user press Apply NOTE Prior to opening multiple graph files the user shou each graph This will preven from merging into a previo is needed 9 80 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 10 SAVE Description This function allows the user to save all the graphs in current curve window 9 12 11 EXIT Description This button allows the user to exit the Graph operation POST PROCESSING 9 81 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 10 UTILITY Chapter 10 Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY includes th ART CONTROL UTILIT e following sections VIEWING OPTIONS ICON BAR FUNCTIONS Y and DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW The functions l s display define the model s parameters P in these sections allow the user to alter the mode and define the model s part makeup UTILITY 10 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY 10 1 VIEW OPTIONS The functions in the VIEWING OPTIONS menu are used to adjust the display of the items on the screen See Figure 10 1 on g Figure 10 1 View Option Menu A detailed description of each functi is iven in the following sections 10 1 1 CHANGE COLORS Description The functions in thi u enu allow the user to ch s s bm color of any ange the displayed item
86. and type DONE CPENTA Pick 6 nodes points pick the second set of 3 nodes points in the same order as the first set of 3 nodes points and typ the same order as the first EXIT or ABORT terminates this function ripti This section covers the options for the SPRING ELEMENT NASTRAN CELAS2 sub EMENTS Usage section of CREATE EL gt ENTER SPRING DIRECTION 1 to 6 AT EACH END 1 VPG prompts Two entries are required one for each end of the spring e g 1 1 for the x direction Any number of spring elements may be created for the same connectivity depending upon the number of directions required 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 6 40 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis ro e g 2 esire ion has b ered for the spring rompts R S E sit ber m r the sprin te 3 pts NODES P O To create the elements the ode point keyboard entry or any o nodes point Th T or A e D 6 tational along th lobal Z axis Once the d d direct een ent VPG p gt ENTE PRING RAT Any po ive real num ay be entered fo g ra VPG prom gt PICK OINTS F R ELEMENT user may select a n combinati Select 2 n of the three s e element will be created EXI BORT termina
87. as target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model Figure 13 An Example of a Generated IIHS SIDE PASSED IMPACT Model 7 4 7 5 Desc AMS RIGID 15 DEG ription This function will create a rigid wall at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 gt ENTER AMS WALL INFORMATION VPG prompts 7 55 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 2 VPG prompts ID WALL gt PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER TO LOCATE RIG Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position 3 VPG prompts VPG MODULES gt ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED Figure 14 An Example of a Generated AMS 15 Degree Offset Crash Model 7 4 7 6 BUMPER IMPACT 0 DEG Description This function will create a rigid bumper at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION 7 56 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE BUMPER Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST BUMPER VPG MODULES There are four approaches to define the head direction KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector NODES VECTOR Sele
88. as the target position The Frontal rigid wall and rigid road surface will be positioned in in the model the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined Barrier and Ground Planes positioned with vehicle Figure 3 An Example of a Generated FMVSS208 Frontal Impact Model 7 4 5 4 FMVSS 216 ROOF CRUSH Description This function allows users to create and position a rigid plate used to simulate the FMVSS216 roof crush test Usage 7 43 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROOF CRASH INFORMATION 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE ROOF VPG MODULES 3 S lec m the roof rail part as target position The rigid plate is imported and placed in the location you have cts and velocity will also be defined in the model e t CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element fro specified Proper conta Figure 4 An Example of a Generated FMVSS216 Roof Crush Model 5 Descriptio 7 4 5 FMVSS301 FLAT REAR IMPACT n This function imports and positions rigid walls used to simulate an FMVSS301 R ear Impact test Usage 1 VPG prompts ACT INFORMATION gt ENTER REAR IMP 7 44 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE REAR BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an elemen
89. aspect ratio is 8 0 to 1 0 but the user may adjust it as necessary Usage 6 89 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG gt ENTER ASPECT RATIO DEFAULT 8 0 s may accept the default value of 8 0 by pressing the Enter key or they may enter any real number that is a valid value for the aspect ratio VPG runs a check on the values for the aspect ratio Any elements that exceed ratio are highlighted The messages echoed to the command line are gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK 2 The following message will be displayed for the failed elements gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up The failed elements will be removed from their original parts and added to the NEW PART The new part will be ON and CURRENT NO VPG prompts the user to check the individual elements for aspect ratio via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit the function 6 5 4 BOUNDARY DISPLAY Description prompts User the desired aspect gt xxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK or This function checks the continuity of the free edges in a group of elements All free edges will be highlighted with a boundary display Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CHECK SINGLE OR MULTIPLE SURFACE S M SINGLE SURFACE f the single free edges of the displayed model Checks the continuity of the displayed elements It also highlights the secting free e
90. bar Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT CHARACTER SIZE 1 0 10 0 lt 1 0 gt 2 After the user selects a font size VPG prompts gt DEFINE TITLE STARTING LOCATION The user defines the location of the text by positioning the cursor at the desired point on the screen and clicking the left mouse button 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE The user types in the text and presses the enter key VPG displays the text at the selected location 10 4 6 IDENTIFY NODES POINTS Description This function identifies any node and its corresponding global location in X Y Z coordinates For options see Figure 10 4 6 Figure 10 4 6 Identify Option Menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS If the user selects ALL NODES VPG displays the numbers of the nodes at their corresponding node locations The user returns to the UTILITY menu If the user selects NODE VPG displays the number of the node that is closest in proximity to the cursor VPG issues the following message on the command line Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 32 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz If the user selects POINT VPG displays the number of the point that is closest in proximity to the cursor VPG issues the following message on the command line gt POINT xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz DONE or EXIT returns the user to the UTILITY MENU 10 4 7 IDENTIFY ELEMENTS Description This function allows the user
91. be exported when select the fun MAX RADIUS Set the maximum arc radius that can be displayed MIN RADIUS Set the minimum arc radius that can be displayed en two adjacent SECTION PLUS CURVE This function is only enabled for the section cut of contour mode Toggle on the check box then press APPLY button the curve window will display Please see the Figure 9 32 In the curve window the abscissa is the arc length and the ordinate is the corresponding contour value EXPORT SECTION CUT This function allows the user to export the section cut as the PLOTEL elements to a NASTRAN file The program displays a Select File dialog window as shown in Figure 9 33 n the local W direction If the t will be exported when select the LANE option is selected all 20 ction EXPORT SECTION CUT RADIUS DEV Set the tolerance betwe arcs to merge MIN CHORD Set the minimum chord length that can be displayed Figure 9 33 Export Nastran File MOVE SECTION BY MOUSE This function allows the user to move the section cut location by using the mouse The Figure 9 32 Section Cut Operations 9 31 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING movement may be translation along the local W axis or rotation about the local w axis CTION BY MOUSE button eta Post allows the user to in the new section cut nearest the cursor Click the left mouse button to exit the function ROTATE First select MOVE SECTION
92. complete graphics region will be saved to the output file Note The user will be prompted to define the region drag window after PRINT is selected 5 10 15 NO OF COPIES s may be used saved and selected by the user All parameters are OPYDEFAULT file in the VPG installation directory em defaults that are saved in a VPG Hardcopy Default file e directory 5 1 6 2 L AD USE This ve been saved in a HardcopyDefault file locate th 5 10 8 BIN This function leaves binding space along the top or left margins of the print and selects non Binding space O This function allows the user to print multiple copies 5 10 16 SETUP SAVE LOAD Default page setting defined in the HARDC 5 10 16 1 LOAD SYSTEM DEFAULT This function will load the syst located in the VPG executabl 0 1 O R DEFAULT functi w on ill load the user defined defaults that ha d in e user s home directory 5 16 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r FILE MANAGER 5 10 16 3 VE This function s ptions to a HardcopyDefault file located in the user s Home d 5 11 EXIT This function w gram VPG will prompt to save current database SA AS DEFAULT aves user modified hardcopy o irectory allo s the user to exit the pro 5 17 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The Pre Processor menu contains a series of submenus w
93. components s of all necessary crash tool models dummy models barrier models impactors etc 2 Vehicle Crashworthiness Processes includes FMVSS ECE EEC and Industry Standards 3 Occupant Safety Processes includes FMVSS ECE EEC and Industry Standards Details of these components and their capabilities are documented in the following sections Notice to User While th s manual have been created using the publicly available information for each of the tests and test simulations described in this manual the user should exercise caution when performing these analyses Current testing methods and governmental regulations should be studied and compared to the testing and analysis methods described here so that a fully accurate study can be performed The writers of this document and the authors of the VPG Safety software strongly recommend that all users take the initiative to study the testing procedure and the related analysis procedures and take any necessary measures to assure the accuracy of the simulations created using VPG Safety th T 1 Crash Tool Library consist s e following sections of thi 7 35 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 4 1 General Processing Procedure The crash safety simulations documented herein have similar requirements and setup procedures They generally require a structure assembly either a full vehicle or a component of the vehicle and at le
94. contact Set all CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE s SOFT 1 IGAP 2 IGNORE 1 If RADIOSS data does not have FS VPG will set it as 0 2 Moreover set FD as 0 2 RIGIDWALL RIGIDWALL_GEOMETRIC 8 6 AIRBAG MONITORED VOLUMES MONITORED VOLUMES AIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIRBAG_MODEL If this MONITORED VOLUMES is a tire model we suggest use AIRBAG_SIMPLE_PRESSURE_VOLUME instead of AIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIRBAG_MODEL REPLACE THE ORIGINAL MATERIAL WITH MAT_FABRIC 8 7 SEATBELT CONVERT RADIOSS S MATERIAL TYPE 1 WHICH HAS VERY SMALL YOUNG S MODULUS INTO DYNA S MAT_FABRIC 8 8 OTHERS Delete all other cards that can t be converted to DYNA RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 APPENDIX C C 18 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C FUNCTION DEFINE_CURVE FRAME DEFINE_COORDINATE NOTE If you don t have RADIOSS ENGINE file VPG will set up DYNA CONTROL cards for you as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CONTROL_HOURGLASS ihq qh 4 1 CONTROL_ACCURACY osu inn pidosu 0 2 0 CONTROL_BULK_VISCOSITY q2 q1 type 1 500 0 06000 1 CONTROL_CONTACT slsfac rwpnal islchk shlthk penopt thkchg orien enmass 0 10000 1 000 2 0 1 1 2 0 usrstr usrfrc nsbcs interm xpene ssthk ecdt tiedprj 0 0 10 0 4 000 0 0 0 sfric dfric edc vfc th th_sf pen_sf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ignore frceng 1 0 CONTROL_ENERGY hgen rwen slnten rylen 2 2 2 2 CONTROL_OUTPUT npopt neecho nrefup iaccop opifs ipni
95. data is set to zero If PHI is nonzero further thought must be given to the conversion 32 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 3 MAT_PLASTIC_KINEMATIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 53 MAT_CLOSED_CELL_FOAM 34 VISCOELASTIC 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_VISCOELASTIC 35 VISCOELASTIC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 36 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_ PLASTICITY 38 VISCOELASTIC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 40 VISCOELASTIC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 42 HYPERELASTIC 77 5 MAT_OGDEN_RUBBER 43 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_ PLASTICITY 2 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET CONCENTRATED LOAD LOAD_NODE_SET PRESSURE LOAD LOAD_SEGMENT_SET INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY IMPOSED VELOCITY BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET 2 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL Delete RIGIDWALL which not include node Convert slave master shell material property set into segment set RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 2 TIED CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 3 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 5 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 6 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 8 SLIDE CONTACT_DRAWBEAD 10 TIED VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 11 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE Creates a new CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE Set all CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE s SOFT 1 IGNORE 1 RIGIDWALL RIGIDWALL_GEOMETRIC 2 6 AIRBAG MONITORED V
96. definition cards of EQUATION OF STATE specify element properties Usage VPG prompts to select option 1 When CREATE is selected The preceding c Manual for furth ommands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s er description D 6 14 10 EXCHANGE FACTOR escription This function characterizes radiative heat transfer between collections of flat s he union of which is a closed surface an closure Usage urfaces t 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option ition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s er description 6 14 11 H The preceding commands yield varying defin Manual for furth OURGLASS 6 185 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Description Usage This function allows the user to define hourglass and bulk viscosity properties 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA Description User s Manual for further description 6 14 12 INTEGRATION this function is used to define integration parameters for beam and shell elements 6 14 RDS Description 13 INTERFACE CA This function defines interfaces for linking calculations Usage 1 W gt SELECT OPTION hen CREATE is selected VPG prompts All of the preceding commands yield varying definition cards except for SPRINGBACK Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description of the a
97. desired material default 3 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 6 152 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 4 The material will be assigned to the selected elements of the parts The selected parts will be shown in the material color after the user exits this command 6 11 2 CHANGE COLOR Description This function changes the color of a selected material Usage 1 The color bar is displayed on the right edge of the graphic area 2 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 3 The color of the material changes to the user selected color from the color bar 6 11 3 COPY Description This function duplicates the properties from one material onto another material Usage 1 VPG displays the material card list and prompts gt SELECT MATERIAL TO COPY 2 Once the user selects a material to copy VPG copies the material and prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt MATERIAL ID XX DUPLICATED FROM MATERIAL ID X The user exits the function COPY 6 11 4 CREATE Description This function creates a new material Usage op up window appears with the material types The list of the material types depends on the analysis program e g NASTRAN LS DYNA defined in the SETUP m
98. direction of the surface normal dictates the direction of the plate elem N 8 MIRROR ripti n R Usa eflects a copy of desired surfaces across a local or global coordinate plane ge 1 VPG p e user to select a coordinate system followed by the plane of the mirror e a local coordinate system using any method available in VPG OVE HOLES Des rompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 VPG prompts th The user may creat 3 The user then has the option of putting the surface in original part or current part 6 2 9 REM cription This function allows the user to remove holes on the selected surface Usage 1 VPG p rompts the user to select surface for remove holes 2 VPG prompts the user to select mode to remove holes on surface g mode INNER HOL 3 When selectin ES VPG prompts the user to select hole on surface to remove 6 21 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 4 After selecting the hole click EXIT and the hole on surface is removed REVERSE NORMAL Des 6 2 10 cription This function reverses the normal direction of the surface The surface kstations REVERSE NORMA so controls the normal direction of the plate elements during meshing Usage normal affects light source shading on some wor L al 1 VPG gt 6 2 11 RESPACE UV LINE Description prompts SELECT SURFACE The normal direction is changed after a surface is selected
99. e n u MAIN MENU 4 12 FATIGUE In eta VPG version 3 3 the FATIGUE menu has been moved to the POST FATIGUE menu allows users to post process stress data calculate fatigue or NASTRAN data This menu allows users to calculate and display the calculation 4 13 POST The POST menu launches the ETA Postprocessor application By selectin current database is stored in a temporary location and closed The Post P pplication is closed the tempo TIES menu allows users to perform various modeling and display functions As an exa ple the user may add Arrows or Comments on the screen for additional information when creating JPEG or GIF image files An important feature of the UTILITIES menu is the SETUP command This command allows the user to specify display and model database characteristics From this menu the user may specify the model type and global parameters to be applied to the model The SETUP menu has two tabs PROGRAM and DISPLAY On the Porgram tab the user may specify the analysis program for the current database and the global meshing parameters This function defines the menus that will be displayed as well as the content of those menus As an example when the NASTRAN option is selected for this command the menus will then contain the material types element types and boundary conditions that pertain to NASTRAN models All analysis parameters will also be specified in a manner consistent with NASTRAN If the user selects LS DYNA similarly
100. e user to the BUSHING STIFFNESS table NO returns th 6 VPG displays the following pop up window with damping coefficient data and VPG prompt gt MO ENT DATA gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG gt AC YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 7 NO returns the user to the SPRING INITIAL OFFSET table s DIFY DAMPING COEFFICI When the prompts CEPT DAMPING COEFFICIENT DATA Y N 7 VPG displays a pop up window with bush axial data VPG prompts gt MODIFY EXTRA NODE COORDINATES gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT EXTRA NODE COORDINATES Y N NO returns the user to the bush axial data table If YES is entered VPG prompts 7 13 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S gt USE DEFAULT MASS CG amp INERTIA MOMENT Y N spension 8 prompts the user to select the parts to modify YES completes the su If NO is entered VPG gt PICK PARTS TO MODIFY VPG MODULES nce the parts are selected and the user has exited the list VPG prompts the user gt MODIFY MASS A CG CENTE O R gt MODIFY INERTIA MOMENT VPG displays a pop up window with the parts properties allowing the user to alter them 7 14 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S V
101. echoes the message gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu w of some elements is greater than the user defined criteria LED CHECK or gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up The failed elements are removed from the original parts and added to the NEW PART The new part is ON and CURRENT O The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu gt EN If the skew of the elements is less than the user defined criteri If the ske then VPG echoes one of the following messages gt ELEMENT xxxx FAI 2 If failed elements exist then VPG prompts the user to place them into a part gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N N 6 94 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 5 12 CHECK TAPER Description This function allows the user to check the length to width ratio of elements Usage 1 gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 3 VPG allows the user to check individual elements for taper value via cursor pick 6 5 13 C K Description VPG prompts gt ENTER THE CRITERION FOR TAPER DEFAULT 0 5 2 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N If yes VPG prompts the user to define a new part HEC VOLUME SKEW This function checks the shape of tetrahedral elements with respect to the deviation from a perfect pyramid shape Volume Skew is defined as the perc
102. enables the user to create a new curve wit X axis value is equal to the value is equal to the Y axis 9 12 8 RES T R This function can display the expression dynamically during the operation For re tegrate it The user can click the curve name on the name list window the name of the curve will display on the Result Curve text box utton respectively The content of the w ch as C27 Sq Int In this expression the C27 means the name of selected curve Sq and Int mean the operation to this curve There is a colon following each operation example if the user want to squa a curve and in Then click the SQUARE button and the INTEGRATE b Result curve text box ill an to such expression ge 9 79 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING esult curve text box One is black and ifferent kinds of meaning When the k ns at ress the Apply to perform this is d he expression is not correct or ur nt er o the operation can t be executed The user can input by keyboard to define the operation according to the format of the program r so this method is not recommended for the new user There are two kinds of colour of the expression in the R another is red Those two kinds colour denote two d colour of the expression is blac it mea th the user can p operation If the colour of the expression re it means that t the condition of c re op ation is not satisfied s But this me
103. eta VPG TM User Manual A Mechanical System Simulation Software eta VPG TM Version 3 3 Manual Release Date February 29 2008 FOREWARD The concepts methods and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design This material is a compilation of data and figures from many sources Engineering Technology Associates Inc assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein Engineering Technology Associates Inc 1133 East Maple Road Suite 200 Troy MI 48083 USA Phone 248 729 3010 Support 800 ETA 3362 email support eta com Fax 248 729 3020 Engineering Technology Associates Inc ETA the ETA logo and eta VPG are the registered trademarks of Engineering Technology Associates Inc All other trademarks or names are the property of their respective owners Copyright 2008 Engineering Technology Associates Inc All rights reserved i T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Documentation Section 1 1 eta VPG History Section 1 2 eta VPG Methodology Section 1 3 eta VPG Software Package Section 1 4 eta VPG Special Features Section 1 5 CHAPTER 2 FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW General Section 2 1 Pre Processor Section 2 2 Post Processor Sec
104. files The following operations will be recorded in this macro file 10 6 2 END MACRO Description this function is used to end the macro file recording and write the end mark in the macro file 10 6 3 RUN MACRO Description this function is used to execute the macro files The program returns to the initial state of the original model and executes the macro files The recording operations in the macro file will be performed one by one APPENDIX A A 1 eta VPG 3 3 APPENDIX A HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS UNIX PLATFORM OS VERSION GRAPHICS CARD DISK SPACE MB HP HP UX 11 Minimum CRX 8 Plane 200 IBM AIX 4 2 Minimum 24 Plane Graphics 200 SGI IRIX 6 5 All Graphics Boards Supported 200 SUN SunOS 5 8 Minimum Creator 3D 200 LINUX The RedHat operating system version 7 3 and above is supported eta VPG must run under KDE environment The NVIDIA graphic cards are recommended PC WINDOWS eta VPG in PC platform is compatible with PC LS DYNA 970 It will run in Windows 98 2000 and XP environments It is not recommended for usage with earlier versions of Windows The following are minimum requirements for proper operation of eta VPG in a Windows environment Minimum Graphics Requirement XGA 1024 x 768 Graphics Card OpenGL based Nvidia chip set recommended Minimum Memory Requirement Small models under 50 000 elements 384 megabytes RAM Medium models 50 000 500 000 elements 512 megabytes RAM Large mo
105. for the user to load the time history result file The control window is shown in Figure 9 67 ore inde ser to visual PH on functi nderstan Featu settings rth ave e loaded a model file to Figure 9 67 The Initial Graph Window 9 12 LE Descript 1 LOAD RESULT FI ion The function allows the user to read result files form LS DYNA analysis into the current database The user has the ability to input LS DYNA ASCII State and Time data form pops up the Select File dialog box for user to ats Click the Load button and the program 9 59 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING select a database file The figure is shown in Figure 9 68 Figure 9 68 Select File dialog box Des D3PLOT GRAPH DATA cription There are some kinds of D3plot graph data format supported by e ABSTAT Airbag statistics BNDOUT Boundary nodal forces DEFORC Discrete elements ELOUT Element data JNTFORC Joint force file ntact interface forces DFOR Nodal force Nodal point data RBDOUT Rigid body data RCFORC Resultant interface forces RWFORC Wall forces SLEOUT Sliding interface energy SPCFORC Single point constraint SPC reaction forces SSSTAT Subsystem statistics SWFORC Spotweld rivet forces ta Post Processor Those file formats including DEFGEO Deformed geometry GCEOUT Contact element resultants GLSTAT Global data MATSUM Material energies NCFORC Co NO NODOUT S
106. is displayed discretely as contour line Please see the Figure 9 62 GRAY Figure 9 62 An Example for Contour Line 9 11 11 EXPORT CONTOUR LINE Description This function allows user to export the contour line when the CONTOUR LEVEL is not CONTINUE into VPG Line Data format file Usage eta Post prompts the user to enter the file name After determining the file name and clicking SAVE button the contour lines will be saved in the given file 9 11 12 LIST VALUE Description This function lists the contour value of selected nodes or selected element if ELEMENT RESULT is toggled on For e as below step Usage example list node valu 1 Activate the LIST VALUE function in the CONTOUR CONTROL WINDOW Control Option window is displayed with Select Node Option shown as Figure 9 63 2 The 9 55 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 63 Select Node Control Option ick The user ca ow polygon or free hand region On the OW shown as Figure 9 64 3 Select the desired node to be listed The default setting is by mouse p n also select nodes by dragging wind 4 ce the node is selected the highest three nodes are listed at the down left corner of GRAPHICS DISPLAY WIND Figure 9 64 List Node Value 5 At the same time another Control Option Window appears shown as Figure 9 65 The functions control the number and position of nodes listed and which nodes POST PROCESSING 9 56 eta VPG3 3 Chapt
107. is toggled off And all parts with the beam element appear in the part list if the BEAM is toggled on SHELL All parts with the shell element are removed from the part list if the SHELL is toggled off And all parts with the shell element appear in the part list if the SHELL is toggled on SOLID All parts with the solid element are removed from the part list if the SOLID is toggled off And all parts with the solid element appear in the part list if the SOLID is toggled on OTHER All parts with the line are removed from the part list if the OTHER is toggled off And all parts with the line appear in the part list if the OTHER is toggled on KEEP If KEEP is selected the selected parts are highlighted and are labeled with asterisk on the Part List When the user exits the function only the selected parts remain displayed ALL ON Turns all parts on and displays them on the screen ALL OFF Turns all parts off from the GRAPHICS DISPLAY REVERSE This function reverses the current on and off status of the parts in the model The program updates the model display accordingly UNDO 9 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Un R Redo the last operation in the part ON OFF function E Clo es the PART ON OFF dialog window and exits the function do the last operation or part selection in Part ON OFF function EDO XIT s VIRTUAL X ROTATION e displayed model will dynamically ro Th tate about th
108. it will not be selected TI PT REGION PART 2 17 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s 2 18 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual FEATURES REJECT LAST This option negates the last selection whether from single cursor pick selected by any of the above options EXCLUDE ON OFF This option works like a toggle switch If turned on all the subsequent removed from the previously selected list The user may toggle this o the course of the selection f elements to be selected If DONE is selected cted Otherwise other Note The TYPE function is specific to the selection of elements SURFACE MESH ommand e selection of elements or a group of entities selected entities will be ption on and off during TYPE his option is used to control the type o T immediately after selecting TYPE all elements of this type will be sele options may be used to limit the selection of elements SURFACE This function is used to select elements created from a surface by the c Note The SURFACE function is specific to th C h a p t e r 3 G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Chapter GETTING STARTED Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 1 OPENING CREATING AN eta VPG DATABASE FILE To start the VPG software the user must execute the VPG program file using the method appropriate for their operating system In Windows this may be accomplished by double clicking the shortcut to the VPG exe
109. keyboard entry Entering a one or two letter combination followed by the return key activ 2 11 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s FEATURES men that the user presently has on the screen For main menus the letter combination is the first two letters of a one wor and or the fir e first two words of a two or more word command es the keys th nd will be highlighted For example the keystrok r the command ELE IONS SURFACE MESH in the above menu would be wed by the RE For the ELEMENT OPTIONS MODIFY command th ntry woul the RETURN key For control keys the user need only type the first 2 10 SPECIFICA While VPG dynamicall abase size dep on the entities created by the user there are prac rall datab d defined limits on specific entities While the num only extreme cases may result in the model exceeding the exceeding the maximum addressable file size in Windows The standard ve llowing specifications for model databases u d comm ser typ st letter of each of th e comma As the u matching e entry fo MENT OPT TU s m follo e keystroke e RN key d be m o followed by n letter to access the functio TIONS y defin ts on th es the dat ending ase an tical limi e size of the ove ber of entities is limited s also rsion of VPG has the fo e limits without Entity Maximum Count LINES 750 000 POINTS 1 5
110. middle DONE finish and exit this function 6 2 24 SURFACE SEPARATION Description surfaces ON OFF OT TOGGLE middle su MID SURF OF TWO SURFA surface SURFACES OFFSET select surfaces to offset offset distance is half of the part thick surfaces and p a Usage This function separates the surfaces of a solid geometry into upper and lower l ces them in new parts 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE 2 After selecting surfaces VPG prompts 6 32 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR ADD TOP SURFACES add bottom surfaces to top surfaces REMOVE TOP SURFACES remove top surfaces to original surfaces TURN OFF OTHER PARTS don t display parts except part including top surfaces GROUP BOTTOM SURFACES turn to bottom surfaces operation s 3 After generating top surface group VPG prompt ADD BOTTOM SURFACES add other surfaces to bottom surfaces ACES remove bottom surfaces to original DONE finish and exit this function SECTION CUT Descriptio REMOVE BOTTOM SURF surfaces TURN OFF OTHER PARTS don t display parts except part including bottom surfaces 6 2 25 n This function creates a cross section which may be saved as a geometric line entity Usage 1 V gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES IN eate a local coordinate system The user also een defined VPG prompts gt ENTER PLANE
111. mirror result is missing displayed as the origina POST PROCESSING Press the CLEAN and the model is l status 9 9 4 DEFINE ACTIVE WINDOW Description This function allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed model for more detailed viewing o The user defines the desired area eta Post displ h the analysis result as active wind ed and inactive Usage The Drag Win o Control Click CLEA menu to re will disp y l as the original status r editing ays the elements wit ow Other objects on the screen will be mask user can define the Active Window by Cursor d w Polygon Freehand and Displayed See the Option shown in Figure 9 40 R ACTIVE WINDOW from the TOOL Pull down move the defined active window The program la the whole mode Define Active Window Control Window Figure 9 40 9 35 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 9 5 DEFINE NODE TRACE Description NODE animation A trace i its movement from one time step to another An example of the Node Trace is show in Figure 9 41 Usag TRACING allows the user to select a set of nodes to be traced during s a line or track that identifies the path that a node takes during e e Click defin Description Figure 9 41 The Node Trac e C own menu to remove all of the currently ed traces th LEAR NODE TRACE from the TOOL Pull d 9 9 6 PART VALUE CURVE This function allows the user to plot
112. n This function calculates a mass center of grav lected parts Parts must have a material property and ity location and inertia properties for se aterial density spe ified Usage thickness defined with a m c 1 P V G prompts 6 200 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT User inputs a file name 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND ALL PARTS Output all mass information of all parts to the input file S LECT PART Output the mass information of the selected part to the input file Returns the user to MASS MENU E EXIT 6 18 8 ATTACH MASS Description This functio em from the selected CONM2 n creat ents in the current part and attaches surrounding parts es RBE ALL DOFs elem th elements to the nearest nodes in the Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ATTACH ALL M NODES Y N A YES attach all mass to the es NO and ABORT do nothin CONM2 MENU ASS TO NEAREST nearest nod g and return the user to the 6 201 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR The functions of the AUTO ASSEMBLY MENU are designed to add and modify connections in the database It also includes functions for replacing parts and part sets The functions in this menu are organized as follows 6 19 ASSEMBLY NASTRAN 6 19 1 READ FROM FILE
113. node is selected twice the following message appears gt NODE xxxx ALREADY PICKED DONE removes the selected nodal forces and exits the function REMOVE FORCE ABORT exits the function REMOVE FORCE without deleting the selected nodal forces LOAD STATIC LOAD REMOVE PRESSURE Description This function removes pressure loads from se cted elements in the current load le set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST ESSURE LOAD is highlighted and the arrow is If an element is selected more than once the following message appears gt ELEMENT xxxx ALREADY PICKED LOAD S Description 2 VPG prompts gt REMOVE PR gt SELECT ELEMENTS When a pressure load is removed the element removed gt SELECT ELEMENTS DONE will exit the user to the LOADING OPTIONS submenu ABORT will exit the user to the LOADING OPTIONS submenu without removing any of the selected pressure loads TATIC LOAD SHOW This Usag function shows the selected load set e 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO SHOW 6 138 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR LOAD DYNAMIC LOAD Description Available load sets are displayed in the STATIC LOAD CARD window This function defines and modifies dynamic loads The loads may be used in the Usage subcase definition 1 VPG prompts to select option as following 2 When entering CREATE VPG
114. of freedom prompts gt ENTER D O F CNA Any combination of 6 41 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis s Blanks or commas are not allowed between the degrees of freedom i e 123 456 456 345 2 d gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or Once the desired nodes 2 or points 2 have been selected the element will be EXIT or ABORT will exit this function ion 6 rotational along the global Z axi Once the desired D O F has been entered the prompt will rea To create th any combination of the three created CREATE MASS CONM2 NASTRAN Descript This subsection covers the options for the MASS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 2 ELEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEM 2 VPG prompts MENTS OF INERTIA VPG displays a pop up window with the following items I11 I21 I22 I31 I32 may enter only the mass if desired The moment of inertia is an optional entry The user should remember that the units of the CONM2 s should be consistent with the units of the database e g DATABASE MM CONM2 KG 3 V gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e elements the user may select a node
115. of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 45 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT Select three nodes if click DONE a triangle plate element is created if go on selecting the fourth node a quadrangle element is created CREATE SOLID LS DYNA Descripti on This function defines a tetrahedron or hexahedron element This section covers the option on of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage s for the SOLID subsecti 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT S DONE a tetrahedron element is created if go on selecting nodes a hexahedron element is created after the eighth node is selected CREATE THICK Description elect four nodes if click SHELL LS DYNA T e options for the THICK SHELL subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Note A solid element cannot be created in a part that has plate properties The user must either create a new part operties or make a part current that contains solid properties Usa his section covers th and assign it solid pr ge 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three EXIT or ABORT terminates this function CREATE SPRING DAMPER LS DYNA tion Desc ip r This function defines a spring damper element between two nodes points It is reco ser select the A
116. offers an option for the user to change the background colour of the curve window The default background colour of the curve window is black and the colour on the button is displaying Usage The user can click this button and the colour panel will pop up and prompt the user to select the desired colour for the curve The colour panel is shown in figure 9 72 If don t want t change the colour after the colour panel have popped up the user can click anywhere else o o n the screen to cancel the colour select Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 7 AXIS OPERATION Description The functions of the Axis Operation enable the user to modify the attributes of ing the Log X and Log Y Grid display and the change in height of the axis of coordinate includ Y axis 9 71 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 12 6 8 LOG X and LOG Y toggle De scription This function enables the user to change the X and Y coordinate values to log 9 12 De arithmic values 6 9 GRID scription This function es the user to display grid on the curve windo enabl w 9 12 6 10 AXIS HEIGHT De scription This function enables the user to specify the height of y axis on the curve win ositive orientation of y axis The user can 9 12 Description dow through clicking with left mouse on the area of p re click the Modify button to cancel this operation 6 11 X TITLE This function
117. only output the lines surfac NO will output all elements lines surfaces in the database 5 8 5 WRITE MOLDFLOW FILE This function allows the user to output the current model data into an external file in MOLDFLOW Node and element nu or c press nodes elements see NODE OPTIONS menu pro pts gt RENUMBER NODE NUMBERS AND TRY AGAIN or gt RENUMBER ELEMENT NUMBERS AND TRY AGAIN p mpts gt ENTER ROOT NAME FOR INP VPG write and tri FILE MANAGER e f name already exists the p gt F ENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE will overwrite the existing file YES NO will pro 3 After entering file name VPG prompts NIT CURRENTLY USED IN D gt SELECT U MM CM IN 4 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N will only output the elements displayed on the screen YES NO will output all elements existing in the database 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITL 5 8 6 WRITE NASTRAN This function allows the user to output the current model data to an external file into NASTRAN format The user may output either the complete model data or partial model data For detailed descriptions of these options users should refer to NASTRAN softw u 5 10 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r Detail de 1 VPG Prom CONTROLS OPTION ed scription pts gt ENTER ANALYSIS TYPE Displays a submenu with NASTRAN
118. other that is less than or equal to a specified tolerance The VPG default tolerance which is the lowest tolerance VPG allows is 0 01 units The user may increase the default tolerance as necessary The COINCIDENT NODE CHECK merges two nodes in a coincident node group into one node and retains the lower node number i e VPG combines two nodes that share the same location and renumbers the new node with the lower grid number VPG designates the higher grid number as unreferenced Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER TOL DEFAULT 0 01 Any positive real number is a valid entry 2 After entering a tolerance VPG prompts the user to select the nodes to be checked gt SELECT OPTION FOR COINCIDENT NODE CHECK Cancel Exits the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu without executing COINCIDENT NODE CHECK After selecting one of the previous options or if no coincident nodes are found the user returns to the NODE OPTIONS menu If coincident nodes are found VPG prompts 6 76 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt XXXX COINCIDENT NODES FOUND E COINCIDENT NODES Y N the coincident nodes elements with unique node numbers will not be merged avoiding the degeneration of the element 6 4 6 COPY Description gt MERG YES merges NO returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu Coincident nodes become unreferenced nodes and are represented by asterisks
119. own crash tool models in a customized ts o s capability and to allow less experienced users to adopt a consistent methodology ge contain Usa sis and post processi t simulation results Therefore it is ns according to this step by step man eloped and maintained a set of crash tool models for the case al for consulting projec ash module allows us 7 36 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES library fo te use ETA c echnology Safety System FTSS dummy models for use with the module i arious Child Dummy models However these dummy models are distributed by FTSS and are not part of the eta VPG license agree ETA offers a set of generic FEA Flexible Body and or Rigid Body dummy models that are tuned to test simulation results Although the material properties joint rates and construction are not fully validated they are still complete models developed and used in crash simulation studies As of VPG version 3 3 ETA no longer supports any FTSS dummy or headform models as part of VPG Safety A set of barrier models is included These are also generic models developed by ETA and tuned to test results The Crash Tool Library is in ASCII format so that the LS DYNA input file of each model is stored and can be modified and updated in the library per user criteria The user examine teristics using the VPG Safety module The crash tool models material properties contact de
120. pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor on the display screen to define the region Releases the left button the area included the region will be displayed in full screen FILL Rescale the model to include a FILL automatically zooms in or out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen ll entities that are currently displayed TOP VIEW Automatically displays the model from the TOP or in the XY plane Y Z VIEW Automatically displays the model from the RIGHT or in the YZ plane X Z VIEW Automatically displays the model from the LEFT or in the XZ plane ISOMETRIC VIEW Automatically displays the model fro gree isometric m the isometric plane 60 de CLEA Remove the R highlighted entities from the screen IDENTIFY NODE 9 7 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING This fun node number reen and the outputs the coordinates in the messa e window Figure 9 3 shows the CONTROL OPTION window when the function starts ction enables the user to identify any node by cursor selection default or key in The program labels the node number of the selected node is highlighted on the sc g Figure 9 3 Identify Node Control Option Window SELEC The pro the des labeled with the node number KEY IN This option allows user to identify the element by entering a node number The user enters the node number and selects OK The desired node will be highlighted a
121. prompt ENTER RADIUS Any real value greater than zero is valid An arc tangent to the 2 line make actual contact with the arc but do not need to intersect IN ARC This function allows the user to create an arc through 3 points nodes that are not c ed arc will be included in the current part ollinear The creat Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE This command will be prompted 3 times oints or nodes are selected an arc will automatically be drawn 2 on When 3 p EXIT will terminate this functi The asterisks represent the points through which the arc is drawn 6 1 5 COPY Description This function allows the user to generate a set of duplicate lines The user may then simu ate and or rotate the copied lines U ltaneously transl sage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO COPY gt SELECT LINES 6 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected prompts LOCAL COORDINATES rdinate system local or global VPG ed coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the YES then go to step 4 ABORT ORT is selected then the function is terminated 4 VPG gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES positive integer 5 ROTATE M R MOVE is entered gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS i e 0 0 1000 will copy the selected line s 1000 units along the Allow the user
122. refere or node on the screen as the local origin then en s o one of the global axes 1 When red coordinate system local or global in the options gt een displayed see step 3 or a point enter a coordinate by keyboard or use tions to create a local coordinate system 2 O e cted VPG prompts ABORT cts 2 reference points VPG displays the coordinate system INCREMENTAL XYZ The user may enter DX DY and DZ from the previous reference point to define a local coordinate system the local coordin When ate nated as the UVW coordinate frame One two or three nts e required to establish a local coordinate system local system desig ystem the first reference point defines the local origin The second ref ends from the first reference point defines the direction of th nt defines the local UV plane The l to the U axis T to the UV plane oint option DONE should es along the vector from the origin to the second reference point the V ne nd the U axis is defined by the right hand rule al commands generating arc nce point option the user selects a point ter ne of the X Y or Z options that are listed to define the local W along creating a local coordinate system VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompts for a desi area ABORT GLOBAL SYSTEM KEY IN X Y Z This signals the user to key in the origin of the local coordinate system
123. set type If the type of set selected has not yet been defined the user will be prompted to create one see SET MENU Section 6 6 6 7 Once the set has been determined VPG returns to step 1 Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE EXTENT OUTPUT 7 If the user selects SET VPG prom Description The definition cards in the EXTENT OUTPUT subsection specify the BINARY database output files Usage gt SELECT OPTION 1 VPG prompts Refer to the beginning of this section for a description of these commands 2 Whe n CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 3 When the option is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DAT Description ABASE FORMAT The definition cards in the FORMAT subsection specify database format Usage Wh ATABASE FORMAT DEFINITION window appears User can select result file as DYNA ANSYS or both Description en DEFINE is selected the D DATABASE FSI This function defines parameters for the fluent data results file 6 174 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR DAT OR Desc ABASE FSI SENS ription This function defines pressure sensor s locations which follow the positions of some Lagrangian segments during the simulation DAT Des on ABASE HISTORY cripti The definition cards in the HISTORY sub
124. simultaneously delete and recreate any boundary SPC Usage set VPG 2 After the user selects a boundary SPC set the BOUNDARY SPC DEFINITION e user may modify parameters in the window ion 1 prompts gt PICK SPC TO MODIFY window pops up and th SPC REMOVE NODES IN SET Descript This function deletes nodes from the selected boundary SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ICK A BOUNDARY SPC SET TO REMOVE P NODES 2 VPG prompts 6 142 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT NODES and the user exits the function R IN SET without releasing any of the selected grids SPC SHOW Description DONE will release nodes from the SPC set EMOVE NODES IN SET ABORT will exit the function REMOVE NODES This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined SPC sets VPG d U isplays D O F next to each node sage 1 WINDOW 6 9 4 INITIAL VELOCITY Description VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO SHOW List of all SPC sets CURSOR AT NODE MULTI PT REGION SELECT ALL UNDO ALL EXIT This function allows the user to define and assign both linear and angular Usage velocities to selected nodes 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages INITIAL Descriptio VELOCITY CREATE n Thi t
125. surfaces of the displayed solids The plate de on the screen in the current part at the time of creation In order to for the user to identify any unwanted free surfaces VPG creates p carry element node numbers from a parent solid element If the ts are used in a model they should be renumbered with the tively EXIT Returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu D This measures the distance This identifies the element numbers of the plate elements that represent the free surfaces in the FREE SU elements th Identifies the nodes in the solid elements and acquires the CR elements will resi late elements that se plate elemen RENUMBER ELEMENT and RENUMBER NODE commands in the ELEMENT OPTIONS and NODE OPTIONS menus respec 6 5 18 CHECK SPRING escription This function checks spring elements for unconnected ends If unconnected elements are found a mass value can be entered to create mass elements at the free ends Usage automatically 1 gt C S Y N VPG prompts HECK FOR NON ZERO LENGTH SPRING 6 98 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR YES ew part gt XX NON ZERO LENTH SPRINGS FOUND INCLUDE ELEMENTS IN NEW VPG prompts gt CONTINUE TO CHECK FOR LOOSE CONNECTION Y N l cause VPG to check for spring elements that are not connected o ring shell or solid element Selecting NO will inate the function 6 5 19
126. target position 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE PASSAGER LEFT KNEE 7 64 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 5 1 5 FMVSS203 STEERING CONTROL Description This function will create a body block model and position it for simulation of an FMVSS 203 Steering Control System analysis Usage prompts TER STE VPG MODULES 1 VPG gt EN ERING CONTROL INFORMATION 2 VPG prompt gt PICK A ST RING WHEEL NODE TO LOCATE BODY BLOCK s EE O tion Select CURS R AT NODE default and select a node from the part as target posi 7 65 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 5 2 OCCUPANT SAFETY ECE REGULATIONS 7 5 2 1 ECE17 LUGGAGE INTRUSTION Description This function will import and position luggage blocks of the proper weight and dimensions for use in an ECE 17 Luggage Intrusion simulation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER LUGGAGE INT N VPG MODULES RUSION INFORMATIO 2 VPG prompts gt PICK SEAT REAR END TO LOCATE LUGGAGE HORIZONTALLY Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE LUGGAGE VERTICALLY 7 66 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 67 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual VPG MODULES 7 6 DUMMY POSITIONING The functions in the DUMMY POSITIONING menu allow t
127. the coupling and material prope Defines control cards and exports the model 7 8 ALE SI modules are used for fluid and solid coupling sim mulate structure interaction with high energy explosio metric Soil Fluid Air ALE mesh generation mated ALE material section E Easy FSI coupling Cre tes standard m rties 7 8 1 CREATE ALE SOLID MESH This option helps user to define standard ALE zones and quickly sets up ALE Meshes and Explosive Source Models 7 73 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES A detail 7 8 1 1 LI ed description of each function is given in the following sections NEAR MAPPING Description This functio element regions by a linea n allows the user to generate solid elements between two similar plate r mapping process e Usag Selected source elements and target elements and the number of selected elements of both the source and target should be the same The distributions of node locations are similar and VPG will automatically look for the aligning nodes in the model After specifying the number of layers of elements desired between source elements and target elements click on the Apply button to generate solid elements by linear mapping SPHERE CORE IN BOX Descriptio 7 8 1 2 n This menu allows the user to generate a spherical object in an ALE mesh wit er connected to the ALE elements The mesh generated will be predominantly elements
128. the desired co mpt will CCEPT If accepted VPG prompts NTER RAD TH1 TH2 RAD radius of arc 1 beginning po 6 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR T g point of arc or circle IN le increment between points default is 5 degrees ater than zero is valid i e 100 0 360 10 is a circle with a radius of 100 units with an increment of 10 degrees between H2 endin C ang Any real value gre points arc and a circle have An been generated with the same center 4 VPG prompts CENTER AND PLANE YES NO EXIT Do you want to create another circle arc using the same center and plane step 1 EXIT exits the function 6 1 S Description gt SAME YES returns the user to step 3 NO returns the user to 3 ARC TANGENT 2 LINE This command allows the user to create an arc tangent to 2 lines The arc will be i PART see PART CONTROL MENU The tangent arc will trim the two in se Usage ncluded in the CURRENT ter cting lines Arc tangent to two lines 1 VPG prompts for a line gt SELECT LINE 1 6 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 VPG second line 3 VPG s gt OF ARC OR 1 TO EXIT s is drawn The lines need to be long enough to 6 1 4 3 PO T Description prompts for a gt SELECT INTERSECTING LINE
129. the menu Note The user may adjust the degree of transparency in the SETUP menu refer to Section 10 4 10 3 18 RENAME Description Allows the user to change a selected part s name Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 23 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO RENAME gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 After the user selects a part VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART NAME OR EX TO EXIT 10 3 19 RENUMBER PID Description This function allows the user to renumber all parts PID in the existing database See Figure 10 3 5 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION Figure 10 3 5 Renumber Part ID 10 3 20 DELETE EMPTY PARTS Description This function allows the user to delete parts that contain no lines surfaces or elements 10 3 21 MODIFY Description Allows the user to change a selected part s attributes such as thickness material etc Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 After the user selects a part a Part Definition window appears 10 3 22 THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to calculate and apply a nodal thickness value for each part of the model The calculation of the thickness is made via a one step metal forming analysis As the part is selected a background process calculates the nodal thickness values based on material properties the shape of the component and the initial component thickness Please see the VPG PrePost
130. the screen into six distinct regions The regions are used to provide input or play messages to the user The six regions are illustrated and described in Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 eta Post interface window PHIC DISPLAY WINDOW Models and graphs are displayed in this window GRA MEN ICO functions of the program U BAR Commands and options are displayed in this area N BAR Provides the user easy access to the commonly used 9 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW AREA Once the user selects a command from the MENU BAR or ICON BAR a corresponding dialog window with the appropriate functions is displayed in this area DISPLAY OPTIONS The options in this group are used to control the model displayed in the graphic PROMPT AREA eta Post displays comment he user The Graphic User Interface GUI is designed for easy access to all the functions for post processing DYNA and Nastran results This GUI is unified for both Windows and UNIX LINUX platforms The user activates the functions via mouse click The menu bar contains the FILE EDIT TOOL and OPTION menus All the menus are designed in a logical and efficient way to minimize number of mouse clicks and operations The FILE menu contains functions that control the input and output of data files the EDIT menu contains functions that allow the user to alter the model graph and the VIEW menu contains functions that alter the display Each of
131. to identify an element and its nodes by cursor selection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR VPG identifies the element s respective type number part and nodes The selected element will be highlighted and element and node numbers will be displayed in the dialogue window The user also has the option to key in the number of a desired element to identify its location and characteristics It will also identify NASTRAN ELEMENT TYPE LS DYNA ELEMENT TYPE CBAR BEAM RBE2 RIGID EL PLOTEL PLOTEL PLATE PLATE SOLID SOLID CELAS2 SPRING CELAS1 SPOTWELD RBAR MASS CTUBE JOINT ISO SHL T SHELL RBE3 SEATBELT IDENTIFY ELEMENTS displays element numbers and corresponding node numbers 10 4 8 LOAD CURVE Description This function defines and modifies the load curves for a nonlinear analysis The LOAD CURVE command requires several levels of submenus Usage 1 VPG displays the Load Curve option menu as below figure Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 33 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY Figure 10 4 8 1 Load Curve Option Menu 2 After the user selects a command VPG lists a set of options specific to that command CREATE Description This function allows the user to create load curves Usage 1 VPG displays the CURVE DEFINITION CARD allowing the user to define the load curve gt ENTER LOAD CURVE NUMBER xxxx OR 1 TO EXIT gt ENTER CURVE NAME UP TO 8 CHARACTERS VPG recomm
132. user to draw a spline curve line through multiple points o T r nodes or any combination of points or nodes A minimum of 3 Points or Nodes is required for use of this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE ABORT Y IN XYZ e user may enter up to 3 points globally to define a point or node CREMENTAL XYZ ed to define NODE POINT LAST nction DONE IT EX KE Th IN The user may enter DX DY DZ from the previous point select a point or node REJECT DONE and EXIT will exit the fu 2 an example of a generated spline curve 6 1 8 DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete selected lines Lines may be selected by rsor selections by dragging a window by entering line numbers or by multi point elections Usag individual cu region s e 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO DELETE gt SELECT LINES Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected 6 7 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 XT D 9 E END LINE escription This function allows the user to extend a line by a specified distance along the axis of the line at either end of the line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE TO EXTEND INT TO EXTEND LINE LENGTH TO BE EXTENDED 6 1 10 GENERATE LINES Desc on 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT END PO Select the desired end point of the li
133. user to select property type gt SELECT OPTION LECT PROPERTY TYPE menu is shown as below The SE 2 Once a property type is selected VPG displays a definition card in which the user y insert the values for the element properties 6 D ma 12 6 CREATE LS DYNA escription This function PG first displays a list allows the user to create define a property To create a property V of section types Once a type is selected its definition card is d isplayed and the user can edit the card for the desired properties The SELECT SECTION TYPE menu is as following 6 158 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR If the user enters BEAMS the BEAM SECTION OPTIONS a menu pops up as follows 6 12 7 DELETE Description NASTRAN T Usage his function deletes selected element properties from the database 1 VPG prompts the user for the target property name 6 159 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R gt SELECT SECTION LIST OF PROPERTIES MULTI PT REGION SELECT ALL UNDO ALL UNDO 2 After th lected VPG displays the part in gray The following message is issued gt SECT If the IT VPG deletes the property and changes the color of the p ay to white White indicates that the part does not have properties as 6 12 8 DELETE LS Description WINDOW EXIT e part is se ION ID X
134. will echo on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz s selected the number of the point nearest the cursor location will age will echo on the command line xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz POINT If ALL NODES is selected the numbers of the displayed nodes will appear on screen at their node locations the first clear button in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW will remove the If POINT i appear on screen The following mess gt POINT xxxx X x EXIT will send the user to the LINE menu 6 1 12 MIRROR Description This function allows the user to reflect a copy of desired lines across a local or global coordinate plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to mirror the lines VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 d coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 3 If th gt ELECT LINES 2 Once the desire and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A e user selects YES then VPG prompts PICK LINES TO MIRROR gt S 6 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER PLANE OF MIRROR XY YZ XZ The user may now select a local plane of symmetry in which to mirror lines 6 V
135. 0 10 0 2 Once the user ele s text size VPG prompts gt DE TI E STARTING LOCATION FINE ABORT DONE UNDO LAST The user places e text by positioning the cursor at the gt ENTER TITLE The user types in the text for the title and pres previo This function allows the user to zoom in on any displayed area in the Display Window by dynamically defining a window about a region of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DEFINE ZOOM WINDOW The user defines the upper left corner of the zoom window by positioning the nd drags the cursor diagonally down the screen until the desired window size is reached The user clicks the mouse once to activate the window highlighted in white cursor on the display screen The user then presses the left mouse button a 10 1 12 TRUE VIEW Description This function allows the user to display an object in true view or the normal view 10 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY of the local W axis as projected onto the local UV plane Usage G prompts NT FOR ORIGIN or global e coordinates on screen and prompts A to step 1 command to step 3 The user may select an axis to be displayed from the bottom to the top of s option is selected displays the object in its true view perpendicular to the W axis This esired geometry in its true view according to the global X Y and Z coordinates or to the Z axis dis
136. 0 444900006 0 53670001 0 49000001 0 561600029 0 528999984 0 601000011 0 564999998 0 653999984 0 597000003 0 721000016 0 622500002 0 818000019 0 644900024 0 897000015 0 660000026 0 949999988 0 666999996 0 989000022 APPENDIX C C 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 0 670000017 0 99000001 0 671999991 1 0 0 699000001 1 20000005 0 75 1 51999998 0 800000012 2 19000006 0 808000028 2 30299997 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 23 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 16 MAT_PSEUDO_TENSOR 25 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC 27 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 28 ORTHOTROPIC 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB We set DYNA s value PR 0 0 SIGY 1 0 VF 0 2 MU 0 2 and ELFORM 1 in relative SECTION_SOLID card We create a HOURGLASS card with IHQ 4 and put it into relative PART s HGID field In RADIOSS if the relative element property ID is 0 or the element property type is not TYPE 6 we will set the material directions 1 2 3 align with the global axes X Y Z AOPT 2 A1 A2 A3 1 0 0 D1 D2 D3 0 1 0 Otherwise we will set AOPT 0 and map the RADIOSS 1 2 3 axes to the LS DYNA b c a axes The RADIOSS yield functions for the honeycomb material which have mu as the abscissa values must be converted into LS DYNA curves with mu 1 mu as the abscissa values In the discussion above it is assumed that the angle PHI in the RADIOSS orthotropic solid property set
137. 00 000 SURFACES 98 000 2 500 000 Edge Points 9 800 000 Control Points GRIDS 5 000 000 ELEMENTS 5 000 000 PROPERTIES 5 000 PIDS 5 000 2 VPG s into a neutral line format surfaces The pro A4 2 is e and maintain t clarity Several fonts and symbols are implemented throughout the manual An example is given at the bottom of the page 11 LINE DATA s built in translator converts and filters line data from the following program IGES lines and DXF file formats VDA files re are additional external translators to support CAD files generated from the following grams CATI CATIA5 STEP Unigraphics versions 18 and NX NX2 Pro E Updates to current versions of these CAD software interfaces are provided through the CAD Translator software provided separately from the eta VPG software product 12 CONVENTIONS h manual is designed to reduce the amount of reading material on the pag T tex 2 12 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s FIXED FONT This font indicates t LL CAPS BOLD Names subsec ext found within VPG e g menu tions commands and options within commands ALL CAPITALS This font indicates a function menu name card command etc found in explanatory text gt The greater than symbol directs the user to read the text disp yed in VPG s DIALOGUE WINDOW The question mark directs the user to select an opt WIN
138. 16 dragging a window over the desired a or by lines and su fac w in dow volume in s Figure 10 1 16 Active Window Menu WI OW ma any time within any menu of VPG by clicking the Note An ACTIVE ND y be defined at right mouse button Usage 10 7 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY gt SELECT OPTION FOR ACTIVE WINDOW NODE PTS KEY IN XYZ RANGE SCALE ACTIVE WINDOW DRAG WINDOW EXIT The user selects two nodes points in a diagonal fashion to define the active widow G by entering its global coordinates via active window by modifying any or all of its coordinates gt ENTER XYZ RANGE XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX ACTIVE WINDOW IS OFF SCALE ACTIVE WINDOW rre a larger or smaller window gt ENTER SCALE FACTOR o le agonal on screen T ndow starts with left button and middle button will close and complete the window 1 VPG prompts DIAGONAL ACTIVE WINDOW OFF MULTI POINT WINDOW DIAGONAL NODE POINTS KEY IN XYZ RAN E ze volume e a w The user defines the si of th ctive windo the keyboard The user may also expand an existing Turns off or deactivates the current active window This allows the user to scale the cu n ctive window to t a DRAG WINDOW The user defines the active wind w by se cting a two region di MULTI POINT WINDOW he user defines an active multi point window by cursor wi 10 1 17 EXPLODE V IEW
139. 2 ANNOTATE PART List of all ele ALL ELEMENT SETS VPG displays all elemen Note Because more than one ID number may be assigned to each element viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific element set at a time Description This function allows the user to add notes to a sel cted set e Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 23 CREATE PART D 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED escription This function allows t mbers The parts may be inclu he user to generate part sets with unique element and node ID nu ded in multiple sets Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid 2 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 6 116 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R list of all parts The user may press the left mouse button or type C to select the element nearest to the cursor 3 VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS SELECTED gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART list of all parts 4 When the user finishes and selects EXIT VPG prompts gt X PARTS INCLUDED IN PART SET X RT SET menu
140. 6 The User may enter any view name in the VIEW NAME field Click OK to save the current viewing orientation or click CANCEL to abort the save operation Figure 9 26 View Name Control Window RECALL VIEW Recalls the previously saved viewing orientation Click a VIEW NAME in the view list and then click RECALL The program will display the model according to the viewing DELETE Deletes the previously saved viewing orientation Click a VIEW NAME in the view list and then click DELETE to delete the saved view Closes the SAVE VIEW control window and exits the function De orientation saved under the selected VIEW NAME EXIT 9 8 11 BACKGROUND COLOR scription This function allows the user to select a color from color palette as the b d ackground color in the graphic display window Once the function is selected the program isplays a color palette as shown in Figure 9 27 9 26 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 27 Background Color Palette Usage The user may select any color in the palette as the background color The program will ange the background color immediately and exit the function as the color is selected Press the ch ESC key to exit the function without selecting any color POST PROCESSING 9 27 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY 9 The functions in this menu are shown in Figure 9 28 The user can define section cut mirror result define active wind
141. 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR for o CREAT Descripti n ther analysis programs E PLATE ELEMENT NASTRAN o This section covers the options for the PLATE ELEMENT quadrilateral and t E ELEMENTS riangular subsection of CREAT Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or ination of the three nodes or points to be selected A CTRIA3 requires 3 nodes or points to be selected then an entry of DONE ction CREATE D any comb A CQUAD4 ELEMENT requires 4 EXIT or ABORT will exit this fun SOLID ELEMENT NASTRAN escription This section covers the options for the SOLID ELEMENT cube wedge tetra ron subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS hed Usage Note A solid element cannot be created in a part that has plate properties The user ust either create a new part and assign it solid properties or make a part current that contains solid properties 1 R SOLID ELEMENT any combination of the three e DONE CHEXA Pick 8 nodes points pick the second set of 4 nodes points in set of 4 nodes points The element will be created CREATE SPRING ELEMENT CELAS2 NASTRAN Desc on m VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FO To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or CTETRA Pick 4 nodes points
142. A Desc 2 the DYNA MISC menu in the PR ATE SEATBELT ription This function defines a shell type seatbelt element with 4 nodes points This section covers for the SEATBELT 4 NODES subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usag the options e 1 VPG When the fourth node point is defined VPG displays the SEATBELT element prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT CREATE JOINT LS DYNA Description This function allows the user to create joints for DYNA analysis All types of joints are supported The procedure to create joints has been simplified to create the coincident nodes for the second rigid body The program first prompts for the Relative Penalty Stiffness default 1 0 The program next prompts the user to select the first part rigid body with material type 20 for the joint If no material is defined for the selected part the program prom ts a warning message NO MATERIAL ASSIGNED TO SELECTED PART The prog cessary nodes in the first rigid body to define the orientation of the joint The requirements for each type of joint are listed in the following table IDENTIFIER p ram then prompts the user to select ne JOINT TYPE NUMBER OF NODES ORIENTATION SYMBOL Spherical 1 N1 Center SJ Revolute 2 N1 N3 Axis of Rotation RJ Cylindrical 2 N1 N3 Axis of Cylinder CJ Planar 2 N1 N2 Normal of Plane PJ Universal 3 N1 N3 N4 Center e UJ End Points of th Perpendicular Axes
143. AD cards in pop up MODIFY DEFINE CONNECTION PROPERTIES Description 1 This function creates an BOX DRAWBEAD c DELETE window Allows user to modify already created BOX DRAWBEAD cards Defines failure related parameters for solid element spot weld failure Usage gt SELECT OPTION 1 VPG prompts 2 select an option VPG prompts This function creates an CONNECTION PROPERTIES card already created CONNECTION PROPERTIES cards LIST unction lists already created CONNECTION PROPERTIES cards in pop up window Allows user to modify already created CONNECTION PROPERTIES DEFINE Description CREATE DELETE This function deletes This f MODIFY cards CONSTRUCTION STAGES D uction stages U efines times and durations of constr sage eates an CONSTRUCTION STAGES card DELETE 1 VPG prompts CREATE This function cr 6 179 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR This function deletes already created CONSTRUCTION STAGES cards LIST This function lists already created CONSTRUCTION STAGES cards in p window Allows user to modify already created CONSTRUCTION STAGES cards DEFINE CONTACT VOLUME Description pop u MODIFY Defines a rectangular a cylindrical or a spherical volume in a local coordinate system Usage 1 VPG prompts This function creates an CONTACT VOLUME card
144. AL user can modify current material of selected part Click EXIT exit material definition 3 After mate CREATE a new section will be created for selected part SELECT a section will be sel cted for VPG MODULES selected part MODIFY CURRENT SECTION user can modify current section of selected part EXIT exit section definition e 4 After section is defined VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE a new EOS will be created for selected part SELECT a EOS will be selected for selected part MODIFY CURRENT EOS user can modify current EOS of selected part EXIT exit EOS definition 7 8 3 DEFINE COUPLING Description this function is used to define the fluid and solid coupling between explosive and medium in the model 7 77 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Usage ALE user can define keyword relative to ALE ALE FSI PROJECTION user can define coupling by keyword ALE_FSI_PROJECTION LAGRANGE SOLID user can define coupling by keyword CONSTRAINED_LAGRANGE_IN_SOLID EXIT exit coupling definition 7 8 4 INITIAL DETONATION Description this function is used to define the detonation parameters of explosives including the detonation locations and detonation time VPG MODULES Usage CREATE define detonation card DELETE delete already created detonation card LIST list already created detonation
145. AND property APPENDIX C C 15 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C Convert spring stiffness into DYNA material RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 1 SHELL SECTION_SHELL 2 TRUSS SECTION_BEAM truss 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant 4 SPRING SECTION_BEAM discrete 6 SOL_ORTH SECTION_SOLID 8 SPR_GENE SECTION_BEAM discrete 9 SH_ORTH SECTION_SHELL 10 SH_COMP SECTION_SHELL 11 SH_SANDW SECTION_SHELL 12 SPR_PUL SECTION_BEAM discrete 13 SPR_BEAM SECTION_BEAM discrete 14 SOLID SECTION_SOLID 32 SPR_PRE SECTION_DISCRETE 35 STITCH SECTION_DISCRETE 36 PREDIT SECTION_BEAM resultant CONVERT RADIOSS s SPRING PROPERTY TYPE 4 8 12 13 INTO DYNA s MATERIAL 196 IF H 0 N1 0 LINEAR ELASTIC SPRING K DYNA K RADIOSS D DYNA C RADIOSS IF H 0 N1 gt 0 NONLINEAR ELASTIC SPRING K DYNA A RADIOSS IF A RADIOSS 0 0 THEN K DYNA 1 0 C2 DYNA B RADIOSS A RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS IF H 1 N1 gt 0 K DYNA K RADIOSS A RADIOSS 1 0 IS ASSUMED C2 DYNA B RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS CONVERT RADIOSS SPRING INTO DYNA BEAM IN ALL CASES IF LENGTH OF SPRING IS FINITE SET SCOOR OF SECTION_BEAM TO 2 IF LENGTH IS VERY SMALL lt 0 000001 OR ZERO SET SCOOR TO 0 IF RADIOSS DOES NOT HAVE INER VALUE VPG SET It AS 1 0 8 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 0 VOID 9
146. ART menu c All data that is created in eta VPG such as elements lines or surfaces is created in the CURRENT PART The current part may be selected or changed from the PART menu ected all data create Part ay be turned on and off for display purposes from the PART menu 4 3 PRE The PRE menu is the main Preprocessing menu In this menu the user will find all of the necessary modeling functions to create elements nodes materials contacts element properties nd boundary conditions s m a 4 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 4 M a i n M e n u 4 4 ROAD ENSION Th N menu allows users to create suspension system models from predefined templates This menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu Typical 4 6 TIRE VPG contains tools to generate parametric tire models These tire models are described in HEEDS is an optimization software developed and maintained by Red Cedar Technologies which all rform multi objective optimizations VPG provides a set of tools which allows us timization goals and design variables These values are then included in the VPG supports definition of HEEDS discrete sets distributions variables tag n les For tagging it now only supports LS DYNA material and section define all parameters necessary to execute an analysis a al parameters are required to carry out an analysis For instance LS DYNA mo termination time and require a definition of output f
147. AS TARGET PRE PROCESSOR PART SET TO REPLACE art set from the part set list to repla 6 198 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR The functions of the MASS MENU are designed to add and modify mass properties in the database It is necessary sometimes to add masses represent nonstructural components or to modify masses to change the center of the gravity of the whole body The functions in this menu are organized as follows 6 18 MASS MENU NASTRAN A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 18 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add mass elements to the database from a file that stores the mass information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of o exit 2 If the file does not e gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU Notes All mass elements appear as small circles 6 18 2 WRITE TO FILE Description a previously saved file or cancel t xist the prompt reads This function allows the user to output all mass information to a file Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name is a new one VPG will create it V
148. ASS SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID T SHELL SOLID CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY RBODY CONSTRAINED_NODE_SET RBODY CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD RIVET JOINT JOINT SEATBELT BEAM 9 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete SPH POINT_SOURCE POINT_SOURCE_MIXTURE section Convert DYNA s spring stiffness into RADIOSS s element property DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 SECTION_BEAM integrated 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM discrete 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM truss 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM spotweld 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM 2D shells 3 BEAM SECTION_DISCRETE 4 SPRING SECTION_SHELL 1 SHELL SECTION_SHELL_ALE 1 SHELL SECTION_SOLID 14 SOLID SECTION_SOLID_ALE 14 SOLID APPENDIX C C 20 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C SECTION_TSHELL 14 SOLID SECTION_SEATBELT 3 BEAM 9 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 1 MAT_ELASTIC 1 ELAST 1 MAT_ELASTIC_FLUID 1 ELAST 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC 14 COMPSO 2 MAT_ANISOTROPIC_ELASTIC 1 ELAST 3 MAT_PLASTIC_KINEMATIC 2 PLAS_JOHNS 4 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_THERMAL 2 PLAS_JOHNS 5 MAT_SOIL_AND_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 6 MAT_VISCOELASTIC 34 BOLTZMAN 7 MAT_BLATZ KO_RUBBER 1 ELAST 8 MAT_HIGH_EXPLOSIVE_BURN 1 ELAST 9 MAT_NULL 6 HYD_VISC 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 3 HYDPLA 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO_SPALL 3 HYDPLA 11 MAT_STEINBERG 1 ELAST 11 MAT_STEINBERG_LUND 1 ELAST 12 MAT_ISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 PLAS_JOHNS 13 MAT_ISOTROPIC_E
149. ASTIC 27 PLAS_BRIT 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 28 HONEYCOMB 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB NOTE VPG set DYNA s value PR 0 0 SIGY 1 0 VF 0 2 MU 0 2 and ELFORM 1 in relative SECTION_SOLID card VPG create a HOURGLASS card with IHQ 4 and put it into relative PART s HGID field In RADIOSS if the relative element property ID is 0 or the element property type is not TYPE 6 VPG will set the material directions 1 2 3 align with the global axes X Y Z AOPT 2 A1 A2 A3 1 0 0 D1 D2 D3 0 1 0 Otherwise VPG will set AOPT 0 and map the RADIOSS 1 2 3 axes to the LS DYNA b c a axes The RADIOSS yield functions for the honeycomb material which have mu as the abscissa values must be converted into LS DYNA curves with mu 1 mu as the abscissa values In the above discussion it is assumed that the angle PHI in the RADIOSS orthotropic solid property set data is set to zero If PHI is nonzero further thought must be given to the conversion 32 HILL 3 MAT_PLASTIC_KINEMATIC 33 FOAM_PLAS 53 MAT_CLOSED_CELL_FOAM 34 BOLTZMAN 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_VISCOELASTIC 35 FOAM_VISC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 36 PLAS_TAB 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 38 VISC_TAB 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 40 KELVINMAX 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 42 OGDEN 77 MAT_OGDEN_RUBBER 43 HILL_TAB 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 44 COWPER 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 48 ZHAO 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 49 STEINB 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 50 LAW50 26 M
150. ASTRAN gt DYNA V970 CBAR BEAM RBE2 If NASTRAN s DOF is 123456 convert it into DYNA s CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY Otherwise convert it into DYNA s CONSTRAINED_NODE_SET SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID CELAS2 DISCRETE Create a DEFINE_SD_ORIENTATION for spring direction CELAS1 DISCRETE Create a DEFINE_SD_ORIENTATION for spring direction RBAR CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD CONM2 MASS amp INERTIA CBEAM BEAM CROD BEAM CTUBE BEAM ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL SHELL RBE3 CONST INTERPOLATION APPENDIX C C 24 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 10 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY VPG deletes PGAP property VPG converts spring stiffness into DYNA material NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 PSHELL SECTION_SHELL PSOLID SECTION_SOLID PBAR SECTION_BEAM resultant PBEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant PELAS SECTION_DISCRETE PROD SECTION_BEAM truss PTUBE SECTION_BEAM integrated 10 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 MAT1 1 MAT_ELASTIC 10 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET NODE FORCE LOAD_NODE_SET SHELL PRESSURE LOAD_SHELL_SET INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY 10 5 OTHERS VPG converts NODE SET ELEMENT SET NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 LOAD CURVE DEFINE_CURVE LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM 11 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO NASTRAN 11 1 ELEMENT Delete SEATBELT amp JOINT elements DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN BEAM CBAR CBEAM CROD According to it
151. ATE NORMAL CHECK COMPLETED The boundary will highlight when three or more plate elements connect at a PLATE NORMAL in the SETUP MENU will display the element normals ECK RIGID LINK Desc C CK PLATE NORMAL VPG will highlig n common edge 6 5 9 CH ription This function checks the connectivity and length of all rigid elements RBE2 and RBAR Ri bo he user or that are loose zero length double de d ant are highlighted Usage gid dies that exceed the length criteria of t pen ent cyclic or redund AIN LENGTH Y N YES gt ENTER LENGTH CRITERIA Any real number greater than zero NO 2 The user has the option to place failed elements into new parts If the user opts to place the failed elements into a new part VPG will generate the following part names r xlong Checks for RBE2s that fail length check uplic Checks for degenerate RBE2s r cyclic Checks for two RBE2s sharing the same two nodes in an endent dependent node loop r d ependent nodes r l loose connections The us DEL CHECKER menu 6 5 10 CHECK ELEM SIZE Desc 1 VPG prompts gt FIND RIGID LINKS LONGER THAN CERT r d indep ouble Checks for RBE2s with double d oose Checks for er returns to the MO ription This function checks the minimum length of the edges of plate solid or beam elements G t are shorter than the user defined length crit Usage VP color fills any elements with dime
152. ATION CARD if a termination time h ified yet Once the card is defined and the user selects OK the DYNA dec s 5 8 3 WRITE GENESIS FILE Thi ction allows the user to output a GENESIS dat data deck directly from the VPG database 5 8 4 WRITE LINE DATA FILE This function allows the user to output a LINE SURFACE DATA lin data file directly from the VPG database 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT file name up to 24 characters The lin extension is suggested 2 If the file nam the following message 4 as not been spec k i written s fun Enter a e already exists the program will prompt 5 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N rite the existing file mpt for a file name 3 VPG ro gt S Y N YES es displayed on the screen format VPG supports Moldflow version 5 1 Note mbers must be in sequence to write a MOLDFLOW file The user may either renumber om If the nodes are not in sequential order VPG m 1 VPG ro UT FILES OR STOP TO EXIT s three files in accordance with the MOLDFLOW format mfl mod 2 If th ile rogram will prompt the following message IL Y N mpt for a file name ATABASE E are doc mentation YES NO YES will overw NO will pro p mpts WRITE LINES SURFACES ONLY IN ACTIVE PART NO YES will
153. AT_HONEYCOMB 52 GURSON 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 53 LAW53 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB APPENDIX C C 17 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 54 LAW54 1 MAT_ELASTIC 8 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 BCS BOUNDARY_SPC_SET CLOAD LOAD_NODE_SET GRAVITY LOAD_BODY INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY IMPOSED DISPLACEMENT BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET IMPOSED VELOCITY BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET IMPOSED ACCELERATION BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET MPC CONSTRAINED_LINEAR_LOCAL PLOAD LOAD_SEGMENT_SET 8 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL Delete RIGIDWALLs which do not have nodes RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 TYPE2 TIED CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE3 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE5 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE6 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE8 SLIDE CONTACT_DRAWBEAD TYPE10 TIED VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE11 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE14 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE15 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE2 TIED CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE16 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE17 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE NOTE Or create a new CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE to replace all RADIOSS s
154. BAG_MODEL and replace the original airbag material type 27 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE converts to DYNA V970 material type 34 MAT_FABLIC 5 SEATBELT with Radioss material type 1 ELASTIC converts to DYNA V970 material type 34 MAT_FABLIC with very small young s modulus CONTACT 1 All the Radioss contacts convert to CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE contact in Dyna and create a new one more CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE for full model VPG 3 2 RADIOSS INTERFACE AND CONVERSION TABLE RADIOSS Interface Notes 1 RADIOSS INTERFACE VPG 3 2 SUPPORTS ALL INPUT CARDS OF RADIOSS V4 1 FIXED FORMAT RADIOSS Entity Location in VPG GUI APPENDIX C C 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C CONTROL VARABLES RADIOSS MISC CONTROL CARDS MATERIALS MATERIAL PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONDITIONS BOUNDARY CONDITIONS SPC SKEW FRAMES UTIL COORDINATE SYSTEM PROPERTY SETS ELEMENT PROPERTY FUNCTIONS UTIL LOAD CURVE LOADS BOUNDARY CONDITIONS LOADING INITIAL VELOCITIES BOUNDARY CONDITIONS INITIAL VELOCITY ACCELEROMETERS RADIOSS MISC ACCELEROMETERS SENSORS RADIOSS MISC SENSORS GRAVITY BOUNDARY CONDITIONS GRAVITY INTERFACES CONTACT RIGID WALLS CONTACT RIGID BODIES ELEMENT OPTIONS ADDED MASSES ELEMENT OPTIONS IMPOSED VELOCITIES BOUNDARY CONDITIONS IMPOSED VELOCITY RIVETS SPOTWELDS ELEMENT OPTIONS SECTIONS RADIOSS MISC SECTION CARDS CYLINDRICAL JOINTS ELEMENT OPTIONS MONITORED VOLUMES RADIOSS MISC MONITORED VOLUMES 2 CONVERTING FROM RADI
155. BRIC 14 COMPSO 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_FAILURE_SHELL_MODEL 14 COMPSO 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_FAILURE_SOLID_MODEL 14 COMPSO APPENDIX C C 21 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 60 MAT_ELASTIC_WITH_VISCOSITY 1 ELAST 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_VISCOELASTIC 34 BOLTZMAN 62 MAT_VISCOUS_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_FOAM 10 LAW10 64 MAT_RATE_SENSITIVE_POWERLAW_PLASTICITY 2 PLAS_JOHNS 65 MAT_MODIFIED_ZERILLI_ARMSTRONG 2 PLAS_JOHNS 66 MAT_LINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 67 MAT_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 68 MAT_NONLINEAR_PLASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 2 PLAS_JOHNS 69 MAT_SID_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 70 MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 71 MAT_CABLE_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 72 MAT_CONCRETE_DAMAGE 24 CONC 73 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 74 MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 75 MAT_BILKHU DUBOIS_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 35 FOAM_VISC 77 MAT_HYPERELASTIC_RUBBER 42 OGDEN 77 MAT_OGDEN_RUBBER 42 OGDEN 78 MAT_SOIL_CONCRETE 10 LAW10 79 MAT_HYSTERETIC_SOIL 24 CONC 80 MAT_RAMBERG_OSGOOD 1 ELAST 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 22 DAMA 83 MAT_FU_CHANG_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 86 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_VISCOELASTIC 14 COMPSO 87 MAT_CELLULAR_RUBBER 1 ELAST 88 MAT_MTS 1 ELAST 89 MAT_PLASTICITY_POLYMER 2 PLAS_JOHNS 90 MAT_ACOUSTIC 1 ELAST 94 MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 96 MAT_BRITTLE_DAMAGE 24 CONC 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHN
156. BTOUT Seatbelt output SECFORC Cross section forces 9 60 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING TPRINT Temperature output AIRBAG STATISTICS ABSTAT Description er n p t a rom the abstat file The following types are available BOUNDA L F RC Description The us ca lo irbag statistic data f RY NODA O ES BNDOUT The user can plot boundary nodal force time history data from the bndout file The follo types are available ZFORCE DEFORM Descriptio wing XFORCE YFORCE ENERGY ED GEOMETRY DEFGEO n The user can plot the deformed geometry data from the defgeo file DISCRETE ELEMENTS DEFORC Description This user can plot the discrete element time history data from the deforc file The ailable MOMENT X FORCE MOMENT X FORCE MOMENT RESULTANT FORCE MOMENT ELOUT Description following types are av X FORCE ELEMENT DATA The user can plot element force data from the elout file VOLUME INTERNAL ENERGY GENSITY DM DT OUT TOTAL MASS PRESSURE DM DT IN GAS TEMPERATURE 9 61 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING EMENT RESULTANTS GCEOUT Descr tio CONTACT EL ip n The user can plot contact element resultant data from the gceout file The following types are available ZFORCE FORCE MAGITUDE Y MOMENT Z MOMENT GLOBAL D XFORCE
157. BY MOUSE button eta Post allows the user to select Option to accept the U Axis at this time the user is allowed to drag mouse the section cut will rotate along the U Axis DISPLAY OPTIONS the section cut function WHOLE MODEL Whole model in grey will be displayed with section line after exit from the section cut function SECTION CUT PORTION This function allows user to display a portion of the model on the positive or negative side of the local W ax cut function The program will cted portion of the model on the screen Figure 9 34 shows a typical display of SECTION ONLY option TRANSLATE First select the MOVE SE select a node on the current section as the reference node The program draws a line along the local W axis as the directional line Drag the mouse along the directional line to obta two nodes on the current section as the U Axis Exit the Control SECTION ONLY Only the section line will be displayed after exit from is after exit from the section display only the sele Figure 9 34 An Example for SECTION CUT display 9 32 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 9 2 CONSTRAIN MOTION Description This function enables the user to define a reference point for animation The user may sel as the reference point by the function SELECT REFERENCE NODE ion degree of freedom X Y and Z to constrain the ect any node in the model The user may also select any or all
158. CE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_TIEBREAK TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_TIEBREAK TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_CONSTRAINT_NODES_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_CONSTRAINT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_DRAWBEAD TYPE8 SLIDE CONTACT_DRAWBEAD_INITIALIZE TYPE8 SLIDE CONTACT_ERODING_NODES_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_ERODING_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_ERODING_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_FORCE_TRANSDUCER_PENALTY TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_FORCE_TRANSDUCER_CONSTRAINT TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_FORMING_NODES_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_FORMING_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_FORMING_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_NODES_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_NODES_TO_SURFACE_INTERFERENCE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_INTERFERENCE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_RIGID_NODES_TO_RIGID_BODY TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_ONE_WAY_TO_RIGID_BODY TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_TWO_WAY_TO_RIGID_BODY TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SINGLE_EDGE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SLIDING_ONLY TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SLIDING_
159. COBIAN Description message is echoed and the user is returned to the If duplicate elements are found in the displayed elements the following message will be ech ntinue with the DUPLICATE ART DEFINITION window po duplicate elements will be removed from th he user will exit to the This function allows the user to check for element distortion against the element s ideal shape which is given n value of 1 0 The more an element is warped the closer it approaches a zero Jacobian value Elements that fail the Jacobian check are color filled and U a Jacobia the user has the option of putting them in a separate part sage gt ENTER THE CRITERION FOR JACOBIAN CHECK DEFAULT 0 7 VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK W PART Y N 3 If YE new part If NO VPG prompts the user to check individual elements for Jacobian value via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit the function 6 5 8 CHECK Description 1 VPG prompts 2 gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NE S VPG prompts the user to define a 4 NORMAL This function draws a white boundary line between the opposing normals of the d lements See the following figure isplayed plate e 6 92 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 HE ht the boundary between the elements that have opposing ormal orientations Afterwards VPG echoes the message gt PL
160. D unreferenced curves in a database LIST Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST MODIFY Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and the CURVE DEFINITION CARD once a curve has been selected READ CURVE Displays the VPG File Dialog window and allows the user to read in a previously saved curve cur file RENUMBER Renumber the selected load curve or all load curves SHOW CURVE Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST ith all defined curves By selecting d Description Once the two po Refer to the LS DELETE Displays DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and allows user to select and delete curves ERASE UNR w a listed curve and exiting the list the curve will be displaye DEFINE DEATH TIME This function is to dynamically define death time for BOUNDARY PRESCRIBED MOTION based on the location of nodes or rigid bodies Usage 1 PG prompts CREATE H TIME card This function lists already created DEATH TIME cards in pop up window ed DEATH TIME cards DEF Descr V This function creates an DEAT DELETE This function deletes already created DEATH TIME cards LIST MODIFY Allows user to modify already creat INE FRICTION iption This function is to define coefficients between parts for use in the contact options Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE This function creates an FRICTION card nction deletes already created FRICTION cards ted FRICTION cards in pop up window MODIFY
161. DIOSS V4 1 1 MAT_ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 1 MAT_ELASTIC_FLUID 1 ELASTIC APPENDIX C C 7 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 2 MAT_ANISOTROPIC_ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 3 MAT_PLASTIC_KINEMATIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 4 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_THERMAL 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 5 MAT_SOIL_AND_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC 6 MAT_VISCOELASTIC 34 VISCOELASTIC 7 MAT_BLATZ KO_RUBBER 1 ELASTIC 8 MAT_HIGH_EXPLOSIVE_BURN 1 ELASTIC 9 MAT_NULL 6 HYDRODYNAMIC_VISCOUS 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 3 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRODYNAMIC 10 2 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO_SPALL 3 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRODYNAMIC 11 MAT_STEINBERG 1 ELASTIC 11 2 MAT_STEINBERG_LUND 1 ELASTIC 12 MAT_ISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 13 MAT_ISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_FAILURE 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 14 MAT_SOIL_AND_FOAM_FAILURE 33 VISCOPLASTIC 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 4 JOHNSON_COOK 16 MAT_PSEUDO_TENSOR 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 17 MAT_ORIENTED_CRACK 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 18 MAT_POWER_LAW_PLASTICITY 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 19 MAT_STRAIN_RATE_DEPENDENT_PLASTICITY 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 20 MAT_RIGID 1 ELASTIC 21 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_THERMAL 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 22 MAT_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 23 MAT_TEMPERATURE_DEPENDENT 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC _ORTHOTROPIC 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 36 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 25 MAT_GEOLOGICAL_CAP_MODEL 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB 2 ELASTIC_P
162. DOW The bullet signals a description of the previous comm A etc Proportional Font This font indicates explanatory text e g command descriptions notes and section titles la ion that is listed in VPG s MENU and or situation FEATURES 2 13 VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW The VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW allows users to acces and FILES windows are accompanied VPG OPEN FIL of directories and files displayed from the current directory based on a filter filename extension such as vpg The current directory is listed at the top of the LOOK IN drop down menu Changing the filter parameter in the File Type drop down menu sets the file type filter The FILE NAME window allows the user to enter the file name and directory manually s files and directories The DIRECTORIES E WINDOW is a convenient tool for viewing All files listed in the OPEN FILE window are Figure 2 13 1 Open File Window 2 13 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s 2 14 RECOMMENDED NAMING CONVENTION his lin bin etc The protocol for naming files during a VPG session includes attaching suffixes to the file names that specify the file types Examples of suffixes include suffix lin are listed in the options area The user then selects the appropriate file name This practice makes the file name 2 15 LS DYNA NASTRAN and RADIOSS CARDS eta VPG supports all LS DYNA inp
163. E Clear the display of nn ting nodes co ec CLEAR ELE ENT M Clear the display of connecting elements IDENTIFY NODE This function enables the use o identify r t any node UTILITY IDENDFIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES This function enables the user to calculate the distance between two nodes ANGLE BE EEN T NODES TW HREE This function enables the user to measure the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes COORDINATES ON OFF This function enables the user to turn on off coordinate systems 10 13 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY he functions of the PART CONTROL menu are intended for organizing line surface and element e A PART is et d or elements grouped under a PART ef d ric data that consists of no more than ined in a database Each part has a o an in Figu 10 3 PART CONTROL T data in a structur a s of lines surfaces an NAME The PART NAME is d ine as a label of alphanume eight characters Presently up to 1000 p be de tifi PI he func T arts may f unique Part Iden cation D T tions in the PAR CONTROL menu are rg ized as re 10 3 1 Figure10 3 1 Part Control Menu ed description of each function is given in the following sections 10 3 1 ADD ELEMENTS TO PART A detail Description This function allows the user to copy elements from one part to another part
164. E ON in the ELEMENT OPTIONS menu is on For further description see the command ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF in this section Note For one dimensional elements beams bars etc VPG displays the selected beam s property ID and allows the user to modify it and the beam s connectivity Usage ayed elements The displayed elements that are to be modified DO ENT part VPG will automatically identify t n LS DYNA mode MODIFY allows the u OFF function 1 VPG prompts to select option 6 57 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR If GEOMETRY is selected go to step 2 if TYPE is selected go to step 3 2 If GEOMETRY is selected VPG then prompts gt PICK ELEMENT TO MODIFY element VPG then guide user to select nodes to regenerate 3 If TYPE is selected user has following options to change element type l ACM3 link in database to mat 100 beam DI b RB SP to mat 100 SPOTWELD TO RBE2 changes all spot weld link in database to rbe2 elected spring in database to spot weld ess of selected shells 6 3 12 LI E MESH De select an element ACM3 TO MAT 100 SP changes al spot weld S TO MAT 100 SP changes all discrete beam link in database to mat 100 eam spot weld E2 TO SPRING changes selected RBE2 link in database to spring OTWELD TO MAT 100 SP changes selected spot weld link in database spot weld SPRING TO SPOTWELD changes
165. E PROCESSOR Usage VPG prompts gt SELECT METHOD TO CREATE NODE POINT IS DEFAULT 2 1 The user may now select node locations by elec enu 6 4 8 DELETE U Des By s ting EXIT the user will return to the NODE OPTIONS m NREF NODES cription This function allows the user to DELETE either ALL or SELECTED unreferenced es in a database Unreferenced nodes are labeled with asterisks nod U sage 1 VPG prompts gt DELETE ALL OR SELECT FREE NODES A S E L FREE NODES AL SELECT FREE NODE Th If a ssage D Deletes all unreferenced nodes e user may now select individual or grouped nodes ny of the selected nodes are referenced nodes VPG displays the message gt CANNOT DELETE NODE xxxx IT IS NOT UNREF Wh ill echo the following me en unreferenced nodes are deleted VPG w gt xxxx unreferenced nodes deleted 6 4 9 DISTANCE escription This function calculates the distance between two points two nodes or a node and point The calculated distance will be displayed in the Message area Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT FIRST NODE POINT FOR DISTANCE th 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT A NODE POINT FOR DISTANCE The overall distance and the global DX DY DZ components will be displayed at e prompt area of the screen 6 78 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR The user enters ABORT
166. EATE LOCAL COORDINATES ODE PT FOR ORIGIN user also has 2 On gt e selected surface s 1000 units alo g the W axis 3 VP nsform The user also has the option to RSE to repeat the rotation or movement Once the desired d enter DONE to continue on gt PICK N VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The the option to select the global coordinate system ce the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts OVE OR R M OTATE M R MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS i e 0 0 1000 This will transform th n ROTATE If ROTATE is entered enter angle increment right hand rule ab out the W axis The remaining commands are the same as the MOVE option BORT A User will now be prompted to select the surface to be transformed G prompts the user to select surfaces to tra select AGAIN or REVE surfaces are selecte 6 2 21 TRIM SURFACE Descripti This function defines curves for trimming edges and or cutting holes on the surface The defined curves may be poly lines b spline lines circles piecewise li secting lines of two surfaces Usage selected near segments or inter 1 VPG gt SEL gt P S t a line to trim surface C INE LINE After defining a line user needs to select line as trim line prompts for a surface ECT SURFACE FOR TRIM OPERATION 2 Upon selection of the surface VPG prompts LEASE SELECT OR DEFINE LINES ELECT LINE
167. ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 117 MAT_COMPOSITE_MATRIX 1 ELASTIC 118 MAT_COMPOSITE_DIRECT 1 ELASTIC 123 MAT_MODIFIED_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 36 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 124 MAT_PLASTICITY_COMPRESSION_TENSION 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 126 MAT_MODIFIED_HONEYCOMB 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 127 MAT_ARRUDA_BOYCE_RUBBER 42 HYPERELASTIC 128 MAT_HEART_TISSUE 1 ELASTIC 129 MAT_LUNG_TISSUE 1 ELASTIC 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC 19 ELASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC OTHER MATERIAL 1 ELASTIC 3 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET SPC INITIAL_VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_NODE INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION INITIAL VELOCITY LOAD_NODE_POINT CONCENTRATED LOAD Deleted when DOF is equal to 4 or 8 LOAD_NODE_SET CONCENTRATED LOAD Deleted when DOF is equal to 4 or 8 LOAD_SEGMENT PRESSURE LOAD LOAD_SEGMENT_SET PRESSURE LOAD LOAD_SHELL_ELEMENT PRESSURE LOAD LOAD_SHELL_SET PRESSURE LOAD BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION IMPOSED VELOCITY _NODE velocity BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION IMPOSED VELOCITY _RIGID velocity BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION IMPOSED VELOCITY _RIGID_LOCAL velocity BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION IMPOSED VELOCITY _SET velocity 3 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL Delete CONTACT_ENTITY CONTACT_INTERIOR CONTACT_1D CONTACT_2D_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE CONTACT_2D_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_2D_AUTOMATIC_NODE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_2D_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_IN_CONTINUUM
168. ERMAL_EXPANSION Description user ent ELETE Lists the cards in the option s databa Similar to the CREA them This function is used to occupy an arbitrary material model in LS DYNA with a xpansion property Usag thermal e e 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION ropriate figures and selects OK to exit ayed in a pop up LIST Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window ATE command this command lists the defined dow and allows the user to select and modify EXIT 6 10 3 NO D CREATE Definition card is shown The user enters the app DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displ window PRE PROCESSOR MODIFY Similar to the CRE cards in a pop up win them NLOCAL escription This function is used to define a NONLOCAL failure mode Usage PG prompts gt SELECT OPTION s shown The user enters the appropriate figures and selects OK to exit DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST op up window fined up window and allows the user to select and modify them 1 V CREATE Definition card i Lists the cards in the option s database via p MODIFY Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the de cards in a pop 6 147 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR EXIT 6 10 4 ASSIGN MATERIAL Descri
169. ESSING Figure 9 14 Create Line Control Option Window Usage SELECT BY CURSOR Select the location of the node a point will be created END PICK Click this button to create a line by a set of straight line segments between adjacent points in sequence The created line is clo a straight line segment between the first selected and ENCLOSE LINE sed by 9 20 eta VPG 3 2 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING the last selected poin REJECT LAST The last selected node i REJECT ALL All selected nodes are rejected XIT 9 8 2 DELETE LINE Description t s rejected E Exit the function This function enab ser to delete the selected line s 9 8 3 LABEL ARROW Description les the u LABEL allows the user to enter a title or text label at any location in the graphic display window ARROW allows draw arrows at any location in the display window The program displays a control w shown in Figure 9 15 Usage the user to indow as DISPLAY LABEL ARROW Controls the Label Arrow display in the graphic display window The default setting is toggled on ARROW This function enables the user to select two points by cursor to draw an arrow in the graphic display window The name of the This function allows the user to add a text label in the graphic display area Enter a string of characters in the field above the TEXT button then click a location on the screen The program will add the text l
170. EVERSE DIRECTION Descripti Once the desired line is selected Enter any part of the total count of points on the li T or DO on E e starting point to the end point of the line This funct to reverse the line direction Arrowheads on the line presented during SHOW are identifiable points and also indicate the line direction Usage ach line has a direction defined from th ion allows the user LINE SPLIT etc 1 VPG ts gt SELECT LINES tomatically reversed 6 1 17 S Description promp Once the line is selected the direction is au CALE FACTOR T user to scale the selected lines or points with respect to any axis globa magnification factors in the X Y or Z U V or W directions Entering a sca reater than 1 will magnify the line whereas a scale factor less than 1 will reduce the f the line Usage his function allows the l or local using le factor g length o TO SCALE 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINES gt SELECT LINES Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected 2 coordinate system to scale the lines and prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 Once the desired coordinate system is created it will be displayed on the screen and the user will be prompted to accept or decline the system If the user accepts then VPG VPG pr
171. GID BODY NODE FILTER IS OFF When this option is on rigid body node will be sh try to create rigid link ription This function helps to rotate model with a specified center When this option is l prompt user to select a rotation center on and user clicks the icon Free Rotation VPG wil 10 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY 10 2 ICON BAR he ICON BAR contains commonly used commands c tro T Database and Part on l Viewing manipulation The user initiates the commands via mouse pick A detailed description of each function is given in the following section 10 2 1 DATABASE AND PART CONTROL NEW FILE Allows the user to create a new database fi F a detailed descripti le or on see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER OPEN FILE Allows the user to open a database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER SAVE FILE Allows the user to save a database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER PRINT Allows the user to create a postscript file of display area and send the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized to accommodate the eta VPG software AULT menu SET Note The user can change the Printing Defaults in the UP HARDCOPY DEF PART ON OFF Allows the user to turn selected parts on or off The PART TURN ON OFF dialog window is ART ON OFF refer n displa
172. GMENT MESH Input Normal Angle between 1 30 degree and do segment mesh User can input new angle value and click this button many times 2 EGMENT MESH user can adjust region ADD TO REGION e target region select regions one by one and they are merged into one region click se to accept the merge and right mouse to cancel the merge e up a new region 3 User can select option for elements regenerate elements be meshed around the inner hole VPG automatically check the original elements size EMENT SIZE to enter this size for regenerated elements AP than this value will be merged during remesh IGNORE HOLE SIZE will be ignored during remesh PRE PROCESSOR after click S select elements and add them to th MERGE REGION middle mou right mouse again to exit merge region CREATE A REGION select elements to mak AUTO REPAIR VPG will repair elements during PAVE INNER HOLE Quadrangle elements will DELETE ORIGINAL ELEMENTS Original elements will be deleted if this option is on ORIGINAL SIZE NEW EL User needs BOUNDARY G Gaps less Holes less than this value MESH QUALITY 6 72 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Detailed quality set will be done in the pop up window 4 User now can remesh elements H 5 ts VPG prompt user whether to accept remesh results YES pt remesh results 6 3 29 SPEC
173. I 2 VPG prompts load magn NODE EXIT P es n If no FORCES or MOMENTS are applied at the selected grid VPG will isplay the message gt NO LOAD SPECIFIED AT SELEC This function displays the pressure loads and respective element numbers in the command area of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR PRESSURE LOAD CURSOR LOCATION EXIT If no pressure is applied at the selected element VPG will display the message gt NO PRESSURE DEFINED AT SELECTED ELEMENT and remain in the LIST PRESSURE option EXIT will exit the function LIST PRESSURE If the selected element has a pressure load VPG prompts gt PRESSURE LOAD AT EL xxxx xxxx xx LOAD STATIC LOAD MODIFY Description This function modifies the selected load set Usage 6 137 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts STATIC LOAD CARD LIST window Description gt SELECT CARD TO MODIFY Available load sets are displayed in the LOAD STATIC LOAD REMOVE FORCE This function removes nodal forces from selected grids in the current load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt REMOVE NODAL FORCE SELECT NODES The left mouse button may be used to remove selected nodal forces one at a time When a nodal force is removed the node is highlighted by a small circle If a
174. IAL ELEMENT KEYWORD Descripti RE MES Remesh elements starts After remesh elemen Acce NO give up remesh results and return to remesh window on This function defines some element keyword cards Usage 1 CREATE This function creates a card DELETE This function deletes already created cards LIST This function lists already created cards in pop up window MODIFY Allows user to modify already created cards 2 when CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION VPG prompts select an option different cards appear refer to LS DYNA manual for further description 6 4 NODE OPTIONS Th VP ced node connected to elements The second type the unreferenced node not connected to any element is represented with an asterisk Useful applications in this section include moving nodes node to node or node to point checking for and merging common or coincident nodes and transforming or rotating nodes e functions in the NODE OPTIONS menu relate to the two types of nodes that are defined in the G program The first type is the referen 6 73 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR A d etailed description of each function is given in the following section 6 4 1 ALIGN NODES Description This function allows users to align the selected nodes along the selected lines Usage 2 6 4 Desc 1 VPG prompts gt
175. INE The line will split at the locat 6 14 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R sel cted line e POINT he line will split at the selected point closest to the selected line REJEC ABOR nction 4 VPG prompts LOCAL COORDINATES s the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how ate a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 5 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 6 If the user accepts the coordinate system VPG prompts gt DISTANCE FROM PLANE W Users may now input a distance along the W axis from origin of the selected Any real value is a valid response gt PICK LINE TO SPLIT The line will be split by UV offset plane REJECT LAST ONE EXIT ABORT will exit this function 6 1 21 TRANSFORM Descripti T T LAST T will exit this fu gt CREATE gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompt to cre coordinate system 7 VPG prompts ABORT LINE D PRE PROCESSOR on This function allows the user to translate or rotate the selected lines or points to a new loca n Usage tio 1 VPG prompts If LCS is selected go to step 2 if POINT TO POINT is selected go to step 6 prompts OCAL COORDINATES FOR ORIGIN 3 2 VPG gt CREATE L gt PICK NODE PT VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system l
176. ING This function will toggle on off mouse tracking 9 10 18 APPLY MODEL CONFIGURATION Description Con hen start eta pos figurations will be written into configure file and set as default parameters w t next time if this option is on 9 45 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 11 POST PROCESS The functions in the POST PROCESS menu allow the user to graphically display and manipulate analysis results There are 4 functions shown in the post processing tool bar as shown in Figure 9 48 Figure 9 48 Post process functional icons Once a function in the tool bar is selected the POST PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW appears Each function allows the user to graphically display and manipulate a specific result for stamping simulation The user selects the desired PLOT STATE TIME STEPS FRAME RANGE and COMPONENTS to plot or animate the result Note To load LS DYNA result files and to activate the post process menu see FILE OPEN in Chapter 3 FILE MANAGER Note The user will not have access to have the control window when other control option windows are active A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections UND This function shows the undeformed status of the model EFORM DEFORM The functions in this menu animate the displacement of the model in real time and display displacement of an indi p The options are shown in Figure 9 49 9 11 1 D SHOW
177. INPUT FILE Description ANALYSIS st have LS DY n execution window will be open fect the operation of VPG The WRITE INPUT FILE option allows the user to write an LS DYNA input file to be executed at a later time outside of VPG If the user wishes to automatically execute the s ld be selected prior to selecting the OK button imulation from within VPG the RUN ANALYSIS option shou 8 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Chapter POST PROCESSING Chapter 9 Post Pro The POST function in VPG is a general post processor for all ETA software including FO the user s T from the main menu The POS le quickly post processes result data of finite element analyses including the real time animation of stresses strain energy displacements and time history curves Its fully dynamic allocation of memory optimizes system resources allowing for unlimited model sizes 9 cessing 9 1 INTRODUCTION DYNA RM VPG and FEMB POST is an independent application module that is started when elects POS T modu 9 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 2 GENERAL OVERVIEW The POST application interface varies slightly from the preprocessing user interface It allows the user to quickly access most functions at any time during the session The icon bar and menu bar functions behave in the same manner as the preprocessing functions eta dis Post breaks
178. ION 70 CHAR MAX Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 14 CREATE ELEMENT D List of all sets A gt SET X IS SELECTED escription This function allows the user to generate sets with unique element ID numbers The elements may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 The ELEMENT TYPE SELECTION window pops up as following 2 After the user selects element set type VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW ELEMENT SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid gt ELEMENT SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 3 After the user enters an element set ID number VPG prompts If the user enters an element set ID number already assigned VPG returns the prompt gt SELECT ELEMENTS Select elements by the following methods 6 113 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R The user may press the left mouse button or type C to select the element nearest to the cursor If the user selects the same element twice while creating a set VPG returns the xx ALREADY PICKED eletes the set and forwards the user to the ion prompt gt ELEMENT xx PRE PROCESSOR If the user selects DONE VPG saves the set and prompts gt X ELEMENTS INCLUDED IN ELEMENT SET X If the user selects ABORT VPG d ELEMENT SET submenu Note Users may not assign the same ID numbers to both node sets and element sets 6 7 15 CURRENT
179. IOSS IF A RADIOSS 0 0 THEN K DYNA 1 0 C2 DYNA B RADIOSS A RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS IF H 1 N1 gt 0 K DYNA K RADIOSS A RADIOSS 1 0 IS ASSUMED C2 DYNA B RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS CONVERT RADIOSS SPRING INTO DYNA BEAM IN ALL CASES IF THE LENGTH OF SPRING IS FINITE SET SCOOR IN SECTION_BEAM TO 2 IF THE LENGTH IS VERY SMALL lt 0 000001 OR ZERO SET SCOOR TO 0 2 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 0 VOID 1 MAT_ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 1 MAT_ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 3 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRODYNAMIC 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 4 JOHNSON_COOK 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 6 HYDRODYNAMIC_VISCOUS 9 MAT_NULL 10 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_FOAM 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC 19 ELASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC 21 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM There is no direct conversion of RADIOSS mat 21 to MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM An example input for a mat57 seat foam is attached UNITS kg mm ms GPa MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM seat foam 571258 8200E 08 0 0045 2222 0 4 0 0 0 0 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DEFINE_CURVE 2222 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0625 0 119800001 0 122500002 0 383390009 0 177499995 0 377400011 0 234999999 0 413399994 0 280699998 0 444999993 0 344999999 0 466100007 0 397000015 0 497999996
180. IOSS 4 4 fixed format VPG contains options when reading RADIOSS input and output files These options relate to the translation of rigid bodies to VPG and the loading of model information RADIOSS requires two files to be loaded one is the RADIOSS output file out which contains the rigid body information The second is the RADIOSS input file D00 which contains model information If the user has both files he should click YES at the first prompt to read both the RADIOSS output and input files If the user has only the RADIOSS input file the user should select NO Begin with reading the RADIOSS output file out This loads the rigid body information VPG will prompt gt ADJUST RIGID BODY PRIMARY NODES FROM RADIOSS r can then load the RADIOSS input file D00 If NO is selected VPG will prompt gt ADJUST RIGID BODY PRIMARY NODES BY VPG Y N will locate the RIGID bodies and recalculate the rigid body primary node NO will finish the input sequence without modifying the model information ials and element properties for elements that are lost during ed to the part DEFAU_ VPG creates a node set element 5 7 This functi a the ons are 5 7 1 10 DAMS Section J of th tion of converting ADAMS models to VPG Please ref to ADAMS suspension 5 8 EXP This function allow ar to the options menti d 1 OUTPUT Y N If YES is selected the RIGID BODY information will be loaded with the output file
181. IX C C 26 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 12 1 ELEMENT RADIOSS V4 4 gt NASTRAN BEAM CBAR JOINT RBE2 MASS CONM2 QUAD SHELL RBODY RBE2 RIVET RBAR RLINK RBE2 SHELL SHELL SHEL16 SOLID SOLID SOLID SPRING CELAS1 The third node is converted into an LCS TRUSS CROD XELEM RBE2 12 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete TYPE0 VOID TYPE5 RIVET TYPE28 NSTRAND property RADIOSS V4 4 gt NASTRAN 1 SHELL PSHELL 2 TRUSS PROD 3 BEAM PBAR 4 SPRING PELAS 6 ORTHOTROPIC SOLID PSOLID 8 GENERAL SPRING PELAS 9 ORTHOTROPIC SHELL PSHELL 10 COMP SHELL PSHELL 11 COMP SHELL PSHELL 12 3 NODES SPRING PELAS 13 BEAM TYPE SPRING PELAS 14 GENERAL SOLID PSOLID 32 PRETENSIONNER SPRING PELAS 33 JOINT TYPE SPRING PELAS 35 AIRBAG STITCH SPRING PELAS 36 PREDIT SPRING PELAS 12 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All materials MAT1 12 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION VPG deletes PRESSURE LOAD RADIOSS V4 4 gt NASTRAN BCS SPC CLOAD NODE FORCE INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY 12 5 OTHERS VPG deletes all other cards that can t be converted RADIOSS V4 4 gt NASTRAN APPENDIX C C 27 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C FUNCTION LOAD CURVE FRAME LOCAL COORDINATE 13 CONVERTING FROM NASTRAN TO RADIOSS 13 1 ELEMENT Delete RBE3 CGAP element NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 4 CBAR BEAM RBE2 RBODY SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID CELAS2 SPRING Create a node for spring direction
182. K The WRITE INPUT FILE toggle writes an input file without submitting an analysis vide access to the necessa bottom of the window RU t w Figure 8 2 Analysis Submission Menu The DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS button displays a window see Figure 8 3 allowing the user to set the analysis unit for the job the input file name the analysis title the engineer s identification the project name and the parts to be included NTROL CARDS LS DYNA Description 8 2 1 CO Control Cards define simulation control parameters for various entities in the m rs are initially defined using the LS DYNA default values The rameters to acceptable values All the Desc odel The values of these paramete user may modify any of these pa Control Cards defined in LS DYNA version 971 are accessible through this menu The use of Control Card Menu is described in Section 6 14 4 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU 8 2 2 DATABASE CARDS ription LS DYNA models may produce various results data used for the study of the simulation and to assess the quality of the analysis VPG allows users to define both the ASCII and BINARY databases that may be output from LS DYNA This is described in Section 6 14 6 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU of this manual 8 2 3 GRAVITY LOAD 8 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION ANALYSIS Description By selecting the GRAVITY LOAD option VPG will automatically create a GRAVITY card with the appropriate
183. K VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER AGAIN S 3 ele select an element from the front um d a rigid road surface will be positioned in e d ts and velocities will also be defined in the model ct CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and b ODB an per part as target position The th esired locations Proper contac Figure 7 An Example of a Generated ECE 94 40 Front ODB Model 7 4 6 2 E E Descripti C 33 34 REAR IMPACT on d walls that are used to simulate an ECE 33 34 Rear Im Usage This function will create and position rigi pact test s gt ENTER REAR IMPACT INFORMATION 1 VPG prompt 7 47 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE REAR BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position The rear rigid wall and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model VPG MODULES Figure 8 An Example of a Generated ECE33 34 Rear Impact Model 7 4 6 3 ECE 95 EURO SIDE IMPACT Description This simulate an Usa function will generate a Moving Deformable Barrier and a rigid road surface to ECE95 Side Impact ge 1 gt ENTER ECE95 SIDE IMPACT INFORMATION VPG prompts 7 48 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S ICLE CLEARANCE 2 VPG prompt
184. L VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST AL ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 4 gt me IS SELECTED R MID number FOR MATERIAL name MATERI 3 If the user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each material The following prompt will be repeated for each material in the database gt ENTER MID number FOR MAT name OR E TO EXIT If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values If the user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEM C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATERIAL After the user selects the material VPG prompts for a new ID MATERIAL na gt ENTE 6 155 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 12 ELEMENT PROPERTY The in the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu are designed to define and modify the element roperti definit shown The fu functions p es physical in the database When using these commands parts with property ion are displayed according to their property colors Parts without property definition are in white nctions in the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu are organized as follows By toggling the solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP cific However the element pro s will change slightly between NASTRAN and LS DYNA analysis For example NASTRAN refers to element properties where LS DYNA refers to element sections The user ma gn and create properties at the beginning or at the end of a VPG ses
185. LASTIC 27 MAT_MOONEY RIVLIN_RUBBER 1 ELASTIC 28 MAT_RESULTANT_PLASTICITY 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 29 MAT_FORCE_LIMITED 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 30 MAT_CLOSED_FORM_SHELL _PLASTICITY 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 31 MAT_FRAZER_NASH_RUBBER_MODEL 1 ELASTIC 32 MAT_LAMINATED_GLASS 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 33 MAT_BARLAT_ANISOTROPIC_PLASTICITY 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 33 2 MAT_BARLAT_YLD96 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 34 MAT_FABRIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 35 MAT_PLASTIC_GREEN NAGHDI_RATE 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 36 MAT_3 PARAMETER_BARLAT 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 37 MAT_TRANSVERSELY_ANISOTROPIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC _ELASTIC_PLASTIC 38 MAT_BLATZ KO_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC 39 MAT_FLD_TRANSVERSELY_ANISOTROPIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 40 MAT_NONLINEAR_ORTHOTROPIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 41 MAT_USER_DEFINED_MATERIAL_MODELS 1 ELASTIC 51 MAT_BAMMAN 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 52 MAT_BAMMAN_DAMAGE 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 53 MAT_CLOSED_CELL_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC 54 MAT_ENHANCED_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC 58 MAT_LAMINATED_COMPOSITE_FABRIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_FAILURE_SHELL_MODEL 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_FAILURE_SOLID_MODEL 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 60 MAT_ELASTIC_WITH_VISCOSITY 1 ELASTIC 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_VISCOELASTIC 34 VISCOELASTIC 62 MAT_VISCOUS_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_FOAM 10 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 64 MAT_RATE_SENSITIVE_POWERLAW 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC _PLASTICITY 65 MAT_M
186. LASTIC_FAILURE 2 PLAS_JOHNS 14 MAT_SOIL_AND_FOAM_FAILURE 33 FOAM_PLAS 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 4 HYD_JCOOK 16 MAT_PSEUDO_TENSOR 24 CONC 17 MAT_ORIENTED_CRACK 2 PLAS_JOHNS 18 MAT_POWER_LAW_PLASTICITY 2 PLAS_JOHNS 19 MAT_STRAIN_RATE_DEPENDENT_PLASTICITY 2 PLAS_JOHNS 20 MAT_RIGID 1 ELAST 21 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_THERMAL 14 COMPSO 22 MAT_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE 14 COMPSO 23 MAT_TEMPERATURE_DEPENDENT_ORTHOTROPIC 14 COMPSO 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 36 PLAS_TAB 25 MAT_GEOLOGICAL_CAP_MODEL 24 CONC 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB 2 PLAS_JOHNS 27 MAT_MOONEY RIVLIN_RUBBER 1 ELAST 28 MAT_RESULTANT_PLASTICITY 2 PLAS_JOHNS 29 MAT_FORCE_LIMITED 2 PLAS_JOHNS 30 MAT_CLOSED_FORM_SHELL_PLASTICITY 2 PLAS_JOHNS 31 MAT_FRAZER_NASH_RUBBER_MODEL 1 ELAST 32 MAT_LAMINATED_GLASS 2 PLAS_JOHNS 33 MAT_BARLAT_ANISOTROPIC_PLASTICITY 2 PLAS_JOHNS 33 MAT_BARLAT_YLD96 2 PLAS_JOHNS 34 MAT_FABRIC 14 COMPSO 35 MAT_PLASTIC_GREEN NAGHDI_RATE 2 PLAS_JOHNS 36 MAT_3 PARAMETER_BARLAT 2 PLAS_JOHNS 37 MAT_TRANSVERSELY_ANISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 PLAS_JOHNS 38 MAT_BLATZ KO_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 39 MAT_FLD_TRANSVERSELY_ANISOTROPIC 2 PLAS_JOHNS 40 MAT_NONLINEAR_ORTHOTROPIC 14 COMPSO 41 MAT_USER_DEFINED_MATERIAL_MODELS 1 ELAST 51 MAT_BAMMAN 2 PLAS_JOHNS 52 MAT_BAMMAN_DAMAGE 2 PLAS_JOHNS 53 MAT_CLOSED_CELL_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 54 MAT_ENHANCED_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE 14 COMPSO 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM 33 FOAM_PLAS 58 MAT_LAMINATED_COMPOSITE_FA
187. LL VIEW lists the new view g view number The program allows the user to save up s the four views that are predefined a total of 10 views al number of views allowed the prompt at the bottom of VERWRITE 5 to 10 a view to overwrite and repeat step 1 The user enters a title and its correspondin to six new views plu 2 If the user exceeds the tot the screen will read gt SELECT VIEW TO O The user may select 10 1 7 VIEWPORTS ON OFF Description This fu tion allows the user to view an object using the f nc our predefined views n available in the split scree display mode UTILITY Usage sponds to the default view 2 esponds to the TOP VIEW X Y PLANE and the SIDE VIEW X Z PLANE and 4 X ZPLANE the the user executes the cale itself to fill the split screen The user selects one of the following views 1 corre corr corresponds to the TOP VIEW X YPLANE the SIDE VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW and the REAR VIEW Y Z PLANE Once above option the displayed model will automatically res display 10 1 8 SCREEN AXES ROTATION Description This function allows the user to rotate an object in fixed the display area according to at all times and are defined ht of the terminal screen axis is the direction from the bottom to the top of the terminal screen the ire user an angle specified via the keyboard The screen axes are as follows 1 Screen X axis is the direction from the left to rig
188. LOCITY GLOBAL Z ACCELERATION LOCAL C ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL X ROT ACCELERATION LOCAL A ACCELERATION GLOBAL Y ROT AC DVECTOR ROW_1 A LOCAL A ROT ACCELERATION DVECTOR ROW_1 B LOCAL B ROT ACCELERATION DVECTOR ROW_1 C LOCAL C ROT ACCELERATION E The user can plot the resultant interface data from the rcforc file The following t FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE MASS ORCES RWFORC D ypes are available X WALL F escription The user can plot the rigid wall time history data from the rwforc file The following types are available 9 64 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING NORMAL FORCE X FORCE POST PROCESSING Y FORCE Z FORCE SEATBELT OUTPUT SBTOUT Des cription The user can plot the seatbelt output data from the sbtout file The following pes are available t SEATBELT OR CROSS D y SLIPRING RETRACT SECTION FORCE SECFORC escription The user can plot the cross section time history data from the secforc file The llowing types are available f X FORCE X MOMENT Y FORCE Y MOMENT Z FORCE Z MOMENT X CENTROID TOTAL FORCE Y CENTROID TOTAL MOMENT Z CENTROID AREA SLIDING INTERFACE ENERGY SLEOUT Description o The user can plot the interface energy data from the sleout file The following types are available GY SPC REACTION FORCES SPCFORC TOTAL SLAVE SIDE TOTAL MASTER SILE TOTAL ENER Description The user can plo follow
189. MASS Desc 7 2 1 ription This option allows the user to define sprung mass 7 2 12 7 G VALUE UNSPRUNG MASS Description This option allows the user to define unsprung mass 7 2 13 FIX STF_PART INERTIA Description This function removes inertia of selected parts from suspension model Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT OPTION gt 7 24 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S AUTOMATIC All parts inertia in suspension model are removed SELECT FROM LIST oved EXIT tion without removing inertia De A part list pops up then inertia of selected part will be rem Exit this func 7 2 14 WRITE STF_FILE scription This function exports suspension models in the STF file format Usage 1 VPG prompts BASE FILE NAME VPG MODULES gt ENTER DATA Enterin g file name and click OK STF_FILE is exported 7 25 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 3 TIRE MENU The tire model is one of the most important components in a VPG vehicle system analysis Although modern pneumatic tires have very complex structures the VPG tire model concentrates only on the most important global mechanical properties of the tire These properties ensure the proper transfer of forces and displacements from the tire road contact interface to the vehicle chassis suspension and body structure A key advantage of this tire model is its simplici
190. MATICALLY Y N YES NO If NO is selected VPG prompts gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO 6 5 24 ENHANCE MESH Description The ENHANCE MESH function allows the user to correct modeling errors by evaluating and repairing several quality parameters simultaneously The ENHANCE MESH function may be applied to complete models parts or selected elements The mesh quality parameters that can be repaired automatically using ENHANCE MESH are Element size Warp Tape Aspect Ratio Interior Angles Jaco The user may specify the criteria that will be used to evaluate the model and will subsequently be used to attem The ENHANC parameters as pos ntrolled by the TOLERANCE value and the number of iterations used to attempt to improve the mesh quality is the ITERATIONS parameter When the E on is executed VPG will display a number at each element cen that have failed for that element For instance a value of 1 2 4 d int By selecting the FIXED BOUNDARY option the outer boundaries of the model will not be modified du esh repair operations Usage age r bian pt to improve the mesh quality E MESH function uses an iterative approach to satisfy as many of the mesh quality sible The convergence is co N ESH functi troid identifying the parameter s HANCE M isplayed at the element would indicate that the element has failed the warpage taper and erior angle criteria ring th
191. Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR SHOW SET EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 6 1 ANNOTATE SET ON OFF PART VIEW Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part 2 gt SET X IS SELECTED ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 6 2 CREATE Description 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST EXIT After selecting a set VPG prompts gt This function allows the user to generate sets with unique ID numbers The respective element node part may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 VPG prompts R E TO EXIT If the user enters a set ID number already assigned VPG returns the prompt gt type SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 2 VPG prompts lement node part The user may press the left most mouse button or N to select the element If the user selects the same element node part twice while creating a the set VPG returns the prompt gt type xxxx ALREADY PICKED If the user selects DONE EXIT VPG saves the set and prompts ED IN type SET X If the user selects ABORT VPG deletes the node set and returns the user to the submenu 6 6 UR Des on gt ENTER NEW type SET NUMBER X O Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid
192. NERGY INT data type depends on the data file Select a en to load the desired database to the Post Processor There are many different kinds of result files from LS DYNA analysis that can be read in and the numbers of files which are depend on the type of analysis and the setting in preprocessor are not the same every time Moreover the user can load several files in the current database though repeating the operation above The Graph control windows will pop up as Figure 9 69 The number of List Boxes is not the same every time and depends on the result file type The detailed description about those functions is given in the following section file for the Select File dialog box and click Op Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 2 RESULT FILE LIST BOX Description The Result File list box displays the name of result files that have been loaded in the current database The user can select the desired name listing in the result file list box and from which to retrieve the intend data 9 12 3 TYPE LIST BOX Description The items list the Type list box depends upon the result file selected on the Result file list box and only the a ypes will be displayed and the list box i nding upon the project For example in LIST BOX ctual contained data t tem may change depe Figure 9 67 there are two types N A and Wall 1 9 12 4 COMPONENT Description The items list on Component box are not only depends upon the selected file type on Resul
193. NNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE WRITE TO FILE n This function allows the user to output all mass information to a file Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes all mass information to the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU 6 192 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE xml ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N YES Overwrite the file with new data NO Exit and do nothing 6 16 3 CREATE MASS Description This function allows the user add a new mass element to the database Usage 1 VPG prompts TER LUMPED MASS VALUE mass value that the user wants to create To create a mass element the user may select a node point or keyboard entry EXIT or ABORT will exit this function 6 16 4 MO Descriptio gt EN Enter a 2 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT DIFY MASS n T e mass value and position The functions in this menu are organized as follows he functions of this menu allow the user change th Usage User should select a mass element for modification ew value for the selected mass element The value of the selected mass will be replaced with the new input value and VPG returns the user to the MODIFY MASS OPTION menu C V
194. NODE SET cription This func n defines nodal constraint set tio s for translation motion in global coordinates Refer to section 6 3 4 for more details CON Description STRAINT CARDS RIGID BODIES This function merges two rigid bodies One rigid body the s e other one called the master rigid body lave rigid body is merged to th Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA 6 127 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR User s CONSTRAINT CARDS RIGID BODY STOPPERS Description Manual for further description This function defines constrained rigid body stoppers Usage When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA rther description CONSTR Desc ption 1 User s Manual for fu AINT CARDS RIVET ri This function defines constrained rivets Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS SHELL TO SOLID Description This function defines a tie between a shell edge and solid elements Nodal rigid bodies can perform the same function and may also be used Usage When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA rther description CONSTRAINT CARDS SPLINE Descriptio 1 User s Manual for fu n This function defines an elastic cubic sp
195. NODF The user can plot the nodal force data from the nodfor file D NODAL POINT DATA NODOUT escription The user can p ble lot the nodal point data from the nodout file The following types are availa ELOCITY X DISPLACEMENT Y DISPLACEMENT Z DISPLACEMENT X V Y VELOCITY 9 63 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Z VELOCITY X ACCELERATION Y ACCELERATION Z ACCELERATION POST PROCESSING RIG D ID BODY DATA RBDOUT escription The user can plot the rigid body time history data from the rbdout file The llowing types are available fo LOBAL X COORDINATE DVECTOR ROW_2 A GLOBAL Y DISPLACEMENT DVECTOR ROW_3 B GLOBAL Z DISPLACEMENT DVECTOR ROW_3 C L Z ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL C DISPLACEMENT Z VELOCITY LOCAL C ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL B VELOCITY GLOBAL Z ROT VELOCITY LOCAL C VELOCITY LOCAL A ROT VELOCITY CELERATION LOCAL B ACCELERATION GLOBAL Z ROT ACCELERATION LOCAL C ACCELERATION R SULT INTERFACE FORCES RCFORC Description G GLOBAL Y COORDINATE DVECTOR ROW_2 B LOBAL Z COORDINATE DVECTOR ROW_2 C G GLOBAL X DISPLACEMENT DVECTOR ROW_3 A GLOBAL X ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL A DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Y ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL B DISPLACEMENT GLOBA GLOBAL X VELOCITY LOCAL A ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Y VELOCITY LOCAL B ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL GLOBAL X ROT VELOCITY LOCAL A VELOCITY GLOBAL Y ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL X ACCELERATION GLOBAL Y ACCELERATION LOCAL B ROT VE
196. ODIFIED_ZERILLI _ARMSTRONG 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 66 MAT_LINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELASTIC 67 MAT_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELASTIC 68 MAT_NONLINEAR_PLASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 69 MAT_SID_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELASTIC 70 MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_DAMPER 1 ELASTIC _DISCRETE_BEAM 71 MAT_CABLE_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELASTIC 72 MAT_CONCRETE_DAMAGE 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 73 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC APPENDIX C C 8 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 74 MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELASTIC 75 MAT_BILKHU DUBOIS_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 35 VISCOELASTIC 77 MAT_HYPERELASTIC_RUBBER 42 HYPERELASTIC 77 MAT_OGDEN_RUBBER 42 HYPERELASTIC 78 MAT_SOIL_CONCRETE 10 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 79 MAT_HYSTERETIC_SOIL 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 80 MAT_RAMBERG_OSGOOD 1 ELASTIC 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 83 MAT_FU_CHANG_FOAM 33 VISCOPLASTIC 86 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_VISCOELASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 87 MAT_CELLULAR_RUBBER 1 ELASTIC 88 MAT_MTS 1 ELASTIC 89 MAT_PLASTICITY_POLYMER 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 90 MAT_ACOUSTIC 1 ELASTIC 94 MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELASTIC 96 MAT_BRITTLE_DAMAGE 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 100 MAT_SPOTWELD 1 ELASTIC 103 MAT_ANISOTROPIC_VISCOPLASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 104 MAT_DAMAGE_1 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 105 MAT_DAMAGE_2 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 116 MAT_COMPOSITE_LAYUP 14
197. OLUMES MONITORED VOLUMES AIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIRBAG_MODEL APPENDIX C C 6 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C REPLACES THE ORIGINAL MATERIAL WITH MAT_FABRIC 2 7 SEATBELT CONVERTS RADIOSS S MATERIAL TYPE 1 WITH VERY SMALL YOUNG S MODULUS INTO DYNA S MAT_FABRIC 2 8 OTHERS Delete TRUSS SET MAT SET PROP SET Delete ACCELEROMETER MONITORED VOLUME SECTIONS SENSOR CONTROL CARDS RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 FUNCTION DEFINE_CURVE SKEW moving DEFINE_COORDINATE_NODES SKEW fixed DEFINE_COORDINATE_VECTOR 3 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO RADIOSS 3 1 ELEMENT Delete INERTIA elements DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 BEAM BEAM SOLID SOLID SHELL SHELL T SHELL SOLID DISCRETE SPRING VID is converted into the third node MASS MASS JOINT JOINT CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY RIGID BODY CONSTRAINED_NODE_SET RIGID BODY CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD SPOTWELD SEATBELT BEAM 3 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete SPH section Convert spring stiffness into RADIOSS element property DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 SECTION_BEAM integrated 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM discrete 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM truss 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM spotweld 3 BEAM SECTION_DISCRETE 4 SPRING SECTION_SHELL 1 SHELL SECTION_SHELL_ALE 1 SHELL SECTION_SOLID 14 GENERAL SOLID SECTION_SOLID_ALE 14 GENERAL SOLID SECTION_TSHELL 14 GENERAL SOLID SECTION_SEATBELT 3 BEAM 3 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY DYNA V970 gt RA
198. ONLY_PENALTY TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SPOTWELD TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SPOTWELD_WITH_TORSION TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_THERMAL TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_INTERFERENCE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIEBREAK_NODES_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID APPENDIX C C 23 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C CONTACT_TIEBREAK_NODES_ONLY TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIEBREAK_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_NODES_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_NODES_TO_SURFACE_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_NODES_TO_SURFACE_CONSTRAINED_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE_BEAM_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE_CONSTRAINED_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_CONSTRAINED_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_FAILURE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID RIGIDWALL RWALL 9 6 OTHERS Delete all other cards that can t be converted to RADIOSS DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 DEFINE_COORDINATE FRAME DEFINE_CURVE FUNCTION 10 CONVERTING FROM NASTRAN TO DYNA 10 1 ELEMENT When some RBE2 share the common node merge them into one RBE2 Delete CGAP elements N
199. ON_DISCRETE PELAS SECTION_SHELL PSHELL SECTION_SOLID PSOLID SECTION_SOLID_ALE PSOLID SECTION_TSHELL PSOLID 5 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All materials MAT1 5 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET SPC INITIAL_VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_NODE INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION INITIAL VELOCITY LOAD_NODE_POINT NODAL FORCE LOAD_NODE_SET NODAL FORCE LOAD_SHELL_ELEMENT SHELL PRESSURE LOAD_SHELL_SET SHELL PRESSURE APPENDIX C C 12 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 5 5 OTHERS General Comments Convert NODE SET ELEMENT SET Delete all other cards that can t be converted DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN DEFINE_COORDINATE_NODES LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_VECTOR LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_CURVE LOAD CURVE 6 CONVERTING FROM RADIOSS TO NASTRAN 6 1 ELEMENT RADIOSS V4 1 gt NASTRAN BEAM CBAR TRUSS CROD SOLID SOLID SHELL SHELL SPRING ELAS1 3rd node is converted to a LCS in NASTRAN MASS CONM2 JOINT RBE2 RIGID BODY RBE2 SPOTWELD RBAR 6 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY General Comments Delete VOID RIVET properties RADIOSS V4 1 gt NASTRAN 1 SHELL PSHELL 2 TRUSS PROD 3 BEAM PBAR 4 SPRING PELAS 6 ORTHOTROPIC SOLID PSOLID 8 GENERAL SPRING PELAS 9 ORTHOTROPIC SHELL PSHELL 10 COMP SHELL PSHELL 11 COMP SHELL PSHELL 12 3 NODES SPRING PELAS 13 BEAM TYPE
200. OP and EXPORT are active as seen in Figure 9 54 Figure 9 54 Play Status PAUSE Pause the animation In this mode the four other functions are enabled to use shown as Figure 9 55 Figure 9 55 Pause Status FIRST FRAME display the first frame PREVIOUS FRAME display the previous frame NEXT FRAME display the next frame LAST FRAME display the end frame 9 48 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING STOP Stops the ation anim WRITE AVI AND E3D This f file t animation An AVI file is a Micro es for anima he file for tru Eta Po s only To ou During Animation click the WRITE AVI icon dow for the user to choose a name and of the file SAVE button in the WRITE FILE window eta Post displays the SELECT COMPRESSION FORMAT for the user to select the compression type and quality Once the compression type and quality are determined OK accepts and creates the file FRAME NUMBER After pause the animation this function allows the user to drag the slider to the desired will be plotted automatically n the frame number is changed automatically according with the animation FRAMES SECOND This function allows user to adjust the speed at which the animation is running by altering the number of frames per second The number of frames is dragged to the desired position To reduce the animation speed the user must select a value lower frame rate Once the frame rate is selected
201. OPTION FOR SPLIT ELEMENT 2 QUADS splits a QUAD4 into two QUAD4s 4 QUADS splits a QUAD4 into four QUAD4s 2 TRIAS splits a QUAD4 into two TRIAs TRIA 2 TRIAS splits TRIA3 into two TRIA3s LOCATION defines locators for splitting elements veral 1 a TRIA QUAD COMBINE splits a QUAD into a QUAD and a TRIA TRIA 4 TRIAS splits a TRIA into four TRIAs ARBITRARY SOLID TO 8 SOLIDS splits a SOLID into 8 SOLIDs 1 DIMENSION ELEMENT splits a 1 dimension element to se dimension elements ALONG LINE split shell elements by line 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT TO SPLIT Reverses the split direction This option does not apply to group operations 6 3 16 SURF H De REVERSE OPERATION ACE MES scription This function allows the user to automatically mesh surface data VPG automeshes using 2D elements plate elements Supported surface types are covered in Pre 6 60 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Processor Section 2 2 of this manual The user has the option of automeshing by selecting o e multiple surfaces or all of the displayed surfaces DISPL lows the user to automesh all surfaces at once To model one surface at a time default the user selects an individual surface with the cursor and selects DONE Usage ne surfac AYED SURFACES al 1 VP ace mesh methods Surface mesh meth
202. OSS TO DYNA 2 1 ELEMENT RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 BEAM BEAM TRUSS BEAM SOLID SOLID SHELL SHELL SPRING BEAM MASS MASS JOINT If number of node is equal 4 we will convert it into 2 CONSTRAINED_NODAL_ RIGID_BODY and 1 CONSTRAINED_JOINT_ CYLINDRICAL Otherwise we will convert it into 1 CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY RIGID BODY CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY Doesn t have mass and inertia CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA Including mass and inertia The RADIOSS primary node number RBID be used as the parameter NODEID on card 2 of CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA SPOTWELD CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD 2 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete VOID RIVET property Convert spring stiffness into DYNA material RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 1 SHELL SECTION_SHELL 2 TRUSS SECTION_BEAM truss 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant 4 SPRING SECTION_BEAM discrete 6 ORTHOTROPIC SOLID SECTION_SOLID 8 GENERAL SPRING SECTION_BEAM discrete 9 ORTHOTROPIC SHELL SECTION_SHELL 10 COMP SHELL SECTION_SHELL 11 COMP SHELL SECTION_SHELL 12 3 NODES SPRING SECTION_BEAM discrete APPENDIX C C 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 13 BEAM TYPE SPRING SECTION_BEAM discrete 14 GENERAL SOLID SECTION_SOLID CONVERTS RADIOSS SPRING PROPERTY TYPE 4 8 12 13 INTO DYNA s MATERIAL 196 IF H 0 N1 0 LINEAR ELASTIC SPRING K DYNA K RADIOSS D DYNA C RADIOSS IF H 0 N1 gt 0 NONLINEAR ELASTIC SPRING K DYNA A RAD
203. OT EXIST OK TO CONTINUE Y N YES will prompt step 3 NO will exit this function 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NEW S E ID Once the user selects the S E nodes DONE terminates this function VPG displays the new S E ID numbers on the screen above the appropriate 6 15 4 IDENTIFY NODE POINT Description nodes This function identifies any point node and its corresponding global location within the X Y Z coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS If the user selects s the numbers of the nodes at their node locations and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu If the user selects KEY IN NODE NUMBER VPG displays the corresponding node and echoes the following message on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz If the user selects NODE VPG displays the number of the node nearest to the cursor and echoes the following message on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz If the user selects POINT VPG displays the number of the point that is nearest to the cursor and echoes the following message on the command line gt POINT xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z z zzz EXIT returns the user to the SUPERELEMENT OPTIONS menu 6 1 Description ALL NODES VPG display 5 5 IDENTIFY S E ID This function allows the user to identify the SUPERELEMENT I D number of a selected node s 6 190 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t
204. OUTBOARD UPPER ANCHOR 5 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON INBOARD LOWER ANCHOR 8 VPG prompts gt DEFINE A VECTOR TO MOVE SEATBELTS 6 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD LOWER ANCHOR 7 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD LAP BELT ANCHOR VPG MODULES Use KEY IN VECTOR to define a vector then move the upper or lower seatbelt to the right place 7 71 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 9 gt TBELT ELEMENT TO START PULL PUSH VPG prompts PICK A SEA VPG MODULES 7 7 DELETE MODEL Description This option allows the user to delete the currently defined crash models Any tool available in the Crash Tool Library may be deleted In the case where a dummy model and barrier model have been created using the same process the DELETE function will delete both the dummy model and the barrier 7 72 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DELETE 2 Once the crash model is selected it is highlighted VPG gt DO YOU WANT TO DELETE CRASH MODEL Y N If YES is selected the model will be deleted prompts FSI MODULE VPG s ALE F ulations It has following features Si n Para Auto OS definition Coupled with SPH elements Organized ALE control definition Export complete LS DYNA input file No editing required a eshes sets up ALE zones defines
205. P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR This is the total thickness of the drag operation gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS THRU THICKNESS DEFAULT 1 This is the thickness of each layer of elements gt ACCEPT EXTRUDE MESH Y N Note Plate element normals should be consistent prior to the execution of NORMAL DRAG DRAG MESH ROTATIONAL DRAG Description This section covers the options for the ROTATIONAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along the axis of rotation to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts to select elements 2 XIT PG prompts ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 5 Once red the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEP REMESH DRAG MESH ANSLATIONAL DRAG De c VPG prompts to define the axis of rotation 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROTATION ANGLE ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO E 4 V gt the number of layers is ente T MESH YES NO TR s ription This section covers the options for t H This he TRANSLATIONAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MES W axis to form the higher order elements i e 1D o form plates and plate elem Usage function extrudes the selected elements along the elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded t ents are extruded to form solid elements 1 VPG 2 VPG prompts to create local c
206. P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES he user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 3 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the re selecting the desired lines for 3 LINE MESH The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once t cts the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER MESH TYPE 1 OR 2 LINE SEGMENT allows t LINE section The user must select this option befo he user sele 1 Tr selected lines TS N1 N2 N3 2 TRIA ALONG EDGE Triangles are concentrated along the third selected line gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 VPG accepts only one entry as each side has the same number of elements 6 3 20 4 LINE MESH Description TRIA AT CORNER iangles are concentrated in the vertex of the first two gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMEN This function generates elements in an area defined by 4 selected lines A rectangular patte the number of eleme on of the first selected line and N2 is the number of elements along the dire d selected line etc For a transition mesh it is possible to enter N3 and N4 parameters for the mesh each side has a different number of elements e g 10 5 8 7 The nodes in the direction of N2 are generated by linear interpretation between the opposing nodes on the two lines A row of N2 quadrilateral elements is generat
207. PG MODULES Front Suspension Library SHORT LONG A ARM SUSPENSION MCPHERSON H ARM FRONT SUSPENSION Rear Suspension Library MCPHERSON H ARM REAR SUSPENSION 7 15 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S TWIST BEAM REAR SUSPENSION VPG MODULES 5 LINK REAR SUSPENSION QUADRA LINK REAR SUSPENSION 7 16 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S TRAILING ARM REAR SUSPENSION VPG MODULES HOTCHKISS REAR SUSPENSION TWIST BEAM 7 17 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S HONDA 5 LINK D 7 2 2 DELETE escription This option allows the user to delete defined suspension models from the VPG atabase d U VPG MODULES sage 1 VPG pr gt SELECT SUSPENSION FROM SU NSION LIST OR SCREEN the susp sion is selected VPG prompts USPENSION Y N the suspension model and returns the user to the SUSPENSION 7 2 3 TRANSLATE Description ompts SPE en Once an element from gt OK TO DELETE THIS S YES deletes MENU NO returns the user to the SUSPENSION MENU This option allows the user to translate auto generated suspension models Its purpose is to allow the user to quickly align the auto generated suspension model with the F E body model for attachment Usage PG prompts PICK AN ELEMENT TO TRANSLATE SUSPENSION 1 V gt Once the two locations have been determined the su
208. PG prompts gt EL Se e point for the mass element The position of the selected and returns the user to the MODIFY ON menu 1 VPG pro pts gt SELECT MASS ELEMENT FOR MOD m IFY CHANGE VALUE VPG prompts gt ENTER ELEMENT VALUE OR 0 TO EXIT Enter a n HANGE POSITION S ECT NEW POSITION NODE POINT lects a new nod mass will be moved to the new position MASS OPTI 6 193 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR ATTACH MA VPG prompts gt ATTACH ALL MASS TO NEAREST NODES Y N A YES Attach all mass to the nearest nodes No and Abort exit and do nothing 6 16 5 DELETE MASS Description SS This function deletes a selected individual or group of mass elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ONLY MASS ELEMENTS WILL BE DELETED gt SELECT ELEMENTS User can select mass elements with any methods DONE The selected mass elements are deleted and return to MASS MENU ABORT return to the MASS MENU 6 16 6 IDENTIFY MASS Description This function identifies a mass element and provide X Y Z geometry and mass properties provided in the model unit system Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ONLY MASS ELEMENTS WILL BE SELECTED gt SELECT ELEMENTS User selects a mass element and it will display information of this mass 6 16 7 CALCULATE MASS Description This function calculates a mass center of gravity location and inertia properties for selected parts
209. PG prompts gt INCLUDE MIRRORED LINES IN ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO YES will place all selected lines into the ORIGINAL PART NO will place all selected lines into the current part 6 1 13 OFFSET Desc 4 Once desired lines have been selected DONE takes the user to the next step ription This function allows the user to copy and offset a selected line The new line is generate th o a user specified distance and direction Usag PRE PROCESSOR d in e UV plane according t e 1 gt 2 Once the gt DE OR LINE OFFSET gt DE PT FOR ORIGIN Th s If lie in the global XY XZ or YZ plane then the user selects three points on the line to define the plane A thorough explanation of how to em is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 it will be displayed on the screen and t pr 4 If the ES then VPG prompts ENTER OFFSET DISTANCE IN UV PLANE OR 1 TO EXIT the line 5 VPG in the displayed direction at the specified distance VPG prompts SELECT LINE TO OFFSET desired lines have been selected VPG prompts FINE PLANE F PICK NO e user enters a coordinate system to define the plane in which the line lie the line does not create a local coordinate syst Once the desired coordinate system is acquired he ompt will read gt ACCEPT YES NO user selects Y gt The user enters a positive distance and an arrow appears at the beginning of p
210. PG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR This option allows the user to select 2 end points of a line segment and create d number of new points between them see step 3 POINT ST 3 G BETWEEN 2 POINTS LINE gt SEL T gt ENT N ers the desired number of points 4 EXIT or NE a specifie CURSOR LOCATION REJECT LA VP prompts gt gt SELECT POINT 1 ON EC POINT 2 ON LINE ER UMBER OF POINTS TO BE ADDED The user ent DO returns the user to the LINE menu Circles indicate the locations where points have been added 6 1 2 GENE Description RATE ARCS is nerate arcs and circles either globally locally or about a select PART C Usage Th function allows the user to ge ed node or point The created arc will be included in the CURRENT PART see ONTROL MENU 1 VPG prompts te the arc VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in the Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 local W axis or global Z axis 2 ordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the pro read gt A Y N A 3 gt E INC TH int of arc or circle gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global about which to crea Note Arcs and circles are generated about the Once
211. PG writes all mass information to the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU 6 199 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE A TS OVERWRITE Y N YES Overwrite the file w NO Exit and do nothing CONM2 LREADY EXIS ith new data 6 18 3 CREATE Description This function allows the user create a new mass element to the database For details please refer to Section 6 3 6 18 4 DELETE CONM2 Descr o ipti n This function deletes a selected individual or group of CONM2 elements Usage 1 elect a CONM2 element with any methods e selected CONM2 element will be deleted and VPG will exit this Y tion VPG prompts gt DELETE CONM2 gt SELECT ELEMENTS User may s DONE Th function ABORT Rejects selected CONM2 elements and exists the command 6 18 5 CONM2 PROPERT Descrip The details of this function refer to Section 6 12 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN ELEMENT C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATERIAL 6 18 6 IDENTIFY MASS Description This function identifies a mass element CONM2 and provide X Y Z geometry and mass properties provided in the model unit system Usage s ELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR The user selects a mass element and VPG will display the information of this mass EXIT to MASS MENU 6 18 7 CALCULATE MASS D 1 VPG prompt gt S escr o ipti
212. PLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW control various aspects of the model s appearance The user initiates the commands via mouse pick The window remains active in the lower right corner of the screen A detailed description of each function is given in the following pages LINES Turns plot lines on off SHRINK This function reduces the size of all elements by 20 percent SHRINK is also useful for locating any missing elements in a shell or solid structure FILLHIDE This function creates a hidden surface plot for all of the displayed elements which provides the user with a realistic view of the model SURFACES Turns highlighted surfaces on off NORMAL This function displays the orientation of an element with an arrow that is at the centroid of the element and that is perpendicular to the surface of the element For a solid element the arrow points toward the bottom surface of the element Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 41 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY COLOR The FILLCOLOR option fills the displayed elements with a designated part color ELEM The ELEM option turns elements on off ORIEN This function displays element orientation Beam element orientation is shown by drawing a vector at the first node of the beam toward the element local Y axis Shell orientation is shown by drawing an arrow from the first node of an element toward the second node of an element Solid element orientation is viewed by drawing an arrow from the bottom sur
213. PROCESSOR 6 10 MATERIAL PROPERTY LS DYNA The functions in the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU are designed to define and modify the ma splayed according to the color of their material definition Parts without material definition are displayed in white The functions in this menu are organized as follows terial properties in the database Parts are di By s in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP menu the u aterials that are solver code specific The user may assign and create materials at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections set to NASTRAN see section 6 11 D switching solver code setting ser can assign and create m Note If the analysis code is 6 10 1 ADD EROSION escription This f rosion unction creates and adds the erosion to selected materials and modifies the e Usage G prompts new card VPG prompts SELECT MATERIAL 1 VP gt SELECT OPTION CREATE Defines a gt 6 146 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R After this menu is exited the Erosion Definition card is shown The ers the appropriate figures and selects OK to exit D Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST se via pop up window MODIFY TE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify EXIT 6 10 2 ADD TH
214. R PRE PROCESSOR Description This function defines linear constraint equations between displacements rotations which can be defined in local global coordinate systems Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LAGRANGIAN SOLID Desc on ripti This function couples Lagrang mesh shells solids or beams to the material poin el rebar in concrete or tire co er part or master p ian ts of a Eulerain flow master This option may also be used to mod rds in rubber The slave part or slave part set is coupled to the mast art set Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA ser s Manual for further description CON Description U STRAINT CARDS POINTS This function defines constrained points Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LOCAL Description This function defines a boundary constraint in a local coordinate system sage U S DYNA Des 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the L User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS NODAL RIGID BODY cription This function defines a rigid body that consists of defined nodes Refer to section 6 3 S Des 4 for more details CONSTRAINT CARD
215. R O C E S S O R 2 After click EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT A PART TO REPLACE TARGET PART part 3 G gt TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N YES The target part will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE DEFAULT VALUE 10 Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part 6 17 7 REPLACE PART SET Description Select a new part by choosing its name or an element of it to replace the that has been selected VP prompts REPLACE This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set the nodes index on the old parts based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PA gt SELECTED F Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list 2 VPG prompts gt SELECTED THE THE TARGET Select another p ce the part set that has been selected 3 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N YES The target part set will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE DEFAULT VALUE 10 Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts the nodes index on the old parts based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts RT SET IRST PART SET
216. R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR NO INNER BOUNDARY e outer boundary curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim oper n ST CURVE This rejects the last curve selected for the trim operation 4 VPG then prompts gt YES generates a trimmed surface NO generates a trimmed surface and retains the original surface TRIM SURFACE OPEN CURVE Desc on This trims the outside surface of th CURVE ON SURFACE The user may select an existing atio REJECT LA DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N 5 VPG returns the user to step 2 of the TRIM SURFACE command ripti This function defines an open curve on a selected surface After determining the surfac ts the points leaving the curve open with the first an curve e type of curve and points this function connec d last point selected as the starting and ending points of the TRIM S Descr URFACE POINT iption POINT is the default option in the trim surface menu Users may pick locations on the surf trim operations TRIM SURFACE SPLINE CURVE Description ace defining piecewise linear segments for This function cuts spline curves on a selected surface The user defines the location of the spline via mouse pick Usage 1 VPG gt SELECT NEXT POINT FOR SPLINE CURVE user has selected the points for the curve then enters DONE complete the spline fines a closed spline curve passing through all pr
217. S DYNA User s Manual for further description PRE PROCESSOR 6 183 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR DEFINE VECTOR Description This function defines a vector using the coordinates of two nodes or points Usage gt ENTER NEW VECTOR ID X OR E TO EXIT 2 Once the vector ID has been established VPG prompts gt DEFINE TAIL OF VECTOR 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts OF VECTOR 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE HEAD disp No tion 6 14 DEFORMABLE TO RIGID Description After defining the vector head the vector is displayed with its vector number in the lay window te Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further descrip 8 The definiti cards of DEFORMABLE TO RIGID specify properties of deformable parts Deformable parts may be switched to rigid at the start of a calculation using the DEFORM TO RIGID card Part switching may be specified on a restart or it may be performed automatically using the AUTOMATIC card The INERTIA card sets inertial properties for deformable parts that will be switched to rigid Usage on 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option ng definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s The preceding commands yield varyi Manual for further description 6 184 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 14 9 EQUATION OF STATE Description The
218. S will overwrite the existing file 3 VPG prompts CRASH VERSION 1 SEQUENTIAL USE KEYWORD INPUT Y N 4 VPG prompts NO nal keyword cards via pop ups ters an alphanumeric title containing a maximum of 48 characters the user to the FILE MANAGER menu abase VPG prompts the user to define the roperties materials by default by global default or by part Supported properties are listed in Appendix A VPG ms e user to output a RADIOSS data file directly from the VPG database input file VPG creates default materials and element properties for nversion tables ts R FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT y exists the program will prompt the following message ADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N VPG prompts 1 VERSION 4 1 FIXED N 4 4 BLOCK gt ENTER TITLE an alphanumeric title containing a maximum of 48 characters VPG returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K NO will prompt for a file name gt SELECT PAM 2 FREE NUMBERING gt DO YOU WANT TO YES NO gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES 5 VPG prompts for optio 6 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE The user en VPG returns Note If the properties materials are not assigned to the parts in the dat p Capabilities for F E A Progra FILE MANAGER 5 8 8 WRITE RADIOSS FILE This function allows th hen writing a RADIOSS
219. SET NUMBER XXXX OR 1 TO EXIT ser must enter an integer before proceeding 2 After the user enters SPC set number VPG prompts gt DEFINE D O F FOR SPC Simultaneously the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box pops up and as gt EN The u 6 140 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R following The options in the top and bottom of the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box represent alte the top or the bottom can be sele X Y Y Z X Z SYMME Z plane X Y ANTI SY ne Y Z ANTI SYMMET plane X Z onditions to the XZ plane X Y TRA Z TRA X ROT Y ROTATI Z ROTATION Z rotation will be constrained 3 Once the DOF is determined in the dialogue box VPG prompts gt D O F xxxx IS FIXED gt ENTER ENFORCED DISPLACEMENT DEFAULT IS 0 0 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES Nodes may be selected one at a time with the left mouse button DONE will exit the user to the ENTER SPC SET NUMBER prompt step 1 ABORT will exit the user to the SPC OPTIONS menu without constraining any of the selected grids SPC DELETE Description rnate methods for defining the degree of freedom Only cted not both SYMMETRY Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane SYMMETRY Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane TRY Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the X MMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XY pla RY Assi
220. SON_COOK 2 PLAS_JOHNS 100 MAT_SPOTWELD 1 ELAST 103 MAT_ANISOTROPIC_VISCOPLASTIC 33 FOAM_PLAS 104 MAT_DAMAGE_1 22 DAMA 105 MAT_DAMAGE_2 22 DAMA 116 MAT_COMPOSITE_LAYUP 14 COMPSO 117 MAT_COMPOSITE_MATRIX 1 ELAST 118 MAT_COMPOSITE_DIRECT 1 ELAST 123 MAT_MODIFIED_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 36 PLAS_TAB 124 MAT_PLASTICITY_COMPRESSION_TENSION 2 PLAS_JOHNS 126 MAT_MODIFIED_HONEYCOMB 2 PLAS_JOHNS 127 MAT_ARRUDA_BOYCE_RUBBER 42 OGDEN 128 MAT_HEART_TISSUE 1 ELAST 129 MAT_LUNG_TISSUE 1 ELAST 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC 19 FABRI OTHER MATERIAL TYPE 1 ELAST 9 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION displacement IMPOSED DISPLACEMENT BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION velocity IMPOSED VELOCITY BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION acceleration IMPOSED ACCELERATION BOUNDARY_SPC BCS CONSTRAINED_LINEAR MPC APPENDIX C C 22 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C INITIAL_VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY LOAD_NODE CLOAD Deleted when DOF is 4 or 8 LOAD_SEGMENT PLOAD LOAD_SHELL PLOAD 9 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL VPG deletes CONTACT_ENTITY CONTACT_INTERIOR CONTACT_1D CONTACT_2D_OPTIONS CONTACT_GEBOD_OPTION CONTACT_RIGID_SURFACE CONTACT_AUTO_MOVE CONTACT_COUPLING DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 CONTACT_AIRBAG_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_GENERAL TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_GENERAL_INTERIOR TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_NODES_TO_SURFA
221. SOR 3 VPG promp s gt SELE T O t C PTION TO CREATE SPOTWELD 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE POINT FOR INDEPENDENT NODE This step is repeated once and the SPOTWELD is defined ordinate system is displayed CREATE Desc on Once the SPOTWELD is defined its co B AM LS DYNA E ripti This function defines a beam element This section covers the options for the BEAM subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT 2 Select two nodes points VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES POINTS FOR BEAM ORIENTATION Select a node point and a beam element is created CREATE NODAL RIGID BODY LS DYNA Description This function defines a NODAL RIGID BODY element between multiple nodes The first selected node serves as a reference point all additional nodes are connected to this first node usually the center of the rigid body for display purposes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE FIRST NODE FOR RIGID BODY The first node is selected Nodes can be selected by cursor pick drag window multi point region or part The second and subsequent nodes are selected until the user selects DONE Th R alongside it CREATE PLATE S Description gt SELECT NODES e rigid body is displayed with double lines with an L DYNA This function defines a triangle or quadrangle plate element This section covers the options for the PLATE subsection
222. SOR LOCATION Select the surface in the graphics display window directly default the surface will be highlighted and ID will be shown KEY IN NUMBER Enter the surface number in the field the surface will be highlighted and ID will be shown UMBER All surfaces ID of the displayed surfaces will be shown EXIT 6 2 19 SWEEP SURFACE Description SHOW SURF N This function allows the user to create a surface via the selection of a section line and a d o d along the length of the direction line irecti n line The surface is generate PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VP gt SELECT SWEEP TYPE T lines remain perpendicular to the line of direction The section lines remain parallel to the line of pattern elect a line gt SELECT A LINE FOR THE SWEEP PATTERN 3 Once the line has been selected VPG prompts gt SELECT A LINE FOR THE SWEEP DIRECTION The new surface will generate along the selected line and the user will return to 6 2 20 TRANSFORM G prompts the user to select a sweep type NORMAL SWEEP he section RIGID SWEEP 2 VPG prompts the user to s The selected line will act as a constant cross section for the new surface step 2 6 26 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Description This function allows the user to move or rotate a selected surface either locally or globally Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CR
223. ST PROCESSING Figure 9 2 PART ON OFF Window Not FF dialog window is displayed only VIEW OPREATION functions are enabled to use other User ca or off by picking the part name in the part list There are several other m rt on or off as described below SELEC e When PART ON O functions are disabled n select part to turn on ethods to turn pa T BY PICK ELEMEN he part including th T T e selected element is selected The element will be highlighted as the 9 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING c rt ursor moves over the pa SELECT BY DRAG WINDOW This function allows the user to drag a window around the desired parts All parts including the selected elements are selected SELECT BY MULTI REGION This function allows the user to select a multi point region all parts including the selected elements are selected Points are selected by clicking the mouse in the Graphic Display area SELECT BY FREE HAND This function allows the user to select a region by a free hand all parts including the selected elements are selected The user depresses the left mouse button and moves the mouse to select the desired region SELECT BY ELEMENT TYPE This function allows the user to turn selected element types on off so that they are shown or no longer shown in the window list and in the GRAPHIC DISPLAY window BEAM All parts with the beam element are removed from the part list if the BEAM
224. TIRE PROFILE 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG displays the tire cross section along with mass and pressure values and prompts gt PROCESSING ELEMENTS AND NODES a NO returns the user to the tire parameter window 3 If the user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT gt DEFINE 7 27 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Note For tire tuning procedures see the VPG Structure Tutorial sections 1 5 and 2 4 VPG MODULES 7 28 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 3 Description 2 DELETE TIRE MODEL This option allows the user to d e the currently defined tire models All parts sets and materials associated with the selected tire are deleted Usage elet 1 FROM 2 it is h O DELETE THI is selected the tire will be 7 3 3 COPY TIRE MODEL Description VPG prompts gt SELECT TIRE TIRE LIST OR SCREEN Once the tire is selected gt OK T If YES ighlighted and VPG prompts S TIRE Y N ABORT deleted This function allows the user to copy a tire model and its characteristics to a specific location Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CHOOSE A TIRE FOR COPYING BY PICKING AN ELEMENT 2 After selecting the tire VPG prompts gt ACCEPT THE SELECTED TIRE Y N ABORT the new tire Once entered the
225. TRAIN is selected the CURRENT LAYER is enabled ed There are MIDDLE TOP and BOTTOM available in the CURRENT ri This function is used to alter the size of the vector BY ELEMENT SIZE means 9 58 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING the v Usage ector size is based on the element size contained the Note When BY ELEMENT SIZE is toggled on the SCAL FACTOR is disabled Note Rese OR The value more than the maximum the vector is displayed in red and the v ile the vector is displayed in blue 9 12 GRAPH SCALE FACTOR allows the user to enter a percentage of the maximum magnitude model t Contour Range is in the VECT alue less than the minimum wh The GRAPH function is a m pendent comparatively module than other functions of eta Post Processor listed above This function enables the u ize time history result from LS DYNA analysis with graph format Moreover the GRA offers a wide range of tools to help the user better u d and convey the results res include the ability to manipulate the display area s labels colors etc and a host of advanced filtering techniques FIR SAE Butterwo raging etc The detailed description of available function in GRAPH is given in the following sections The GRAPH function can be active by clicking the GRAPH icon on toolbar in despite of if the user hav current database or not Then the result file load control window will pop up on the right of screen
226. TROL OPTION window that is common with the one in DISTANCE BETWEEN WO NODES function Once three nodes are selected the program labels the outputs the information in the message window ction measures the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes The first selected s the ve T angle at the vertex node and ANGLE his fun nodes Defa nodes prog es and at the same time output information in the information window BETWEEN TWO LINES T ction is used to measure the angle between two lines that are composed by selected four ult setting is to select by mouse click or inputting node numbers After selecting four ram displays the angle at the two lines by selected four nod RAIDIUS BETWEEN THREE NODES This function enables the user to measure the radius of an arc that is passing through three selected nodes by cursor selection default or key in node number After selecting three nodes the program will display the radius on screen and output the coordinates of the center of the arc in message window GRAPH This function is used to read ASCII file results plot and operate curves AD2FEA This function will transform ADAMS model to FEA model NODOUT TO MODE This function will do a FFT transformation to the ASCII file result 9 4 1 POSTPROCESSING ICONS The functions in the POSTPROCESS icon bar allow the user to access the functions to process the result files There are two kind t one is global icons which control part s
227. TS Usage s section covers the options for the ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL subsection 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT Generating isoparametric tri or quad elements require the user to select three nodes points per side 6 CREATE RIGID BODY RBE3 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the RIGID BODY RBE3 subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT NUMBERS DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT Defines the degrees of freedom 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT REFERENCE NODE FOR RBE3 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER WEIGHTING FACTOR WT 1 REAL OR 0 TO END gt ENTER COMPONENT WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR DEFAULT 123 gt FOR NODE WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR 100E 01 gt SELECT INDEPENDENT NODES 4 Step 3 is repeated until the user selects DONE or ABORT CREATE SPOTWELD NASTRAN Description This function allows the user to create local coordinate systems to be attached to the RBAR or RBE2 elements for the application of weld study Two options are provided The first option creates the RBAR and attaches the local coordinate systems at each node automatical ordinate system automatically to the existing RBA e Usage ly The second option attaches the local co R lements 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT COORDINATE SYSTEM TYPE 2 VPG prompts BE2 gt SELECT LOCAL AXIS ALONG RBAR R 6 44 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCES
228. TTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF in the element options menu p r This will pop up the ELEMENT DISCRETE CARD for user pu Usag mmended that the u rior to creating a spring dampe t in e 1 V When the second node point is defined VPG displays the SPRING DAMPER PG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT This step is repeated once element CREATE MASS LS DYNA Description This function defines a lumped mass element on a node This section covers the options for the MASS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts MPED MASS VALUE gt ENTER LU 6 46 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR After entering a value VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT CREAT Descripti 2 Select a node mass element will be created E SEATBELT 2 NODES LS DYNA on This function defines a seatbelt element between two nodes points Other seatbelt functions such as ACCELEROMETER RETRACTOR SENSOR etc are located in the DYNA MI SCELLANEOUS menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT This step is repeated once When the second node point is defined VPG displays the SEATBELT element Once the seatbelt elements have been created it is recommended that the user enter E PROCESSOR menu and select SEATBELT to define the accelerometer pretensioner retractor sensor and slipring CRE 4 NODES LS DYN
229. The field description indicates the value to be added to the editing field If the field description text is gray it indicates that the value entered in that field is depe FEATURES m EDITING PUSH BUTTON An editing button forwards the user through a series of prompts menus or cards that results in a valid value for the chosen field OK Accepts and saves the defined input data NEXT Forwards the user to the next input data window for this entity PREVIOUS Fo ards the user to the previous input window for this entity out saving or defining the data EN R at any time during input data definition accepts and saves the defined 2 15 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s FEATURES 2 16 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM VPG refers to ate system to translate rotate mirror copy and generate points lines and nodes such a function is selected the program will automatically prompt the user to gener a reference poi ar For a three point s erence which ext e local U axis The third reference poi ocal W axis is defined in the UV plane and is perpendicular he local W axis is then defined according to the right hand rule perpendicular For the two p be selected after the second reference point is defined The local W axis li axis lies in the VW pla a Note All rotation s copying with rotation etc are executed about the local W or global Z axis For the one
230. The part to which the elements are added does not have to be current or on Usage gt GE PA T N ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART ts xx part name 1 VPG rompts p SELECT TAR T R gt PICK A 2 Once the user selects the target part VPG promp gt ELEMENTS WILL BE ADDED TO PART xx gt SELECT ELEMENTS 10 14 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY ters DONE to exit the menu 10 3 2 ADD LINES TO PART Description 3 The user selects the desired elements then en This function allows the user to copy lines from one part to another part The part to which the lines are added does not have to be current or on Usage 1 VPG prompts E PA NAME OF A PART nce the use target part VPG prompts gt LINES WILL BE ADDED TO PART xxxx part name gt SELECT LINES ters DONE to exit the menu SURFA ES O n gt SELECT TARG T RT gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART 2 O r selects the 3 The user selects the desired lines then en 10 3 3 ADD C T PART Descriptio This functi user to copy surfaces from one part to another part ce dded does not have to be current or on Usage on allows the The part to which the surfa s are a 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET PART gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target parts VPG prompts SU FACES I RT xxxx part name gt SELECT SURFACES 3 The user selects the desired surfaces the
231. This function allow import DYNAFORM VPG FEMB Line Data file for SKID MARK and BLANK OUTL ns The Import File dialog is shown in Figure 9 10 s the user to INE functio Figure 9 10 Import File Window User User can select a DYN FEMB Line Data file then click OPEN button or double click the desired file ic le name list to import it Note IMPORT function is disabled unt AN punch output2 file is read in 9 7 3 EXPORT Description AFORM VPG on from the fi il a d3plot file or NASTR This function allows user to export the current model as NASTRAN file or DYNAFORM VPG FEMB line data file The Export File dialog is shown in Figure 9 11 9 15 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Export File Dialog Box Usage Figure 9 11 User can export the m rned on in the current database as the NASTRAN FILE Give a file name then click SAVE button to export the model in the selected file format Note EXPORT function is disabled until a d3plot file or NASTRAN punch output2 file is read in Description odel tu 9 7 4 COPY TO CLIPBOARD This function allo ave the model displayed in the GRAPHICS DISPLAY window to the clipboa nvironment The image in the clipboard can be pasted to the document files 9 7 5 PRINT Description ws the user to s indows e rd in the W The PRINT function prints the contents of the graphics display window to a printer or saves it to an image file
232. Tutorial VPG Part Thickness Tutorial for a detailed example of how to use this and related functions Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 24 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY Figure 10 3 6 Thickness Menu AUTO NORMAL Description The calculation method used to create nodal thicknesses requires that all elements be consistent with respect to normals This requires element connectivities to be defined in a consistent manner This function allows users to check the connectivity definitions for the components and reverse any elements that are inconsistent Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR AUTO NORMAL ALL ACTIVE PARTS CURSOR PICK PART 2 After the user selects the desired parts VPG prompts gt IS NORMAL DIRECTION ACCEPTABLE Y N CALCULATE Description This function executes a background process that uses component geometry material and thickness to calculate a nodal thickness and residual strain value READ DYNAIN Description This function allows users to read a DYNAIN file from a previously executed LS DYNA metal forming analysis Usage Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 25 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT DYNAIN FILE NAME READ CONTACT PRESSURE Description This function allows users to read a pressure file from a previously executed LS DYNA metal forming analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT PRESSURE FILE NAME EXPORTED BY ETA POST MAP PRESSURE Description This functi
233. User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING le Desc 9 10 9 ELEMENT ORIENTATION togg ription This option shows a vector from the first node to the second node of each plate elem t location U axis and local Z axis acc of the composite material Figure 9 47 shows a typical display of a part with ELEMENT ORIENTATION option ent It allows the user to visualize the direction of the elemen ording to the right hand rule It is useful to check the orientation Figure 9 47 Typical display with Element Orientation option 9 10 10 ACTIVE CONTOUR RANGE Description This function will toggle on off active contour range 9 10 11 OVERALL CONTOUR RANGE Description This function will toggle on off overall contour range 9 10 12 DE Description FINE ROTATE CENTER This function will toggle on off rotate center 9 10 13 ISPLAY GRAPH ON SCREEN toggle Description D Graphs will directly be shown in display window without creating a new window when this option is on 9 44 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 10 14 Des APPLY VPG LAYOUT cription This function will toggle on off initial status of eta post for VPG or DYNAFORM 9 10 15 APPLY SECOND RENDER Description This function will toggle on off second render 9 10 16 APPLY LOCAL LIGHT Description This function will toggle on off local light 9 10 17 Description APPLY MOUSE TRACK
234. VPG prompts the user to enter a property name if no properties exist in the ame is entered a pop up window will appear with a list of properties to edit ID has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CRE TE HOLLOW TUBE NASTRAN Description database at the current time Once a n PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once the property An element will be created after two nodes points are selected A This section covers the options for the HOLLOW TUBE subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usag e 1 VPG prompts s the user to enter a property name if no properties exist in the database at the current time Once a name is entered a pop up window will appear with a list of properties to edit 2 gt To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three ected EXIT or ABORT will exit this function gt ENTER NEW PROPERTY NAME OR EX TO EXIT VPG prompt Once the property ID has been entered the prompt will read PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT An element will be created after two nodes points are sel 6 43 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR CREATE ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL NASTRAN Description Thi of CREATE ELEMEN
235. VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING RESULTANT ction allows the user to find the square root of the sum of the square of the Y d curves The new value is This fun values of the selecte The function d to plot the vector length from three curves containing the X Y and Z component two dimensional vector only two curves need to be selected This function will be than one curve is use For a activated after the user selects more FFT This function user to convert curve d gna allows the ata from time domain to frequency o se r FFT is a fast algorithm for he Discrete Fo DFT is a basic operation to transform an ordered sequence of data samples from a signal usually in a time domain information about the signal is then plementation of FFT when the samples are of two The algorithms adopted in eta Post can deal with both cases umber of samples is a power of two or not domain resp n fo si l processing analysis The t computing urier Transform DFT The into the frequency domain The spectral represented explicitly There are various im not of power whether the n HIC 15 This function enables the user to calculate the maximum Head Injure Criteria when the ss an 5 m lise a VPG impact time is le th 1 il conds This is a special function used for et POST PROCESSING HIC 36 aximum Head Injure Criteria when the ial function used for eta VPG This function enables the user to calculate the m impact t
236. Y MODE ON OFF toggle Description gt REMOVAL 14 TRANSPARE This function toggles the transparency mode on or off during shading Transparency factors are defined in the SETUP menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt TRANSPARENCY MODE ON or gt TRANSPARENCY MODE OFF 10 1 15 MOVE LIGHT SOURCE Description VPG uses two types of light sources ambient light and directional light Ambient light comes from all directions and illuminates objects regardless of their position or orientation with the same intensity s uniformly and maintains a nes the face on which an object t The MOVE LIGHT SOURCE command positions a directional vector at two points that are perpendicular to an object The right and left arrow keys move the light source in the positive and negative X direction while the up and down arrow keys move the light source in the ative Y rection IVE W DO Description Directional light comes from a specific direction It flow consistent intensity It has a directional vector that determi receives ligh positive and neg di 10 1 16 ACT IN W This command allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed geometry model for more detailed viewing or editing The user defines the region by are specifying the volume of space via the keyboard with X Y Z coordinates or two diagonal points nodes VPG displays the elements r es ith the win pace as active Other objects on screen remain masked and inactive See Figure 10 1
237. Y axis value is equal to the area under the selected curve from start point to the current X point DIFFERENTIAL This function allows the user to superimpose the derivation of t q he curve on the graph nt on corresponding X which the Y axis value is e ual to the slope of the curve s tange point SQUARE This function allows the user to superimpose the square of the curve on the l Y axis value multiplying by itself graph where POST PROCESSING the Y axis value is equal to the origina ROOT t of the curve on the graph where o t value of the original Y axis value The function allows the user to superimpose the roo the Y axis value is equal t he root of the absolute RECIPROCAL This function allows the u graph where the Y axis va ser to superimpose the reciprocal value of the curve on the lue is equal to the reciprocal value of the original Y axis value LOGARITHM garithm of the curve on the graph a va e eq Y axis value This function allows the user to superimpose the lo where the Y xis lu is ual to the logarithm value of the original NAPIERIAN LOGARITH M n allows the use rve on the e Y xi val value of the original This functio r to superimpose the Napierian logarithm of the cu graph where th a s ue is equal to the Napierian logarithm Y axis value ABSOLUTE VALUE plot the absolute value of the Y values of the selected This function allows the user to curve 9 74 eta
238. Y plane Y Z SYMMETRY Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane X Z SYMMETRY Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane X Y AN Y Z ANTI SY X Z ANTI SY X TRANSL Y TRANSL Z TRANSLA X ROTATION X rotation will be constrained Y ROTATION Y rotation will be constrained Z ROTATION Z rotation will be constrained DARY CARDS SYMMETRY FAILURE Desc rnate methods for defining the degree of freedom Only the top or the b cted not TI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane MMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane MMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane ATION X translation will be constrained ATION Y translation will be constrained TION Z translation will be constrained BOUN ription This functio s to co n defines a symmetry plane with a failure criterion This option applie ntinuum domains modeled with solid elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual fo BOUNDARY CARDS TEMPERATURE r further description Description This function defines temperature boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DARY CARDS THERMAL WELD Desc BOUN ription This functio s Ma n defines thermal weld boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User nual for further description BO SA Description UNDARY CARDS U This fun
239. YFORCE X MOMENT MOMENT MAGNITUDE DATA GLSTAT escription The user can plot the ypes are available global time history data from the glstat file The following t TIME STEP L ENERGY TOTAL INITIAL ENERGY ERODED INTERNAL ENERGY SPRING amp DAMPER EMERGY Y EXTERNAL WORK TIME PER ZONE CYCLE NUMBER OF SHELL ELEMENT STEP SIZE GLOBAL X VELOCITY GLOBAL Y VELOCITY GLOBAL Z VELOCITY JOINT FORCE FILE JNTFORC Description TOTA ENERGY RATIO KINETIC ENERGY ERODED KINETIC ENERGY INTERNAL ENERGY HOURGLASS ENERGY SYSTEM DAMPING ENERGY SLIDING INTERFACE ENERG The user can plot the joint force data from the jntforc file The following types are available X_FORCE Y_FORCE Z_FORCE Y_MOMENT Z_MOMENT X_MOMENT 9 62 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING RESULTANT_FORCE RESULATANT_MOMENT Description MATERIAL ENERGIES MATSUM The user can plot the material energy time history data from the matsum file The following types are available INTERNAL ENERGY KINETIC ENERGY X MOMENT Y MOMENT Y RIGID BODY VELOCITY Z RIGID BODY VELOCITY CONTACT INTERFACE FORCES NCFORC Description Z MOMENT X RIGID BODY VELOCITY The user can plot the contact interface force data from the ncforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FOECE PRESSURE X COORDINATE Y COORDINATE ORDINATE OR Description Z FORCE Z CO NODAL FORCE
240. a load set with the The user is allowed to apply pressure loads to the element centers in the VPG model Distributed element pressure loads are applied normal to the element surface Positive pressure loads are in the same direction as the positive normal according to the right hand rule Negative pressure loads are in the opposite direction of the positive element normal IC LOAD DELETE ion The user may enter an integer as the entered number exists the user is prompted to enter a different integer element LOAD STAT Descript This function deletes the selected load set Us age 1 VPG prompts 6 136 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE Available load sets are displayed in the STATIC LOAD CARD LIST window LOAD STATIC LOAD LIST FORCE Description This function displays the applied forces and lists node numbers and respective loads in the command area of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts ST gt SELECT NODE FOR FORCE ALL NODES All nodes with applied forces will have arrowheads displayed but no specific itudes will be listed r sing the left mouse button or typing N will list the applied force of the grid earest to the cursor d TED NODE and remain in the LIST FORCE option EXIT will exit the function LIST FORCE LOAD STATIC LOAD LIST PRESSURE Description gt SELECT CARD TO L
241. abel at the clicked location DELETE Delete an arrow or a text label The program EXIT Exit the function Figure 9 15 Label and Arrow Control Option Window arrow will be listed in the Label Arrow control window The first location is the tail of the arrow and the second location is the head of the arrow TEXT TEXT button Press the will highlight the arrow or text label on the screen as the user selects an arrow or text label in the list Click the DELETE button to delete the highlighted arrow or text label The user may combine the Shift or Ctrl key and mouse click for multiple selections 9 21 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING D on 9 8 4 ROTATE LIGHT escripti eta Post uses two light sources directed from the specific locations from the model This function allows the user to rotate the light sources along the screen X Y axes The function only works when the SHADE option is turned on The program displays the light source 1 n the function starts U and 2 and their lighting directions whe sage The user uses the mouse to move the light sources on the screen The lighting effect is pdated as the user m u oves the mouse Press the left mouse button to exit the function The user may activate this function by pressing the SHIFT and LEFT mouse button simultaneously Release the mouse button to exit the function GHT PROPERTY Description 9 8 5 LI The light propert
242. acceleration of gravity for the unit system selected for the model 8 2 4 BOUNDARY CARDS Description Boundary Cards allow the user to define boundary conditions on the model Selecting BOUNDARY CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the BOUNDARY CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 5 CONSTRAINT CARDS Description Constraint Cards allow the user to define constraint conditions on the model Selecting CONSTRAINT CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the CONSTRAINT CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 6 LOAD CARDS Description Load Cards allow the user to define loading conditions on the model Selecting LOAD CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the LOAD CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 7 INITIAL VELOCITY Description Selecting INITIAL VELOCITY allows the user to define initial conditions on the model Selecting INITIAL VELOCITY on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the INIT COND CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 8 DEFINE CONTACTS D escription DEFINE CONTACTS allows the user to create apply and modify contact interfaces within an LS DYNA model By selecting DEFINE CONTACTS on the ANALYSIS menu VPG directs the user to the CONTACT INTERFACE menu in the pre processing menu See Se
243. ad surfaces form a full vehicle durability evaluation platform ready for kinematics and stress analyses of component subsystem and vehicular models Road surfaces are generated using any 3D data or selected from the VPG library The Library contains digitized models of the following MGA Proving Ground road surfaces INTRODUCTION POTHOLE TRACKS RIPPLE TRACKS ALTERNATE ROLL SURFACE WASHBOARDS COBBLESTONE TRACKS CHATTERSTRIP BODY TWIST LANE PAVE SURFACE Fatigue Analysis Program Module eta VPG s built in fatigue post processor automatically performs a fatigue life analysis prediction to identify the key damage events and stress amplitudes This data is then used to calculate the percentage of fatigue life remaining at the completion of the durability cycle eta VPG displays these results in easily read combined fatigue life contour plots Signal Processing Module eta VPG performs full vehicle NVH studies on simulated proving ground surfaces eta VPG automatically converts time domain analysis results into frequency domain via FFT Fast Fourier Transform eta VPG determines both low and mid range frequencies up to 250Hz for operating mode shapes frequencies structural and airborne noise and frequency responses such as idle shake rough road power train and wheel imbalance ALE FSI Module The ALE FSI module is a menu which provides tools for construction and set up of Arbitrary Lagrangian Eulerian meshes and Fluid Structure Interaction simulations
244. ains cards that define applied forces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION PRE PROCESSOR Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREATE command differs with respect to CREATE Defines a new card DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window ption s database via pop up window TE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT LOAD CARDS ALE CONVECTION De n each function and will be explained in the following pages LIST Lists the cards in the o MODIFY Similar to the CREA scriptio This card defines the convection thermal energy transfer from a hot ALE fluid to the surrounding Lagrangian structure Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 131 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR LOAD C Desc ARDS BEAM ARDS BEAM ription ription C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 132 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual PRE PROCESSOR LOAD C Desc This card defines a distributed traction load along any local axis beam or set of s Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further desc beam ription LOAD CARDS BLAST Description This card defines a blast load Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS BODY Description This card defines body forc
245. all on parts off and all off parts on KEY IN PART RANGE selects by assigning a part number range ON ALL PARTS all parts are turned on OFF ALL PARTS all parts are turned off PART SETS ON OFF turns parts on off by their assigned set MULTI PT REGION selects part by user defined multi point region WINDOW selects part by drag window SELECT ELEMENT TYPE selects element type UNDO rejects last 10 3 14 PART COLORS ON OFF toggle Description This function changes each element type into a separate and uniform color i e quadrilateral elements turn blue triangular elements turn red 8 node cube elements turn green 6 node wedge elements turn magenta and 4 node tetrahedron elements turn light magenta This function activates the color changes when selected once and restores the original colors when selected again 10 3 15 PART SUMMARY Description This function displays statistics regarding the geometry model material and interface information of the selected parts The figures are displayed in the options area Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR SUMMARY gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Note DRAG WINDOW and MULTI POINT REGION are not valid selections for this command 2 The following figure is an example of the statistics display for selected parts Figure 10 3 4 Part Summary Window Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 22 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY 10 3 16 SEPARATE PART S Description This function a
246. analysis types FILE MANAGER FORMAT OPTION Displays a submenu with file format options SINGLE FIELD fixed format columns of double precision eight MAT comma separated fields Displays a submenu with output options DOUBLE FIELD FREE FOR OUTPUT OPTION 5 11 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r FILE MANAGER S ys the parameter modify window see figure below PARAM CARD Displa WRITE FILE EXIT SOLVER OPTION Prompts user to select NASTRAN solver pr gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT Enter a file name up to 24 characters 3 displayed on the screen NO will output all elements existing in the database G prompts ER ANALYSIS TITLE anumeric input up to 72 characters may be entered as the title of SH FILE data file directly from the VPG gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT 2 VPG ompts VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO YES will only output the elements 4 VP gt ENT Any alph the NASTRAN bulk data file 5 8 7 WRITE PAMCRA This function allows the user to output a PAMCRASH pc atabase d 1 VPG prompts 5 12 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message TO OVERWRITE Y N YE
247. any of the elements fail the model check VPG displays the following message with the option to create a new part gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 2 the model check after clicking Exit VPG prompts the user to place th t E FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N pops up failed elements will be removed from their original part and added to the NEW PART The new part will be ON and CURRENT eck individual elements for interior angle to exit this function oundary Check Multiple Surfaces Boundary Check Single Surface B If the elem If the elements fail ese elements into a new par gt INCLUD YES The PART DEFINITION window The NO VPG prompts the user to ch via cursor pick Select EXIT 6 91 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 5 6 CHECK OVERLAP Description This function checks the elements for duplicate nodal connectivity All element types are checked PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 CHECK OVERLAP ELEM If no overlapping elements are found in the displayed elements the following MODEL CHECKER menu gt NO OVERLAP ELEMENT FOUND oed gt xxxx OVERLAP ELEMENTS FOUND VPG will co option of adding these elements to a new part 2 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The P ps up The eir original parts and added to the NEW PART The new part will be ON and CURRENT NO T MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 7 CHECK JA
248. arts Usage ith the option of crea 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RENUMBERING OPTION 2 When user enters SEQUENCE VPG prompts gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER DEFAULT 1 3 When user enters ALL PARTS VPG prompts gt ASSIGN STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER FOR EACH PART Y N YES gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NO FOR PART xxxx Once a number has been entered the prompt will read gt ELEMENT x TO xx ASSIGNED NEXT ELEM NO yyyy If blank or zero is entered yyyy will be used as the starting element number for the next part These prompts will continue for every part in the database NO gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER any positive integer gt ENTER ELEMENT INCREMENT BETWEEN PARTS 1000 Any positive integer may be entered 4 When user enters MULTIPLE PARTS VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER FOR CHOSEN PARTS 6 3 14 REVERSE NORMAL PRE PROCESSOR Description This function allows the user to reverse the element orientation normal for all elements except CORD2R and CONM2 Usage 1 prompts 2 red elements have been selected DONE executes the command VPG gt SELECT ELEMENTS Once desi 6 59 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 1 SPLIT Descr 5 iption This function divides CQUAD4 and CTRI3 elements into 2 or 4 elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT
249. ase format is shown below ALL text must be entered with CAPITAL letters LOAD CURVE FILE FORMAT line 1 VPG LOAD CURVE Header line line 2 CURVE CURVE ID TYPE CURVE TITLE A5 I5 I5 1X A8 line 3 X1 Y1 2F10 4 line 4 X2 Y2 2F10 4 line 5 X3 Y3 2F10 4 etc line n CURVE CURVEID TYPE CURVETITLE Repeat a new curve line n 1 X1 Y1 2F10 4 line n 2 X2 Y2 2F10 4 line n 3 X3 Y3 2F10 4 etc last line END A3 Terminate Input Where CURVE Header Required CURVE ID Load Curve Number Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 35 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY TYPE Curve Type 0 Transient Analysis 1 Stress Initialization CURVE TITLE Curve s Title User Defined X1 Y1 Curve Point 1 X2 Y2 Curve Point 2 END Header Required The following is an example of the LOAD CURVE file VPG LOAD CURVE CURVE 2 0 CURVE 2 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 1 5000 2 0000 0 0000 3 0000 0 5000 4 0000 1 5000 CURVE 4 0 CURVE 4 0 0000 2 0000 6 0000 3 5000 7 0000 1 5000 8 0000 2 0000 END RENUMBER Description This function allows user to renumber load curves Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT SHOW CURVE Description This function displays load curves Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST 2 After selecting a curve VPG displays the following curve operations These options are explained in GRAPH Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 36 eta VPG version 3
250. ast one crash tool model dummy barrier rigid wall etc During the simulation either a structure moves at a particular speed into a crash tool or a crash tool impacts the structure The displacement of the structure the acceleration or deceleration pulse the G forces on the dummy models and certain specified results are then post processed and compared with the performance criteria and legislated requirements Therefore the canned simulations have a general processing procedure From case to case the user will see variations in the components and setup procedure However the general process remains the same The user first establishes a validated structure model that includes proper mesh material properties contact definitions and correct connectivity to satisfy the given modeling guidelines The structure model is then placed in simulation position most model positions are equivalent to the vehicle design coordinate system However some are defined in an alternative testing fixture coordinate system The crash tool model is then placed in a particular location and in a certain direction In most cases the crash tool model position is given Occasionally users will have to define the location and direction if there is no default standard In occupant safety cases the dummy models are placed on the seat at the H point or a test fixture position The prescribed impact velocity and direction are given as default values according to legis
251. atabase 6 6 9 REMOVE Description This function removes elements nodes parts from the current set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part FROM type SET XXXX gt SELECT element node part 2 Once the elements nodes parts have been selected and the user has exited the REMOVE submenu VPG removes the elements nodes part from their set 6 6 10 RENUMBER SET Description This function allows the user to renumber any of the defined sets This may be performed on a single set or an all sets contained in the database Usage 1 NS VPG prompts gt SELECTED OPTIO 6 107 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 If e UTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST type ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST Once set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW type SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 6 11 REVIEW LIST Description ntering A gt ENTER NEW type SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT This prompt is repeated until all sets are given a new set ID This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is D selected the elements nodes parts of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 6 12 SHOW SET escription This function allows the user to display all or so
252. ations of events simulating the test process more accurately Prior to this time conventional CAE techniques consisted of smaller specific analyses tailored to a specific task such as NVH separate from the global system level analysis of the automobile The eta VPG developers were faced with the need for an integrated analysis that included both component level and full vehicle applications with the ability to perform real time simulations The analysis would be dynamic and nonlinear unlike the static linear analysis techniques utilized by the then current CAE practices ETA first tested this concept on simple mechanisms simulating mechanical systems such as engine connecting rod piston crankshaft systems and suspension mechanisms The mechanisms were simulated as a dynamic nonlinear system in real time events The results demonstrated that the motion and forces derived from the VPG simulation were the same as the rigid body linkage motion simulation results produced from conventional multibody dynamics software However when implementing flexible bodies FE the benefit of obtaining realistic stress and strain results of flexible components from the VPG simulation in an event based fashion produced valuable analysis data that could not be generated in traditional FEA approaches INTRODUCTION ETA engineers moved another step forward by simulating a rotating tire impact in a pothole event A tire model was developed to include a control volu
253. ayed in a pop up window LIST Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT INIT COND CARDS CFD Desc differs with CREATE Defines a new card DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those di ription This card defines initial CFD Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 129 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R INIT COND CARDS DETONATION Description This card defines points to initiate the location of high explosive detonations in part IDs that use material type 8 Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS FOAM REF GEO Description This card defines initial foam reference geometry Refer to the LS DYNA User s M INIT COND CARDS GAS MIXTURE Description anual for further description This function is used to initialize the temperature and the density of different gas MAT_GAS_MIXTURE Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description IN MOMENTUM Descripti species in IT COND CARDS on This card defines initial momentum to be deposited in solid elements Refer to the LS DYN User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS STRAIN Description A This card defines initial strain Refer to the LS
254. ays the SPC and Load sets in the selected subcases in the VPG database Usage VPG prompts gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO SHOW SE CARD LIST window SUBCASE CONTROL MODIFY SUBCASE Descripti 1 All available subcases are listed in the SUBCA on This function modifies selected subcases in the VPG database U sage gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO MODIFY All available subcases are listed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window E DEFINITION window pops up 6 9 2 LOAD Description 1 VPG prompts 2 Once the user selects a subcase to modify the NASTRAN SUBCAS This menu lists the options to configure and modify load sets in the VPG database Descriptions of the various commands in this function are provided in the following sections Usage VPG displays the following list of commands in the options area 1 2 These options are described as subsections in the following pages Description LOAD STATIC LOAD This function defines and modifies static loads The loads may be used in the subcase definition 6 135 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following TATIC LOAD CREATE Desc LOAD S ription This function defines a new load set The load set may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 mpts to select option as following When entering CREATE VPG pro PRE PROCESSOR load set number If
255. ber is less than 1 it will cause the size of rea to be reduced e g an entry of 5 will enlarge an entry of 5 will reduce the picture number is greater than 1 area to be enlarged the object in the display a the picture whereas 10 1 3 REPEAT Description This function is used in conjunction with the SCREEN AXES ROTATION and L AXES ROTATION commands to repeat the degree of rotation and to replot the geometry of a part The user may repeat this command as many times as desired 10 1 4 REVERSE ROTATION Description the VIRTUA This function works in conjunction with SCREEN AXES ROTATION and XE R A ON f rotation and to replot the geometry of a VIRTUAL A S OT TI to reverse the degree o part The user may re eat this command as many time p s as desired 10 1 5 RECALL VIEW Description This function allo e user to recall any previou ws th sly saved view VPG d iew 1 TOP VIEW REAR VIEW contains the following predefine v s 2 SIDE VIEW 3 4 ISOMETRIC VIEW 60 DEGREE ISOMETRIC 10 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Usage When the user selects any of the above views VPG re scales the displayed part 10 1 6 SAVE VIEW accordingly Description This function allows the user to save and store a desired view in the current VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER VIEW TITLE UP TO 18 CHARACTERS for the desired view RECA
256. bove commands 2 Upon selecting SPRINGBACK VPG displays a pop up window with the following selections 6 186 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Once the thickness is determined VPG displays the appro Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description o 6 14 14 PERTURBATION Description priate definition card f mand the above com This function provides a way of defining deviations from such as buckling imperfections Usage the designed structure 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 15 RAIL Description This function defines track and train property for railway applications etc Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 16 SEATBELT Description This function defines a seatbelt Usage 1 When SEATBELT is selected VPG prompts the following card options gt SELECT OPTION 6 187 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 188 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual PRE PROCESSOR Each of these seatbelt functions yields various definition cards For further description of these cards refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual
257. but may contain tetrahedral elements as well h the cylind hexagonal 7 74 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES Sphere in ALE Mesh Cylinder in ALE Mesh 7 75 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES Cube in ALE Mesh 7 8 1 3 CYLINDER CORE IN BOX Description This menu allows the user to generate a cylindrical object in an ALE mesh with the cylinder connected to the ALE elements The mesh generated will be predominantly hexagonal elements but may contain tetrahedral elements as well CUBE CORE IN BOX Description 7 8 1 4 This menu allows the user to generate a cubic object in an ALE mesh with the antly Description cylinder connected to the ALE elements The mesh generated will be predomin hexagonal elements but may contain tetrahedral elements as well 8 2 DEFINE PROPERTY 7 this function allows the user to redefine the materials of explosive and medium in the model and the properties of state equation Usage 1 2 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART After a part is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 7 76 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S CREATE a new material will be created for selected part SELECT a material will be selected for selected part rial is defined VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION MODIFY CURRENT MATERI
258. card MODIFY modify already created detonation card 7 8 5 DEFINE ALE CONTROL CARD Description this function is used to define ALE control options and output parameters Usage DATABASE_FSI ASCII file dbfsi definition user can define list and remove this CONTROL_ALE define ALE coupling control card 7 78 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES file definition here EXIT exit ALE control definition 7 8 6 EXPORT DYNA FILE Description this function is used to export the files submitted for dyna operation 7 9 DROP TEST MODULE DTM Drop Test Module is used for preparing models for drop simulations This is especially useful in the analysis of electronic products and consumer products for shock and impact The DTM module can automatically calculate the center of gravity define and modify the drop direction define the drop height initial analysis height drop acceleration and drop damping and flexibly select the drop reference point node and output control options It can also be used to create batch output of the drop test analysis files for multiple heights The rigid impact area required by the drop test as well models will be completed by DTM module automatically DTM module can quickly create simulation mode for drop and impact tests using a process guidance approach to assist the user as the contact definition of drop ls A detailed description is g
259. ces with respect to any axi g e X Y or Z U V or W directions A scale factor less than 1 will e surface Usage l or local using magnification factors in t factor greater than 1 will magnify the surface whereas a scale reduce th PRE PROCESSOR e surfaces local efer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 for a thorough explanation of this ure efined VPG prompts 6 2 15 SU De cription 1 VPG prompts the user to select th 2 Once the surfaces have been selected VPG prompts the user to create a coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system R proced 3 Once the desired coordinate system has been d gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTOR OR E TO EXIT This scales the surface RF NORMAL ON OFF toggle s This function controls the on and off display of normal vectors on a surface The n a orm l vector below is shown at the center of the surface 6 23 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 16 SPLI D r T esc iption This function a ti llows the user to split selected surfaces in several different ways All the op ons for splitting surfaces are addressed below Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface ce VPG prompts SPLIT DEFAULT IS SECTION LINE VPG splits the surface once the user selects the second boundary point RESPACE U V LINES gt ENTER THE NUMBERS OF UV LINES N1
260. ch function is given in the following sections 6 7 1 ANNOTATE NODE ANNOTATE CREATE LIST REMOVE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS RENUMBER SET PRE PROCESSOR SET ON OFF PART VIEW EXIT etailed descr Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT NODE EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 2 CREATE NODE Description gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX This function allows the user to generate sets with unique node and element ID numbers The nodes may be included in multiple sets Usage 6 109 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW NODE SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid the user enters a node set ID number already assigned VPG returns the t ODE SE The user may press the left most mouse button or N to select the node nearest r u creating a node set VPG gt NODE xxxx ALREADY PICKED e e en d prompts gt X If the user selects ABORT VPG deletes the node set and returns the user to the NODE SET submenu Description If promp gt N T xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES to the cu sor If the ser selects t
261. cription Thi tacts Usage s function renumbers the ID for a selected contact or for all con 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS 2 If the user enters AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts ENTER FIRST CONTACT ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If the user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each contact The following prompt will be repeated for each contact in the database gt ENTER NEW CONTACT ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values 4 If the user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT ONE CONTACT Once the user selects one contact card VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW CONTACT ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 13 7 REVERSE NORMAL Description gt This function allows the user to reverse the contact orientation normal for all contacts 6 165 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 The CONTACT CARD LIST pops up and simultaneously VPG prompts gt PICK CONTACT TO REVERSE NORMAL Once the user selects one contact card VPG prompts gt PICK CONTACT PORTION TO REVERSE NORMAL 2 After ts MASTER or SLAVE VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 6 13 8 SHOW Description the user selec This function shows the contact area with filled color Upon selection of the SHOW command the CONTACT CARD LIST is displayed When the desired interface is selected the contact area will be shown
262. cription This toggle switch controls the display of element type identifiers If the option is turned on a symbol for the 1 D element types will be plotted at the center of the element to indicate the element type The identifier symbols for the various elements are listed in the following table Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 39 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY The default for this option is off MENU LAYOUT Description This function allows the user to change Menu to VPG or FEMB style based on the user s preference MENU POSTITION Description This function allows the user to change Menu position to left or right hand side of the display window based on the user s preference CHANGE COLOR MAP Description This function allows the user to change the default colors of the COLOR BAR for plotting of part color or contour color ELEMENT SIZE Description This function allows the user to preset a default element size before generating the 2 LINE 3 LINE 4 LINE or SURFACE mesh SHADING OPTIONS Description This function offers the following 3 options for shading a part or a model Options are GOURAUD SHADING smooth shading FLAT SHADING NO EDGE FLAT SHADING W EDGE FLAT SHADING W FEATURE LINE ELEMENT TYPE ANALYSIS PROGRAM IDENTIFIER SYMBOL Beam LS DYNA amp NASTRAN B CROD Truss NASTRAN T CTUBE Pipe NASTRAN P Rigid Element LS DYNA amp NASTRAN R Spotweld LS DYNA W Discrete LS DYNA D
263. ct two nodes to define a vector SHELL NORMAL The head will align with the normal of the element selected SHELL REVERSE NORMAL The head will align with the reverse normal direction of the element selected 7 57 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Figure 15 An Example of a Generated Rigid Wall Bumper Impact Model De 7 4 7 7 BUMPER IMPACT OFFSET scription This function will create a rigid pendulum in the front or rear of the vehicle sage U PG prompts gt ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION VPG MODULES 1 V 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE PENDULUM Select CURSOR AT ELEM ENT default and select an element from the part as the target tion posi 7 58 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Figure 16 An Example of a Generated 0 Degree Pendulum Bumper Impact Description 7 4 7 8 BUMPER IMPACT PENDULUM This function will create a rigid pendulum in front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION VPG MODULES 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE BUMPER prompts 3 VPG gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST BUMPER There are four approaches to define the normal direction 7 59 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector NODES VECTOR Select two nodes
264. ction 6 13 of this manual 8 2 9 DEFINE CURVE Description The DEFINE CURVE function on the ANALYSIS menu allows users to define load curves for use in LS DYNA analyses This function is described in detail in Section 10 4 8 of this manual 8 2 10 DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS Description This function allows the user to define the analysis unit and the portion of the model that is to be exported into an LS DYNA input file The user may also add comments to the model describing the Analysis Title Engineer s name and the Project Name The user may also select the Output Requ rement for Discrete Beam button which will automatically define b ents in the model This will result in the output data for these elements to be placed in the ELOUT file i eam and node sets for all Discrete Beam elem 8 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION Figure 8 3 Write DYNA Input File Window 8 2 11 RUN ANALYSIS Description The user may elect to execute the analysis directly from within the VPG user interface By selecting this option prior to selecting the OK button the user will generate a model file according to the defined DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS If the user wishes to create an LS DYNA input file for later execution the WRITE INPUT FILE option should be selected The user mu NA and a valid license for this option to execute properly A ed and an interactive LS DYNA analysis will be started This will not af 8 2 12 WRITE
265. ction as in the COMBINE LINE function in the n The user must select this option before selecting the desired INE SURFACE or counterclockwise direction prompts CT 3 LINES gt SELE LINE S LINE sectio lines for 3 L The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section Once the lines have been selected and a surface is created Note Select lines in a clockwise 6 20 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Note The direction of the surface normal dictates the direction of the plate element normals 6 2 7 4 LINE SURFACE Description This function generates a surface in an area defined by 4 selected lines The created surface is included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES EGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for T e s prior to executing this function by using SHOW n Note ote ent normals 6 2 Desc o LINE S for the 4 4 LINE MESH he user may check the lin LINE in the LINE sectio Once the lines have been selected and a surface is created Select lines in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction The
266. ction defi ndary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s nes USA bou 6 123 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Manual f 6 8 2 CONST S Descrip or further description RAINT CARD tion The functions in the CONSTRAINT CARDS menu provide a means of e degrees of freedom in constraining th model parts Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREATE command differs with DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window Y Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT CON TRAINT CARDS ADAPTIVITY Descriptio respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE Defines a new card MODIF S n This function defines adaptivity 6 124 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 When ow pops up nition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRA Description s up nition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRA Description CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED ADAPTIVITY DEFINITION wind The preceding commands yield varying defi The preceding commands yield var
267. ction only works during Contour Animation with ELEMENT R D ESULT options selected 9 9 10 DISTANCE CURVE escription This function allows the user to plot the distance result in a time history graph his distance can be node to node to element to part and to plane The function only works uring Contour Animation with ELEMENT RESULT options selected T d Usage The user first selects a node then select another node an element a plane or a part last click EXECUTE the distance will be plotted in the graph 9 9 11 SCREEN CURVE OPERATION Description This function allows the user to do some operations to curves last plotted User can on of hide show delete and export curves in the list f 9 38 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 9 1 PART DISTANCE Description POST PROCESSING 2 This function will show the distance of source part from destination part Us ge a select a source part and a destination part and then click button START the distance of source part from destination part will be shown as contour After that user can clear export and list value of this contour 9 39 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 9 INTERFACE CHECK Description 13 PART This function allows the user check interference between parts Interference elements will be shown highlighted Us e ag After selecting parts click button APPLY the inte
268. cutable file Once the VPG software is activated the VPG Open File window is displayed for the user to OPEN or CREATE a new VPG database 1 See the Open File window below name of a be prompted to do so 3 Figure 3 1 1 Open File Window 2 The user would either select the name of a previously saved file or enter the new file in the Dialogue window The recommended practice is to add the extension vpg to a newly created file 3 If creating a NEW file the user would Figure 3 1 2 Create New File Prompt 3 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 3 G e t t i n g S t a r t e d GETTING STARTED 4 The user will be prompted to select the analysis program desired Figure 3 1 3 Select Analysis Type analysis program selected will set defaults for the eta VPG session to generate either YNA or NASTRAN cards 5 The user will also be prompted to select the Unit System desired The LS D Figure 3 1 4 Unit System lected The unit system will be stored in the database as the default value setting The user will now 3 Follo ules in the VPG pre processor that allow the user to create a VPG model in an automated procedure A de ting a Front Suspension Model g a front suspension model from the SUSPENSION MENU The r determines the desired optional components such as stabilizers and steering system ext the user will be prompted to edit the default spring stiffness damping coefficients extra lt mass center of
269. d as the default value for future card ed To edit the time interval for subsequently defined cards the user must click ce on the card to turn it on and again to have it displayed A YES in the right column of the DATABASE ASCII indicates that this type of card Ref DATABASE DATABASE B Description The user then selects the type of A o be edited The time interval s defin on has been defined A NO in the right column indicates that this type of card has not been defined er to e e th LS DYNA User s Manual for further description of th efinition cards ASCII d INARY The definition cards in the BINARY subsection specify the BINARY database output files Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays the DATABASE BINARY CARD and e user then selects the type of BINARY card to define VPG displays the definition to be edited The time interval once entered will be used as the default value for fu To edit the time interval for subsequently defined cards the user m card to turn it on and again to have it displayed A YES in the right column of the DATABASE BINARY CARD indicates that this type of card has been defined A NO in the right column indicates that this type of card has not been defined Refer to the LS DYNA User Manual for further description of the DATABASE BINARY definition cards prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DEFINE 2 Th card ture cards defined ust click once on the s
270. d be less th Drop height tak This function is used to add and control the output file options The user can select the desired nodes and elements to output the desired file The types of the output files are Animation file d3plot Node output file nodout Element output file elout Total energy message of the model glstat Material absorption capability matsum Resultant contact force during impact rcforc Contact energy message sleout 7 81 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 9 6 RUN IT NOW Description This function enables the user to output the analysis file and submit it to LS DYNA immediately for simulation 7 9 7 BATCH OUTPUT Description This function is used to output a series of calculation output files from different drop heights or drop angles with other simulation parameters unchanged Multiple simulations can be completed at one time The output files will be named using a naming convention such as DT VPG MODULES Mdeck001 dyn DTMdeck002 dyn etc 7 9 8 TOOLKIT Description These functions are used to change parameters and analysis setup parameters Usage RECALCULATE CG recalculate the model s center of gravity 7 82 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES REMOVE DAMPING remove the previously defined damping in DTM module 7 10 HEEDS HEEDS is an optimization software developed and maintained by Red Cedar T
271. d parts based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART SET gt SELECTED FIRST PART SET AS TARGET Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list 2 VPG prompts gt SELECTED THE PART SET TO REPLACE THE TARGET Select another part set from the part set list to replace the part set that has been selected 3 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N YES The target part set will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE DEFAULT VALUE 10 Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts the nodes index on the old parts based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts 6 204 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES Chapter 7 VPG MODULES VPG MODULES includes the following sections ROAD MENU SUSPENSION MENU TIRE MENU SAFETY MENU ALE FSI and DROP TEST DTM Menu The functions in these menus allow the user to quickly and easily construct the components required for proving ground sim lations and in the case of the SAFETY MENU import tools and set boundary conditions for use in vehicle impact and safety simulations Chapter 7 u 7 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 1 ROAD DEFINITION The ROAD DEFINITION menu all
272. ded in the window is displayed in full screen screen The user presses the left mous n and drags th FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines the area of zoom window by clicking and holding the left mouse button in d drawing a circle around the interested area When the left button is hat had been circled is displayed full screen the display area an released the area t FILL This command rescales the model to include all entities belonging to parts that are currently to ati odel fits the viewing area of the turned on FILL au m cally zooms in or out until the m screen ACTIVE WINDOW all s e u r t on of the displayed geometry model for more detailed viewing or editing For a detailed description see section 10 1 16 VIEW ACTIVE WINDOW This command ow th se o isolate a porti 10 12 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY REDRAW VPG is currently designed to update the screen after each command Occasionally the use of specific commands requires that images be updated with an additional step e g when the user operates the dynamic zoom at the same time that the element normals are displayed he or she must activate the REDRAW command to resize the arrows that represent the element normals CLEAR s th us r to ve such as those that are the co ID ELEMENT DEFINE Allow e e remo the highlighted entities from the screen made with mmands SHOW LINE BOUNDARY CHECK TITLE etc CLEAR NOD
273. defined suspension mo m the VPG database dels STF part definition fro Usage 1 VPG prompts gt MODIFY STF_PART gt SELECT PART BY SELECTING AN ELEMENT THE PART OR SELECTING FROM THE PART LIST Once a STF part from the suspension is selected the definition window is displayed as shown 7 21 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S he user has finished altering the data select OK to accept this 7 2 11 VISUALIZE SUSPENSION Description When t change or select cancel to quit VPG MODULES This option allows the user to visualize a suspension and change part color VPG will create temporary surfaces that can be shaded for visualization purposes These temporary surfaces are deleted upon exiting this function The user ma from the men selects the part to modify from a screen selection or from the part listing The n color is then selected from the color bar displayed in the Display Window This function is terminated by selecting the EXIT command Usage y change the suspension component colors by selecting CHANGE PART COLOR u The user then ew 1 VPG prompts 7 22 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 2 12 LOADING ANALYSIS Description This option allows the user to define an LS DYNA file to analyze STF or XML suspension motion VPG MODULES 7 2 12 1 CREATE Description This option allows the user to create boundary cond
274. dels 500 000 1 million elements 768 megabytes RAM Super large models 1 million to 4 millions 1024 megabytes RAM Minimum Load space requirement 256 megabytes Recommended processor Pentium 4 APPENDIX A APPENDIX B B 1 eta VPG 3 3 APPENDIX B APPENDIX B SUPPORTED IGES ENTITY TYPES NAME TYPE Null Entity 0 Circular Arc Entity 100 Composite Curve Entity 102 Conic Arc Entity 104 Copious Data Entity 106 Plane Entity 108 Line Entity 110 Parametric Spline Curve Entity 112 Parametric Spline Surface Entity 114 Point Entity 116 Ruled Surface Entity 118 Surface of Revolution Entity 120 Tabulated Cylinder Entity 122 Transformation Matrix Entity 124 Rational B Spline Curve Entity 126 Rational B Spline Surface Entity 128 Offset Surface Entity 140 Boundary Entity 141 Curve on a Parametric Surface Entity 142 Bounded Surface Entity 143 Trimmed Parametric Surface Entity 144 Subfigure Definition Entity 308 Associativity Instance Entity 402 Property Entity 406 Singular Subfigure Instance Entity 408 APPENDIX C C 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C APPENDIX C VPG version 3 2 RADIOSS LS DYNA NASTRAN Conversion August 2007 OVERVIEW The RADIOSS interface was originally released in VPG 2 0 as a complete RADIOSS interface supporting fixed format input files from RADIOSS V2 1 V2 2 V2 3 V3 1 V4 1 and V4 4 and has the ability to write
275. dges of the multiple surfaces unless the intersection of the multiple surfaces is not connected properly 2 VP gt Checks the continuity of the displayed elements and highlights all o MULTIPLE SURFACE non inter G prompts GENERATE PLOTEL ELEMENTS FOR FREE EDGES 3 If the user selects PLOTEL ELEMENTS VPG prompts RT Y N YES NO 4 If th selects YES the PART DEFINITION window pops up d make the part current lects CLEAR Note VPG will display the boundary of the outer most edges of a solid element structure Users should also gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS IN A NEW PA e user VPG will both add plotels to the part an The boundary will remain highlighted until the user se 6 90 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R use the CHECK FREE SURFA CE command for solid element structures that are described in this section 6 5 5 CHECK Description PRE PROCESSOR ANGLE This f ction checks the minimum values of the interior angles for shell and solid elements VPG checks and color fills any interior angles that are less than the default values Users have t Usage un he option to adjust the default values as desired 1 The ANGLE CHECK window pops up and the user sees the following figure Once parameters are defined click Check ents pass the interior angle check VPG echoes the following message gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK If
276. e of CREA 1 3 After parts click EXIT VPG prompts CREATE Description After define the section solid and mat100 card VPG prompts gt PLEASE ENTER THE DIAMETER OF SPOTWELD 2 After entering the value VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART selecting gt PICK SPOTWELD LOCATION Click cursor on the screen MAT100 brick spotweld is created The contact between spotwelds and elements they connect are created automatically MAT100 BY VIP FILE LS DYNA This section covers the options for the MAT100 BY VIP FILE subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS The vip to be read includes information about spotweld location Usage 6 50 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 V 2 After selecting the spotweld type a file dialogue pops up open a vip file MAT100 spotweld is created The contact between spotwelds and elements they connect are created automatically PG prompts to select spotweld type as beam or solid CREATE SPH GENERATE METHOD LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the SPH GENERATE METHOD subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage e methods to create SPH elements 1 VPG offers thre 2 gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES IS Afte pts Y Z AXIS After entering the values VPG prompts gt ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE e values VPG prompts NTO NEW PART YES NO created part NO SPH elements w
277. e different techniques used in creating a VPG simulation and how to use various modeling functions The Tutorials also serve as a training guide for new users to gain experience with VPG techniques methodology and software In addition to the eta VPG Manuals and Tutorials the solver related features pertaining to eta VPG s dynamic simulations can be found in the LS DYNA User s Manual The LS DYNA User s Manual is the documentation for the LS DYNA software developed and maintained by Livermore Software Technology Corporation www lstc com 1 2 The History of eta VPG The eta VPG software has its origins in the automotive CAE community where the need for efficient finite element modeling tools emerged in the mid to late 1980 s These tools were needed to address the drive for shortened vehicle development schedules and the desire to implement CAE simulations in the design process ETA had been an early innovator in the area of finite element pre amp post processing developing and commercializing the eta FEMB software in the mid 80 s This software met the needs of the automotive CAE engineers and was quickly adopted to help the transformation of 1 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n the automotive CAE community As the need for more complex simulations arose there was a simultaneous increase in low cost high speed computing capacity This provided the opportunity to create system level simul
278. e foll ng are working definitions used throughout this section of VPG Do in nterior of the outer boundary and t ries as well as the boundary curves Ou r Boundary One boundary that is situated within the domain the surface that is es the boundary curve of the domain Inner Boundary Any number of inner boundaries including zero The set of inner a The curves as well as their interiors are mutually disjointed b Each curve lies in the interior of the outer boundary owi ma The trimmed surface of the common region of the i he exterior of the inner bounda te to be trimmed In particular it describ boundaries satisfies two criteria 6 18 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 1 BOUNDARY LINE Description This function creates a line on the boundary of a selected surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen gt SELECT SURFACE FOR BOUNDARY LINE 2 VPG c it in the current part Note The bou e with line meshing 6 2 2 COPY Description reates a boundary line around the selected surface and includes ndary line should be split if it is intended for us This Usage function copies selected surface s to a new location 1 VPG pro surfaces to copy 2 VPG pro cal coordinate system The user also has the option to sel fer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 Once the desire ned VPG pro
279. e global X axis when the cursor is moved up or down VIRTUAL Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down VIRTUAL Z ROTATION displayed model will dy The namically rotate about the global Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down SCREEN X ROTATION splayed model The di will dynamically rotate about the screen X axis when the cursor is moved up r own The screen X axis is the horizontal axis located at the center of the graphics display in o w d dow SCREEN Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Y axis when the cursor is moved up r down The screen Y axis is the vertical axis located at the center of the graphics display window o SCREEN Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down The screen Z axis is the normal direction of the screen located at the center of the graphics display window FREE ROTATION This function is a combination of Screen X and Screen Y rotation Moving the mouse up down manipulates the Screen X rotation Moving the mouse left right manipulates Screen Y rotation Moving the mouse diagonally combines the rotations of both directions Click the left mouse button to stop the rotation The user may activate this function by pressing Control and left mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse button to stop the rotation
280. e loads due to a prescribed base acceleration or angular velocity using global axes directions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS BRODE Description This card defines pressure loads due to explosion Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS DENSITY Description This card defines density versus depth for gravity loading Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS GRAVITY PART Description This card defines gravity for individual parts Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS HEAT GENERATION Description This card defines solid elements or solid element sets with heat generation Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS MASK Description This card defines mask load Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS MOTION NODE Description This card defines a concentrated nodal force or moment to a node based on the motion of another node Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS MOVING PRESSURE Description This card defines moving pressure loads to a surface Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS NODE Description This card defines a concentrated nodal force to a node or a set of nodes Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 132 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p
281. e m 1 PG gt HING FEATURE LINES V prompts SEARC EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu Enter CHECK AND REPAIR 6 101 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR The MESH QUALITY PARAMETERS window appears 3 The user may define parameters Upon clicking Check VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE WILL INITIATE DYNAMIC REPAIR Enter SELECT MESH 2 VPG prompts After entering DONE the MESH QUALITY PARAMETERS window pops up Ente ET 2 The DYNAMIC REPAIR OPTION menu pops up as following gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED XXXXXX CHECK gt SELECT ELEMENTS r S DYNAMIC REPAIR VE MODE VPG prompts T NODE MOVE MODE 3 If entering NODE MO gt PLEASE SELEC 4 If entering STEP VALUE VPG prompts T STEP VALUE DEFAULT 1 0 6 5 25 SU De gt PLEASE INPU MMARY CHECK scription The SUMMARY CHECK function performs a comprehensive model check on the current elements in the model database using user specified parameters The results of the SUMMARY CHECK function are displayed as a table of model quality parameters by parts as a percentage of elements passing each modeling criteria value 6 102 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR This data may be exported into an ASCII file for model documentation Usage 1 VPG prompts ECK CATEGORY Simultaneously
282. e page orientation as landscape or portrait 5 10 4 COLOR TYPE Select the drop list beside Color Type to select a color type 5 10 5 POSTSCRIPT There are two levels Level 2 is the default setting Level 1 should be selected when using an older model PostScript printer 5 10 6 RUN LENGTH ENCODE This option reduces the Postscript file size Usually the reductions are dramatic for PS Level 1 this is automatically turned off 5 10 7 ASCII85 ENCODE This option reduces the Postscript file size Usually the reductions are dramatic for PS Level 1 this is automatically turned off FILE MANAGER 5 15 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r FILE MANAGER DING OPTION 5 10 9 REVERSE VIDE This function reverses the black and white colors image in some cases This feature affects only the background of the image 5 10 10 BOUNDING BOX This function draws a line frame around picture s border 5 10 11 TIME STAMP This function prints the current time at the lower right corner of the picture file 5 10 12 FILE NAME This function prints the file name at the lower right corner of the picture 5 10 13 eta VPG This function prints eta VPG logo at the lower left corner of the picture 5 10 14 SELECT REGION This function allows the user to define a graphic region by using a drawing window Only the graphics within the region will be written to the graphics file If the option is off default the
283. e plot animation Only one component may be selected per plot animation The component types displayed in the window are determined by the types STRESS STRAIN or DISPALCEMENT TRAIN is selected the supported components are listed below c The CURRENT COMPONET WI If STRESS S SIGMA_XX 9 50 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING SIGMA_YY SIGMA_ZZ SIGMA_XY SIGMA_YZ SIGMA_ZX BEND_MONMENT_MXX BEND_MONMENT_MYY BEND_MONMENT_MZZ SHEAR_RES_QXX SHEAR_RES_QYY L_RES_NXY THICKNESS EPSON_XX EPSON_YY EPSON_ZZ EPSON_XY EPSON_YZ EPSON_ZX NERGY PRIN_STRESS1 PRIN_STRESS2 MAX_SHEAR_STRESS elected the supported components are listed below NORMAL_RES_NXX NORMAL_RES_NYY NORMA E MAX_VONMISES MEAN_STRESS PRIN_STRESS3 PRIN_STRAIN1 PRIN_STRAIN2 THINNING NORM_STRAIN If DISPLACEMENT is s DISPLACEMENT_X DISPLACEMENT_Y DISPLACEMENT_Z DISPLACEMENT_TOTAL 9 51 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY 9 11 5 LAYER Description For LS DYNA results this feature allows the user to select a specific element layer within the element results to display Refer to NIP number of integration point in LS DYNA menu Usage The user may select the drop down to display the available layers in the model results If no layer data is available in the results file this option will not be active 9 11 6 SCALE FACTOR Description This option allows users to scale the displacem
284. e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES POINTS UPERELE des t nodes rand he node and SUPE MENT I D numbers EXIT returns the user to the SUPERELEMENT OPTIONS menu ALL NODES displays the S MENT ID numbers of the no The user may selec omly with the cursor to display t RELE 6 191 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR The func modify mass properties in the database It is necessary sometimes to add masses to represent nonstructural components or to modify masses to c e gravity of the whole body The functions in this menu are organized 6 16 MASS MENU LS DYNA tions of the MASS MENU are designed to add and hange the center of th as follows ction is given i A detailed description of each fun n the following sections 6 16 1 RE Description AD FROM FILE This option allows the user to add mass elements to the database from a file that stores the mass information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit doe t the prompt reads 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU Note All mass elements appear as small circles 6 16 2 Descriptio 2 If the file s not exis gt CA
285. e selected parameters of the solver The default solver code for VPG is DYNA The MATERIAL PROPERTY and ELEMENT PROPERTY menus change according to the analysis program Note VPG is unable to convert existing properties into the selected solver format AUTO SEGMENT END toggle Description This option allows the user to designate the end points of line segments to serve as control points Note This function is used in conjunction with CONTROL POINT MESH VPG prompts the user to select control points on lines that are joined through the line segment option Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 38 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY CONTROL POINT MESH toggle Description This function pre selects the points on a line for the desired node locations associated with the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S mesh programs FLANGE MESH toggle Description This option turns on the ability of the automeshing routines to support a flange mesh option The Flange Mesh option allows users to identify flange areas of spot welded assemblies and requires that either 2 or 3 elements be placed on the width of the flange CORNER BIAS MESH toggle Description This option allows the user to enter an element bias factor 0 625 to 1 6 relative to the selected corner of the line data that is to be modeled This function multiplies each adjacent element that is created from the selected corner by the bias factor Note A bias factor greater than 1 0 generates proportio
286. e to be defined at the time the part is created 3 If PART COMPOSITE OPTION is selected VPG displays the PART DEFINITION window as below Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 18 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY 3 After clicking OK VPG displays following options The user can select these two options to define PART_COMPOSITE or PART_COMPOSITE_CONTACT Please refer to DYNA manual for reference Note The new part is displayed as current 10 3 8 CURRENT Description This function changes the current part All lines surfaces and elements that the user creates are automatically included in the current part The name of the current part is displayed in its part color in the lower right corner of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NEW CURRENT PART gt PICK A LINE L ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART The user selects a target part to make current Once the user selects the target part VPG makes the part current and displays the part name in the lower right hand corner of the screen The user can also access the CURRENT PART function by clicking on the current part name displayed in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW 10 3 9 DELETE Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 19 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY Description This function allows the user to delete a part with its associated surfaces lines and elements The nodes of a part that are selected for deletion become unreferenced and appear as white asterisks
287. e user to create a local coordinate system d coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read LANKS will default to 1 EXAMPLES 1 1 1 will reflect the selected nodes across the XZ plane Y direction All Y components will be multiplied by 1 2 1 0 5 will magnify the X components by two times their size and reflect the nodes across the YZ plane X direction These coordinates will not affect the Y rink the Z components by half their size and re DO enu 6 4 1 R Descriptio PRE PROCESSOR 1 gt SELECT NODE Once the user selects the desired nodes and clicks DONE VPG prompts gt CR ICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN 2 Once the desire gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTORS All real numbers are valid ZEROS or B components but they will sh flect the nodes on the original side of the XY plane NE returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS m 7 T ANSFORM n This function translates or rotates the selected nodes to new locations Usage 1 Click TR N A SFORM VPG prompts 6 85 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R If c ck POINT TO POINT go to step 5 2 If lick prompts L COORDINATES e desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the lick LCS go to step 2 if cli c LCS VPG gt CREATE LOCA gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN ompts the user to create a local coordinate system VPG pr
288. echnologies which allows users to perform multi objective optimizations VPG provides a set of tools which allows users to define optimization goals and design variables These values are then included in the input file and can be used by HEEDS to identify and use these variables in optimization studies The HEEDS menu in VPG supports definition of HEEDS discrete sets distributions variables tag and output HEEDS files For tagging it now only supports LS DYNA material and section For specific information on the HEEDS program and definition requirements for these functions the user is directed to the HEEDS SHERPA User Manual 7 10 1 DISCRETE SET Description This function helps user to define DISCRETE SETS for HEEDS optimization analysis CREATE create a discrete set DELETE delete defined discrete sets LIST list defined discrete sets MODIFY modify defined discrete sets EXIT exit and returns to the upper menu 7 10 2 DISTRIBUTION 7 83 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES Description This function helps user to define DISTRIBUTIONS for HEEDS optimization analysis DELETE delete defined distributions LIST list defined distributions MODIFY modify defined d CREATE create a distribution istributions EXIT exit and returns to the upper menu 7 10 3 VARIABLE Description This function helps user to define a VARIABLE for HEEDS optimiza
289. ed from the starting end of line 1 to the starting end of line 2 This pattern is repeated N1 times along line 1 The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 with the right hand rule The created elements are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified be re proceeding with this function rn of N1 N2 N3 by N4 quadrilateral elements will be generated where N1 is nts along the directi ction of the secon fo Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines r 4 LINE MESH The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE section prompt will read N3 N4 ater than one for the number of elements along the selected lines for the 4 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines fo LINE in the 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N1 Any positive integer gre 6 64 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR N2 Any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines teger value for the side opposite N1 where N1 is not greater than 2 N3 and N3 is not greater than 2 N1 10 10 or 10 10 11 14 ACCEPTABLE Once the desired element N1 N2 N3 N4 is entered
290. eeds Element orientation size skew connectivity and interior angles may be compared to the sp iteria Elements can be checked individually or for the entire model After a model check function is performed an interactive inquiry function allows the user to pick individual element y 5 MODEL CHECKER functions in the MODEL CHECKER menu validate the VPG models The values for model dation are set with defaults in VPG ecified cr s for the calculated qualit PRE PROCESSOR A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 5 1 AUTO NORMAL Desc on ripti This function sets the direction of the displayed plate element normal to a select ent The element normal is calculated by using a right hand rule ed reference plate elem 6 88 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR as applied h ode 3 etc to establish the direction of the normal Usage to t e element numbering node 1 node 2 n 1 V gt SELECT PART FOR AUTO NORMAL PG prompts 2 User will nt for a reference normal The selected el tion VPG prompts gt O normals will be made consistent with a referenced ent normal If normals are reversed for some elements VPG ayed element normals will be reversed according to the ed element normal time is recommended Parts that branch off or are separated do not always get adjusted properly Description b el
291. efault drop ration lue acceleration Other user defined drop accele Drop Height set drop height va 7 80 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES The Pick 7 9 3 DAM Descriptio Reference Point Node select reference point node to determine the drop height The vity select center of gravity as reference Center of Gra Lowest Node select the lowest node in model as reference Node user pick a node as reference PING n This function enables the user to define the damping during the model drop process The damping can be constant or be defined as a time varying function by curve 7 9 4 ANALYSIS CONTROL Description This function allows the user to define the initial analysis height If the initial analysis height is less than the drop height DTM module will automatically calculate the initial velocit eginning of the analysis and calculate the total time spent when the mo nitial analysis height to the floor y of the model at the b del dropped from the i Simulation Start From define initial analysis height note that this value an or equal to the drop height e drop height as initial analysis height Specified Height user define initial analysis height Total Time time needed from initial analysis height to the floor Steps in d3plot files steps during simulation Steps in time ASCII files steps during simulation 7 9 5 TIME HISTORY OPTION Description shoul
292. either a material point or a spatial point into an 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description EFINE Description 6 14 7 D The DEFINE definition cards allow the user to define boxes coordinate systems load c Usage urves tables and orientation vectors for various uses 1 E ECT OPTION VPG prompts gt S L 6 176 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R DEFINE ALEBAG Description Defines information about the Lagrangian airbag structure Usage PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 2 Select an option VPG prompts to select following option CREATE This function creates an ALEBAG card DELETE This function deletes already created ALEBAG cards LIST This function lists already created ALEBAG cards in pop up window MODIFY Allows user to modify already created ALEBAG cards BOX DEFINE 6 177 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Description Defines a specific box shaped volume from two corner points specified in global coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND CREATE w box after the user enters a box ID number ts or xyz This function deletes selected boxes Boxes can be selected via the following commands CURSOR AT BOX KEY IN BOX ID MULTI POINT REGION SELECT ALL BOXES
293. eling software for the construction and results display of finite element models This module allows users to import CAD data construct CAD data import existing FE models and construct the geometry and mesh required for finite element analysis All boundary conditions and material properties may also be created in this module Output of the model in various finite element solver formats is available VPG Structure contains many special features designed specifically for system level or full vehicle analysis These features allow for easy modeling of joints and bushings finite element meshes boundary conditions materials properties suspension system components tire models and road surface models VPG Safety was introduced in release 2 0 of eta VPG This module is targeted at LS DYNA users who wish to construct vehicle impact and occupant safety simulations This module is based on two integral sub components a crash tool library and the test procedures associated 1 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n with a specific governmental regulation The Crash Tool Library contains the dummy or barrier needed to perform a specific analysis For instance a European Side Impact test requires an EEC Side Impact Barrier and a EUROSID dummy model These are combined with the testing procedure vehicle velocity etc and measurement criteria to establish a process VPG Safety follows that process to set up the simu
294. eme ements will display their current normal direc e prompted to select a part or an IS N RMAL DIRECTION ACCEPTABLE Y N YES All selected element elem displays gt NORMAL REVERSED FOR XXXX ELEMENTS NO All displ referenc Note Selecting one part at a 6 5 2 AUTO ORIENT SOLID This function identifies displays and adjusts any solid elements hexa or tetra U which due to element connectivity have a non positive volume to a positive volume sage 1 AUTO ORIENT SOLID lects AUTO ORIENT SOLID no selection options are e program automatically adjusts the display of solid element ormals to a positive volume reversed will highlight as they are checked off The user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu If no elements are reversed the following message will be returned gt ALL SOLID ELEMENTS PASS CHECK No changes occur and the user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu When the user se rovided Th p n If elements are reversed the following message will be returned gt ORIENTATION REVERSED FOR xxxx ELEMENTS The elements that are Note The user may reverse the element normals by executing the REVERSE NORMAL command in the ELEMENT OPTIONS menu 6 5 3 ASPECT RATIO Description This function allows the user to check the aspect ratio of the displayed plate and solid elements The aspect ratio is the ratio of the longest side to the shortest side of an element In VPG the default
295. en displaying a model the default value is Edge color Setting f the edge of model when rendering the default color is white Background color Setting the background color of Graphic Display Window the default Xor Plotter Styler Setting the Xor Plotter style the default style is GDI source Second Render Setting the second render on off the default type is off NVIDIA Quadro FX series high performance graphic cards require this option er to work properly Debug Setting the mode of version debug on off the default mode is off 9 6 2 WINDOW PARAMETER Description s of colo 16 the color o color is black Light Source Type Setting the type of light source the default type is local light set to ON in ord The parame ontrols the location LEFT or RIGHT of the CONTROL WINDOW Usage ter LAYOUT TYPE c Default setting is reen The user may change the p r to LEFT to place the CONTROL WINODW on the left side of the screen 9 6 3 PRODUCT PARAMETER Des on the RIGHT side of the sc aramete cription The parameters in this group are used to customize the product parameters Usage Product Name Setting the product of Pre Processor of eta There are two kinks of product one is DYNAFORM and another is VPG The co function icons in the Control Window is different b NAFORM and VPG The default is DYNAFORM Extended GUI Setting the extended GUI on off the default setting is on 9 6 4 DIRECTORY Descripti
296. en or closed PRE PROCESSOR VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE YES generates a trimmed surface NO T RFACE REJECT LAST POINT ption This function deselects points when defining a trim line TRIM SU Description RFACE DONE CLOSED This function d fines a closed curve on a selected surface After determining the fir selected linked D e surface type of curve and points this function connects the points closing the curve with the st and last points 6 2 22 UNTRIM SURFACE escription This function removes all holes on the selected surface Once the surface is elected all holes on the surface are removed s 6 31 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface 2 Once the surface is selected VPG prompts YES If there is no hole on selected surface VPG prompts gt SURFACE IS UNTRIM SURFACE 6 2 E Description gt KEEP THE TRIM LINES NO 23 MIDDLE SURFAC This function creates a middle surface in a solid part and places this surface in a new pa Usage rt 1 VPG prompts utomatically 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE After surfaces are selected VPG generates middle surfaces a TOGGLE ON OFF MID SURFACES display on off generated middle HER SURFACES display on off surfaces except rfaces CES select two surfaces to generate
297. ends using the extension lcr for this command 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER DATA TIME amp VALUE FOR POINT XXXX OR END Where XXXX is the point number and the input format is TIME VALUE 3 VPG displays the curve operations Figure 10 4 8 2 Curves Operations Menu DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete load curves Usage Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 34 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY 1 VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE 2 EXIT deletes the selected load curves from the database ERASE UNREF CURVE Description This function will delete all functions that have not been used in model LIST Description This function lists the available load curves in the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST MODIFY Description This function allows the user to quickly modify points on a defined curve Usage 1 VPG lists the curves in the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CURVE FROM CURVE LIST 2 After selecting the curve the CURVE DEFINITION CARD appears allowing the user to edit the curve data READ CURVE Description This function imports existing curve data into the VPG database Usage 1 VPG displays the VPG FILE MENU allowing the user to enter the curve cur file 2 Once the curve file is selected and the data is read in VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST The user has the choice of selecting the curves before they are plotted Note The load curve datab
298. ent results for the animation By default the scale factor is set to 1 0 Usage The user may type a value into the data field when the animation is stopped or prior to starting the animation This value will be applied after the PLAY icon is selected 9 11 7 REFERENCE FRAME Description This option allows the user to define an animation frame for which the stress or strain value will be subtracted from all subsequent frames of the animation This option is useful Usage for comparing analysis results to testing data which may include the static loads of a structure in the zero stress state After selecting the checkbox activating the Reference Frame option the user may then use the slider to select a frame of the current animation After selecting the frame the user may select PLAY VPG will then recalculate all of the animation frames using the selected frame as a reference 9 11 8 UNDEFORM Description This function allows the resultant contour of the current frame projects on the u nk surface Please see the Figure 9 57 and 9 58 to compare the result ndeformed original bla POST PROCESSING Figure 9 57 Projected on an Undeformed Blank 9 52 eta VPG 3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Figure 9 58 Current Frame Contour 9 11 9 ELEMENT RESULT Description This option determines whether the CONTOUR will be based on elements or 10 CONTOUR SETTING Description nodes 9 11 This function w
299. entage of the volume of a tetrahedral element contains vers containing the 4 nodes of that element Volu Sk on Volume of Sphere Usa us a sphere me ew Volume of Sphere Volume of Tetrahedr PRE PROCESSOR ge gt ENTER VOLUE SKEW CRITERIA W PART Y N new part AGE 1 G VP prompts 2 VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK NE gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A define a If yes VPG prompts the user to 6 5 14 CHECK WARP Description This function color fills warpage failure elements of plate or solid The user has the option to split the plate elements into triangular elements All elements that fail may be added to a new part The user may specify warpage criteria for the check function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER CRITERIA 5 DEG Any real number is a valid entry If the warpage of the elements is less than the entered criteria then gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK urned to the MODEL CHECKER menu r than the entered criteria then ECK HECK ents Skip to step 4 to enter the definition The user is ret If the warpage of the elements is greate TS xxxx FAILED CH gt ELEMEN gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED C cable for solid elem Step 3 is not appli 6 95 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R of the new part 2 The user may replace warped elements NO see step 4 ce any warped quadrilateral elements with t
300. enu Once the user has chosen a material type a pop up window appears with the rial s properties d property table allows the user to insert values for the material s 6 11 5 DELETE Descrip 1 A p 2 mate The displaye properties tion This function deletes the user selected materials from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts the user for the name of the target material gt SELECT MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEM C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATL 6 153 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 The user selects the material to be deleted The elements that are assigned with that nd VPG prompts SELECTED If the user enters EXIT VPG deletes the material and changes the color of the part from gray to white The white indicates that the part does not have any material properties assigned to it VPG returns to step 1 6 11 6 DEFINE PROPERTIES Description material turn gray a gt MATERIAL ID X IS This function defines or modifies the properties of a selected material Usage PG rompts the user to select a materi 1 V al TERIAL s a material by picking an element C or material name M of a fter the user selects a material the MATERIAL DEFINITION window appears and a t reads L ID X IS SELECTED 3 d a table Th s in t ndow p gt SELECT A MA The user select material 2 A promp gt MATERIA VPG isplays the properties a
301. enu all h This function deletes sets with no nodes assigned to them Usage 1 VPG deletes any empty node sets If empty node sets are found VPG shows the number of sets found and prompts gt OK TO DELETE 1 EMPTY NODE SETS Y N If no unreferenced node sets are found VPG prompts gt NO EMTPY NODE SETS FOUND and returns to the node set menu 6 6 6 REMOVE UNREF SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets that have not been assigned boundary conditions constraints initial conditions loads or contacts 6 106 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG deletes any unreferenced node sets If unreferenced node sets are found LETE 1 UNREFERENCED NODE SETS Y N If no unreferenced node sets are found VPG prompts and returns to the node set menu VPG shows the number of sets found and prompts gt OK TO DE gt NO UNREF NODE SETS FOUND 6 6 7 INCLUDE Description This function adds additional elements nodes parts to the current set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part FOR type SET XXXX t node part 2 Once the elements nodes parts have been selected and the user has exited the INCLUDE submenu VPG displays the new additions with their set number and prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS NODES PARTS IN SET XXXX 6 6 8 LIST Description gt SELECT elemen This function displays a list of the defined sets in the model d
302. er 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING be listed should Figure 9 65 List Value Control Option The set of nodes with highest value are listed NE I The set of no st value are listed NEXT LOWEST Th t o LOWE The se west value are listed SET LIST POSTION This function allows the user to by the cursor pick Other functions are common with those the SECTION DEFORMATION HIGHEST XT H GHEST des with next highe e se f nodes with next lowest value are listed ST t of nodes with lo SET LIST NUMBER The function prompts a data control window that allows the user to enter the number of the listed nodes place the list window VECTOR T s in this menu animate the transient analysis results in real time and are used to display the results of individual steps with the vector The options are shown in Figure 9 66 he function 9 57 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Figure 9 66 Vector Operation control window COMPO 9 11 13 SELECT NENT Description The ACCELERAT Usage re are four types of component DISPLACEMENT VELOCITY ION STRESS and STRAIN in the function When sel LAYER is disabled them in any combin If STRESS and the CURRENT COMPONENT is disabl LAYER 9 11 14 BY ELEMENT SIZE AND SCALE FACTOR Desc ption ecting DISPLACEMENT VELOCITY or ACCELERATION the CURRENT and the CURRENT COMPONENT is enabled used The user can select ation or S
303. er greater than one for the number of elements along N2 Any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines 1 where N1 is not d N3 is not greater than 2 N1 re N2 is not reater than 2 N2 i e 10 10 or 10 10 11 14 ACCEPTABLE NOT ACCEPTABLE 3 Once the desired element N1 N2 N3 N4 is entered VPG prompts gt AC Y sh and prompt for more lines NO REMESH rejects the mesh and prompts for new N1 N2 N3 N4 6 3 19 3 LINE M Description ts r the 2 LINE MESH ction The user must select this option before selecting LINE MESH e user selects the desir the selected lines N3 optional an integer value for the side opposite N greater than 2 N3 an N4 optional an integer value for the side opposite N2 whe greater than 2 N4 and N4 is not g i e 5 5 12 6 CEPT MESH YES NO REMESH ES will accept the me will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines ESH This function generates elements in an area defined by 3 lines line direction is not importa o not have to intersect an open area is possible Elements a ART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Two mesh patterns are available for 3 Line Mesh triangular shape VPG generates the triangular elements and allows the user to position them o nt The lines defining the area d re inc CURRENT P luded in the n the model 6 63 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6
304. er to output an LS DYNA data deck directly from the VPG database 1 Enter a file name up to 24 characters The dyn extension is suggested for LS DYNA files ed de ip scr tion of each file export function is given in the following US la FILE MANAGER mouse button an ec sp ific Refer to the ABAQUS manual for mo r a file name up to 24 characters Using the inp conve ted ntion fo s 2 If the file name already exist FILENAME ALREADY gt YES will ov NO will prom 3 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YE 4 gt INPUT TH ITE DYNA FILE o 5 8 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r FILE MANAGER 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILE NAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N YES will overwrite the existing file NO will prompt for a file name 3 User selects ANALSYS UNIT parts output mode FULL MODEL or Active Parts Only discrete beam output option inputs Analysis Title Engineering s Name and Project Name The user may also select the Output Requirement for Discrete Beam button which will automatically define beam and node sets for all Discrete Beam elements in the model This will result in the output data for these elements to be placed in the ELOUT file Figure 5 8 2 LS DYNA Import Options Window After clicking OK VPG displays the CONTROL TERMIN
305. er to visualize the calculated xy component stress values via color fringe plots The xy component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGyz Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yz component stress Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 26 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY values via color fringe plots The yz component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGzx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated zx component stress values via color fringe plots The zx component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSxx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated xx component strain values via color fringe plots The xx component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSyy Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yy component strain values via color fringe plots The yy component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSzz Description This function allows the user to visual
306. es simultaneously using a single analysis run While VPG methodology was initially developed for full vehicle simulations based on a proving ground durability cycle the concept can also be applied to other dynamic mechanical systems 1 4 eta VPG Software Package INTRODUCTION eta Virtual Proving Ground eta VPG is a fully integrated dynamic nonlinear finite element software package used to create analyze edit and visualize dynamic nonlinear engineering problems The software includes an integrated preprocessor post processor and solver VPG is a complete CAE software toolset for applying theory and engineering principles common in areas of mechanical and structural engineering eta VPG provides a single package for use in analysis of multi body dynamics problems linear static nonlinear static and dynamic nonlinear finite element analysis eta VPG s strength lies in its ability to integrate problems that are treated as multidisciplinary by other software packages eta VPG allows the user to combine multi body dynamics problems with structural finite element analysis problems providing real time kinematics or dynamics as well as the stress or strain response of the structure in real time eta VPG consists of three primary modules the VPG PrePost module the VPG Structure Module and the VPG Safety Module Each module may operate independently and usage is controlled via licensing options VPG PrePost is a general purpose full featured mod
307. eta Post will continue to Post session is ended unction creates a avi or a e3d file from curren soft multimedia file that provides a means to store a series of imag tion An E3D file is an ETA 3D player file that provides a means to store t e 3D demo by eta 3D Player st outputs AVI or E3D files during the animation proces tput an AVI file first animate the result Eta Post displays the WRITE FILE win location for the AVI file After entering the name and location frame and the frame When play animatio than the current use that rate until it is reset or the eta CONTOUR The functions in this menu animate the transient analysis results in real time and are used to display the results of individual steps The color bar located on screen displays the corresponding contour values The location of the highest contour value on the model is labeled with an asterisk and the lowest is labeled with a zero 0 The o ns are shown in Figure 9 56 ptio 9 49 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Figure 9 56 Animate Contour Control Window 9 11 4 SELECT COMPONENT Description There are STRESS STRAIN and DISPLACEMENT They determine the type of ontour variable displayed during the plot animation The type of variable selected determines the type of plot component displayed in the CURRENT COMPONENT CURRENT COMPONENT NDOW determines the type of component that will be displayed during th
308. f element and along the element s normal direction 9 4 2 9 BACKGROUND toggle Description If this function is toggled on the background color is set to white Otherwise default background color is black 9 4 3 PRIORITY OF FUNCTIONS Description The functions in eta Post are prioritized Functions in Display Options can be accessed to at any time The functions in Edit and Tool menu have the highest priority If any of these functions is started all other functions in eta POST are disabled Control Window has the lowest priority The user is enabled to access other functions when Control window is opened Only functions in Edit menu Tool menu and Display Option can be used during animation 9 4 4 CONTROL WINDOW AND CONTROL OPTION WINDOW Description eta Post incorporates two types of window FUNCTION DIALOG WINDOW and CONTROL WINDOW At the bottom of the FUNCTION DIALOG WINDOW there are buttons to execute reject reset the data or close the window The functions of these buttons are listed below Usage APPLY Executes the current function CANCEL Rejects the current operation EXIT Exits the current wind OK Accept and forwards the user to the next step UNDO Rejects the last step of the operation ow s the data in the dialog box 9 11 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING RESET Restores the original set 9 5 FILE FO The protocol for es du ion includes attaching suffixes
309. face toward the top surface This display is useful for picturing the beam orientation and the normal direction of the shell elements the normal of the shell follows the right hand rule from the first node to the second node Note The clarity of the element orientation display improves when the SHRINK ELEM ON OFF command is activated SHADE This command displays the elements as if they were illuminated by a light source Elements that are not directly exposed to the light source are appropriately shaded to imitate actual shading RESET Returns the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW to its default settings CURRENT PART The current part name window not only lists the current part but it also serves as a shortcut to execute the current part command Clicking on this window will execute the CURRENT PART command allowing the user to set a new current part See section 10 3 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 42 eta VPG 3 3 UTILITY 10 6 MACRO MACRO is a module used for repeated operations All of the user s operations will be recorded in the text file in xml format after activating this module Then the user can repeat the recorded operations by executing macro files The user can also edit the macro files to obtain the desired results This module is very useful to reduce repeated operations and perform multiple operating system platforms 10 6 1 START MACRO Description this function is used to start macro files and enter the names of the macro
310. file used to create it and can be used for all subsequent post processing functions It also requires significantly less time to load the pp file FATIGUE VPG allows the user to generate and post process fatigue result files from within the VPG Interface FEATURES ANIMATE CONTOUR This function is used to map the stresses strains and strain energy of the model across time Animations can be edited to even odd or specified frames ANIMATE DEFORMATION This command allows the user to animate displacements within the model in real time Animations can be edited to even odd or specified frames CONTOUR FILL This function maps stresses strains and strain energy in the model for a single step It allows the user to view the contour values by superimposing a fill color contour image onto the model The values are displayed in a color legend in the upper right hand corner of the screen CONTOUR LINES This function similar to the CONTOUR FILL function allows the user to check the model s contour values for a single step A color wire frame contour line plot of the component result is superimposed onto the current model DEFORMED SHAPE This command displays the displacement results of the model for a single step The undeformed model shape is displayed in white The model can be animated to show the transition between the undeformed and deformed model ELEMENT STRESS 2 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e
311. finitions node sets segment sets section sets and other default definitions are automatically loaded as part of the input file and monitored throughout the crash safety Pictures a are documented in the following sections and are also included in the Step by Step simulation procedure when applicable The details development process and validation data are available upon request r easy access or to save them in ASCII format for priva an demonstrate First T ncluding Hybrid III 50 Male 95 Male 5 Female and v ment can also display models in the library to see a general description of the models and their charac simulation procedure nd a brief description of the crash tool models included in the VPG Safety modules 7 37 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 4 3 he following functions are included in the VPG SAFETY menu VPG Safety Menu T A d etailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 4 4 Crashworthiness Menu 7 38 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 39 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 4 5 FMVSS REGULATIONS 7 4 5 1 FMVSS214b SIDE DOOR INTRUSION Description This function allows the user to generate an FMVSS214b Static Side Door Intrusion impact ram and position it within the current VPG database U
312. following page See Figure 2 6 1 DRAWING WINDOW Model and definition cards are displayed in this area MENU BAR The groups of menus containing all eta VPG modules ICON BAR This group of commands dynamically manipulates the display position and perspective of a model MENU Commands and the Command Options are displayed in this area They can be accessed via the keyboard mouse DIALOGUE WINDOW VPG displays comments and messages to the user and accepts keyboard entry commands in the dialogue window DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW These commands set the plot options for the current model 2 7 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s FEATURES Menu Bar Icon Bar Menu Dialogue Window Display Drawing Window Figure 2 6 1 VPG Window Layout 2 7 ICON BAR The icon bar is designed to give the user easy access to the most commonly used functions in eta VPG Some of the functions represented in the icon bar are also located in the different menus The user may simply click these icons to activate the functions instead of clicking through the menus NEW Creates a new database file OPEN Opens a database PRINT Creates a postscript file of the display area and sends the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized PART ON OFF Turns the selected parts on or off The
313. fter selectin gt KEEP TANGENT YES elements ABORT The BALL MESH function creates a spherical mesh using either solid elements or shell elements The solid element option creates a hexahedron and tetrahedron mesh of a sphere using the diameter and mesh size values input into the BALL MESH table The sphere will be centered at the X Y and Z location specified in the table If the Surface Mesh option is selected a shell mesh will be created using the center diameter and mesh size parameters specified Usage 1 The following window pops up The user defines parameters in the window and clicks Mesh 6 69 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 6 3 25 DDLE ELEMENT Description MI This function will create middle element between two layers of shell elements or directly by solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts to select middle element options PRE PROCESSOR SOLID middle element will be created between two segments of solid PLA E middle element will be created between two lays of shell elements 6 3 26 ATTRIBU Descr T TE TABLE ON OFF iption This function available only in LS DYNA mode allows the user to add additional properties t n the elements are created thickness additional nodes etc The ATTRIBUTE TABLE supports BEAM DISCRETE MASS SEATBELT SHELL TSHELL and solid elements It does not support JOINT NODAL RIGID BODY PLO 6 3 27 MESH TO SURFACE
314. function the user can copy a graph image directly to other Microsoft programs as a bitmapped image provided that the destination program supports a bitmapped image paste A demonstration as to clipboard to Microsoft Word is illustrated in figure 9 72 inserting an image form Figure 9 Inserting an Image from Clipboard to MS Word EXPORT This function en urrent window c in a file with the CUR exten ay and prompt the user to select the desired nam ATTRIBUTE This function enables the user to chang ttribute of the curve Clicking the Attribute button the pop up window will be displayed under the curve window The pop up window is shown in figure 9 73 72 The Demonstration on ables the user to export and save the c box will displ urves sion The Select File dialog e e the a 9 69 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 70 eta VPG3 3 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 73 The Graphing Attribute Menu There are many options for the user to change the attribute of the selected curve On the w the name of current curve is listed The user should select the change the attribute left of the patulous windo intended name of curve to 9 12 6 1 CURVE NAME Description This function offers an option for the user to change the name of the curve The user may enter a descriptive name for the current curve in the dialogue box 9 12 6 2 CURVE STYLE Description This function offers an option for the u
315. g Control and Left mouse button and exits by releasing left mouse button PAN This command enables the user to translate the model by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the screen the cursor reappears at the center of the screen Clicking the ft mouse button stops the pan This function can also be activated by pre le ssing Control and Middle mouse button and exits by releasing Middle mouse button CURSOR ZOOM The u ich to zoom The model is centered about this point and the user ser picks a point about wh may move the cursor up or down to zoom in or out This function can also be activated by pressing Control and Right mouse button and exits by releasing Right mouse button 2 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s Note If the cursor is moved off the screen in functions ROTATE PAN or CURSOR ROOM the cursor re appears the opposite of the screen automatically WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user presses the left mouse button and drags the cursor diagonally down until the desired indow size is reached After releasing the left button the section included in the window is displayed in full screen w FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines a free region by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor on the display screen Release the left button
316. gns asymmetric boundary conditions to the YZ PRE PROCESSOR ANTI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary c TRANSLATION X translation will be constrained NSLATION Y translation will be constrained d NSLATION Z translation will be constraine ATION X rotation will be constrained ON Y rotation will be constrained This function deletes the selected SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO DELETE 6 141 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR All available SPC sets are displayed for selection in the BOUNDARY SPC SET box Description 2 When a SPC set has been selected for deletion VPG prompts gt ONE SPC SET IS SELECTED EXIT deletes the SPC set and the user exits the function DELETE SPC INCLUDE NODES IN SET This function adds additional nodes into the selected boundary SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A BOUNDARY SPC SET TO ADD NODES 2 VPG prompts DONE will add nodes into the SPC set and the user exits the function INCLUDE ABORT will exit the function INCLUDE NODES IN SET without adding any of s ion gt SELECT NODES NODES IN SET the selected grid SPC LIST SET Descript This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window Usage 1 V gt L SPC MODIF Desc on PG prompts IST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE Y ripti This function allows the user to
317. gravity and inertia moment Once the user has ault suspension values the suspension will be displayed on screen ls and the types of suspensions available for ration through the VPG template system may be found in Chapter 7 Section 2 se be in the MAIN MENU of eta VPG and ready to start the session 2 SETTING UP A VPG SYSTEM MODEL wing is a general outline for setting up a VPG system model There are three unique mod tailed description of each of these processes is available in the VPG Structure Tutorial 1 Genera The user begins by selectin use types and enters the node coordinates for suspension geometry N node coordinates defau edited the def Details on generation of suspension mode gene 3 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 3 G e t t i n g S t a r t e d GETTING STARTED 2 T TIRE MENU the user selects GENERATE and is offered the TIRE TER dialogue box Default values for tire geometry mass and inflation pressure ion or by selecting an existing nt or by selecting a location on an existing suspension system Tire modeling is discussed in Section 7 3 This topic is also described in the VPG Structure Tutorial 4 Auto Generating a Road Surface The user generates the desired road surface by selecting it from the ROAD SURFACE MENU If the road surface is not in the correct position in relation to the suspension after generation the MOVE ROAD SURFACE command is used to position it Next contact bet
318. gt SELEC ABORT CURVE ON SURFACE The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim circle operation NO INNER BOUNDARY VPG trims the surface of the outer boundary This function allows the user to trim away the intersection of two surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE FOR TRIM OPERATION Note This surface is referred to as a primary surface in this section gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE Once the user selects the second surface VPG draws a boundary line between the two intersecting surfaces Note This surface is referred to as a secondary surface in this section 2 Once the second surface has been selected and the user enters EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY ABORT DONE EXIT SURFACE BOUNDARY This creates the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE s an existing curve on surface open or closed as the outer m operation st curve selected for the trim operation gt SELECT CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY dary can be a line segment open spline closed spline or circle ABORT DONE This locate the boundary of the tri REJECT LAST CURVE This rejects the la 3 VPG prompts This retains the surface between the outer boundary and the inner boundary during the trim operation The inner boun EXIT 6 29 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P
319. guration will be saved If the user chooses to create a new file the current database will not be updated and the current model configuration will be written to a new file with the database name provided by the user This file now becomes the current model database open in VPG 5 5 SAVE AS This function saves the current database as a new file See Figure 5 5 1 Figure 5 3 1 Restart Database FILE MANAGER Figure 5 5 1 Save Database As 5 Thi 6 MERGE DATABASE s function adds another VPG database into current database See Figure 5 6 1 5 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r 5 7 IMP This function allow more than one CA Figure 5 6 1 Merge Database ORT s the user to read CAD or model data See Figure 5 7 1 User can import D or model data at a time by using CTRL or SHIFT key FILE MANAGER 5 7 Select the o available fo MODEL T CAD DATA F Figure 5 7 1 Import File Window 1 FILE TYPE dr p down selection in the FILE TYPE field to select the proper format The rmats are DA A FORMAT LS DYNA Nastran Abaqus Genesis Moldflow PamCrash Radioss Nastran SOL 700 ILE IGES LINE VDA DXF CATIA STEP Unigraphics Ideas 5 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r FILE MANAGER SPECIAL MO Pre A de DEL FORMAT ADAMS ADAMS tailed description of each file import function is given in the following section 5 7
320. h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s CLEAR NODE Clear the display of connecting nodes CLEAR ELEMENT Clear the display of connecting elements IDENTIFY NODE This function enables the user to identify any node IDENDFIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES This function enables the user to calculate the distance between two nodes ANGLE BETWEEN THREE NODES his function enables the user to measure the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes T FEATURES COORDINATES ON OFF his function enables the user to turn on off coordinate systems 2 8 MOUSE FUNCTIONS ll VPG model rotation pan zoom functions are accessible via selection using the left mouse button To access a function the user selects the desired button using the mouse pointer and presses the left mouse button This button is also used for selecting definition cards locating the ursor in definition ts etc The right ouse button activates a floating pull down menu with commonly used model manipulation fun nctions on the menu will be described in following chapters Figure 2 8 1 Floating Pull Down Menu accessed via Right Mouse Button ates each command of the T A c m cards creating drag windows locating points nodes elemen ctions See Figure 2 8 1 All fu 2 9 KEYBOARD ENTRY To increase speed and efficiency all VPG functions can also be accessed by
321. he model will be plotted in gray color during deformed plot or animation deformation and the parts without stress strain during contour plot or animation If the parts are defined with material color in Part Attribute function they will be shaded in the material color Note The GRAY COLOR option is only available when the SHADE option is on 9 4 2 4 FILL COLOR toggle Description This function toggles on off the model in FILL COLOR mode FILL COLOR fills the displayed elements with their designated part color Description 9 4 2 5 ELEMENT EDGE toggle This function can only be used in FILL COLOR mode The outline of the elements 9 10 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING is plotted in white when options is toggled on The model can be displayed without the outline gling off the option by tog ote The ELEMENT EDGE is only available when the FILL COLOR or SHADE option is on togg N 9 4 2 6 SHRINK le Description SHRINK creates a plot with elements reduced in size by 20 percent This option allows the user to toggle the function on off 9 4 2 7 HIDDEN SURFACE Description This function toggles on off the model in HIDDEN SURFACE mode HIDDEN SURFACE hides the elements behind the elements viewed from the user s point of view Description 9 4 2 8 PLATE NORMAL toggle This function toggles plate normal on and off The plate normal is shown with a vector drawn at the center o
322. he displayed model Usage s function enables the user to define and assign initial velocity to 1 After the user enters CREATE the BOUNDARY BTIC DEFINITION window pops up and the user sets parameters in the window INITIAL VELOCITY DELETE Description This function enables the user to remove the selected initial velocities from the 6 143 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE All available initial velocities are listed in the TIC CARD LIST box INITIAL VELOCITY LIST Description This function lists the defined initial velocities in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LIST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE INITIAL VELOCITY MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any initial velocity Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO MODIFY 2 After the user selects an initial velocity the BOUNDARY BTIC DEFINITION window pops up and the user can modify parameters in the window INITIAL VELOCITY SHOW Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined initial velocities VPG displays the initial velocities on the screen Usage VPG prom ts 1 p ALL ABORT UNDO EXIT All available initial velocities are listed in the TIC CARD LIST box 6 9 5 MPC Description gt SELECT CARD TO SHOW List of all initial
323. he same node twice while returns the prompt If th us r ters DONE VPG saves the set an X NODES INCLUDED IN NODE SET 6 7 3 CURRENT NODE This function lists the defined node sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed Usage PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts SET LIST List of all node sets elected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED 6 7 4 DELETE NODE Description gt SELECT SET FROM NODE CURSOR AT NODE EXIT 2 Once the set s is s gt SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET This function allows the user to remove node sets by ID number VPG is Usage specifically configured to recognize node sets for this procedure For deleting element sets refer to the command in section 6 7 16 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all node sets CURSOR AT NODE ALL NODE SETS UNDO EXIT 2 If the user selects ALL NODE SETS in step 2 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL NODE SETS Y N 6 110 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR YES NO If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL NODE SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE If NO VPG returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 3 If the user selects an individual node set in step 1 VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED 4 EXIT returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 6 7 5 REMOVE EMPTY SETS NODE Description This fu
324. he user to auto generate dummy and se re atbelt models from a library of dummy types and position them in the current database The data quired for positioning of the dummy is the H Point of the occupant position C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES The user may select any dummy from the DUMMY MENU 7 6 1 VPG DUMMIES VPG Deformable 50 Dummy Model VPG Deformable 95 Dummy Model VPG Deformable 5 Dummy Model VPG Rigid 5 Dummy Model VPG Deformable 50 Dummy Model VPG Rigid 95 Dummy Model 7 68 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 6 2 OTHER DUMMIES ETA ECE SIDE Model ETA US SIDE Model VPG MODULES ion 7 6 3 DUMMY POSITIONING TAKATA 3 Year Child Model FAA HYBRID III Descript This command imports and positions a finite element dummy model into the current model database The user can then position the dummy components to the desired posit Usage ion 1 VPG prompts gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR THE DUMMY 2 DUMMY ASSEMBY 7 69 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S The user may adjust part attitude in the dummy then press exit to end the adjustment procedure 3 VPG prompts gt DO YOU NEED A SEATBELT VPG MODULES 7 70 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S The user can choose a seatbelt type in this menu 4 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON
325. he work directory DES D TO yyyy gt xxxx DUPLICATE NODES FOUND following messages echo on screen and in the gt CHECKING xxxx NODES FOR DUPLICATE NODES gt NO DUPLICATE NODE FOUND uplicate nodes are found the following messa gt CHECKING xxxx NODES FOR DUPLICATE NO gt DUPLICATE NODE xxxx CHANGE If no duplicate nodes are found the VPG msg user files located in the work directory 6 75 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 4 4 CHANGE ID Description This function changes the numbers of the existing nodes The parts containing these nodes do not need to be on or current during this procedure Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FO NEW NODE NUMBER Th r can select the node nearest the cursor by pressing the left mouse ing the letter N or entering the keyboard option gt ENTER NEW NODE NO FOR XXXX OR CR FOR UNCHANGE Any unused positive integer is a valid entry If the entered number is already being used the following prompt will appear gt NODE NUMBER xxxx ALREADY EXISTS REQUEST DENIED gt ENTER NEW NODE NO FOR XXXX OR CR FOR UNCHANGE 6 4 5 COINCIDENT CHECK Description R e use button instead of typ 2 After selecting a node the user is prompted for a new node number This option checks for coincident nodes that may be in the displayed or other part s of the model Coincident nodes are defined as having distance between each
326. ials are aluminum steel copper iron Gold silver bronze and rubber Click on the MATERIAL button and select a material type from the draw down list Then the user can select the parts from the part list and highlight the part on the screen Clicks APPLY and the selected parts will be endued with the specified material The changes of part s material can TRANSPARENCY ck on the TRANSPARENCY button and select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen Clicks APPLY and the transparency slider will be active The user may use the transparency slider to adjust the degree of transparency Slide to the left will make the selected parts more transparent The program will show the selected parts transparent when the SHADE option is turned on Please see the Figure 9 22 e SHADE option is turned on Please see the Figure 9 23 NO CONTOUR The user may choose not to show contour result in color from the color table to change the part color Then click APPLY below the control window The program will change the color of the selected part on window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk be show only when the SHADE and GRAY option are turned on Please see the Figure 9 21 This option allows the user to make the selected parts in transparent when the SHADE
327. icates that this type of control card has been defined A NO in the right column indicates that this type of control card has not been defined 6 14 5 DAMPING CARDS Description Damping cards define mass weighted nodal damping that applies globally to the nodes of deformable bodies Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION PRE PROCESSOR The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 6 DATABASE Description Database definition cards are used to obtain output result files Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT DATABASE TYPE 6 170 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R DATAB Description ASE ADAMS ability to export data in an XML format which is intended to facilitate sharing of the data with other applications Imported XML data generated by Adams creates all of the topology of the suspension the bushings springs dampers rigid links and beam elements that make up a suspension DATABASE ASCII Description The definition cards in the ASCII subsection specify the ASCII database output files Usage 1 W VPG prompts PRE PROCESSOR hen DEFINE is selected gt SELECT CARD TO DEFINE 6 171 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 SCII card to define VPG displays the definition card t once entered will be use
328. id faces and prompts whether to create new part to include new created shell elements If click CANCEL a part list will pop up new created shell elements will be included into selected part if click EXIT directly no shell elements will be created 6 3 5 DE Desc 1 VPG checks free so If click OK new created shell elements will be included into this new created part LETE PRE PROCESSOR ription This function allows the user to delete elements using several different functions Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACES TO TRANSFORM ELEMENTS ONLY The elements selected will be deleted nodes will be deleted ABORT 6 3 6 DRAG MESH Description ELEMENTS_NODES The elements selected and referenced This function offers five methods to extrude elements from a cross section of pattern elements See the following figure for the five methods Usage 6 52 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG gt Allows nts into 2D elements beam to plate or 2D solid along a selected line NORMAL DRAG trudes plate elements into solid elements normal to the selected OTATIONAL DRAG Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid he axis of rotation Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid ents along W axis 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG The following sections cover the deta
329. ile ba 5 Figure 5 1 1 New File Window 5 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r FILE MANAGER If a datab e nd has not been saved yet there is a warning message for saving the opened file before creating a new one See Figure 5 1 2 as file already has been opened in VPG a Figure 5 1 2 Save Prompt his function allows the user to open databases 5 2 OPEN T Figure 5 2 1 Open File Window If a database file already has been opened in VPG and has not been saved yet there is a warning message for saving the opened file before opening another one See Figure 5 2 2 Figure 5 2 2 Save Prompt 5 3 RESTART This function allows the user to resta m the last saved point VPG will rompt the user to save the current file See Figure 5 2 2 fter selection VPG will prompt the user to restart from a new database or the current one rt the current database fro p A 5 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r Select YES to open a new database The Open File Window appears Select NO to reopen the current database from the last saved point ABORT to cancel the operation 5 4 SAVE This function updates the current database The User may overwrite the existing file or create a new file at the execution of the SAVE command If the user chooses to overwrite the file all previous mode data will be overwritten and the current model confi
330. ill be included into current part SPH elements will be created SPH elements will not be created 3 If BY ELEMENT is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT SHELL OR SOLID TO CREATE SPH AT THEIR CENTER gt SELECT ELEMENTS After selecting elements VPG prompts gt ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE ts PART YES NO ES SPH elements will be included into a new created part NO If BY BOX is selected VPG prompts After creating a coordinate VPG prompts NG LOCAL X Y Z AX gt ENTER BOX EDGE LENGTH ALO r entering the values VPG prom gt ENTER NO OF SPH ALONG LOCAL X After entering th gt INCLUDE SPH ELEMENT I YES SPH elements will be included into a new gt ACCEPT YES NO YES NO After entering the values VPG promp INCLUDE SPH ELEMENT INTO NEW gt Y SPH elements will be included into current part gt ACCEPT YES NO 6 51 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R YES SPH elements will be created SPH elements will not be created 4 gt s gt SPH elements are created at the location of the selected nodes CREATE Description NO If BY NODE is selected VPG prompts ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE After entering the values VPG prompt SELECT NODES SHELL ON SOLIDS LS DYNA This section covers the options for the CREATE SHELL ON SOLIDS subsection of CREA Usage TE ELEMENTS l
331. ill start the Contour Bar Options Control Window shown as Figure 9 60 There are several options Usage REVERSE CONTOUR BAR ction allows the user to reverse the color of contour bar for the contour plot The result of the reverse contour bar is show in Figure 9 59 This fun Figure 9 59 The Reverse contour Bar result 9 53 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 60 Contour Setting box an the maximum the contour is displayed in dark colour of the value is less than the minimum value the contour is displayed in r of the bottom bar Please see the Figure 9 61 ower range and upper range are entered via the DAPT INPUT field The APPLY button is then selected and the model will be re plotted with new range RESET CONTOUR RANGE This function resets the contour value range to the default maximum minimum values If the value is more th top bar and if the dark colo Note Contour Range is only accessible after plotting Once the user has made a plot and selected SET CONTOUR RANGE the l POST PROCESSING Figure 9 61 An Example for Contour Range CONTOUR MODE There are four types of colour RGB red green blue RGBM red green blue magenta 9 54 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING RG red green CONTOUR LEVEL The contour level can be set from 2 20 levels The program defaults to CONTINUE If the user sets the contour level with any value 2 20 the contour
332. ils for each command DRAG MESH ONE LINE DRAG Description prompts SELECT DRAG MESH OPTION ONE LINE DRAG user to drag 1D eleme elements into 3D elements plate to Ex plate elements R elements along t TRANSLATIONAL DRAG elem Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid elements along 3 or 4 selected lines EXIT This section covers the options for the ONE LINE DRAG subsection of DRAG his function extrudes the selected elements along the selected line to form the higher ents i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage MESH T order elem G prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Then VPG prompts OR DRAG MESH Number of points on the selected drag line dictates the number of sections 3 Once the line is selected the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT DRAG MESH Y N DRAG MESH NORMAL DRAG Descr 1 VP gt SELECT CONTROL LINE F created Line direction must point in the direction of the intended mesh iption This section covers the options for the NORMAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH The normal drag function extrudes the selected plate elements in the normal direction to create solid elements Usage gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER THICKNESS OF NORMAL DRAG 1 VPG prompts 6 53 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6
333. ime is less than 36 milliseconds This is a spec CUT This function will cut the curve from a time to another time 9 12 Desc 6 17 FILTERS ription In this section an intr uction on digi od tal filter is presented including the filter desig tati re four different filters implemented in OPE SAE Filter Desc n usage and result interpre on There a RATION They are Average Filter Butterworth Filter Finite Impulse Response FIR 9 12 6 18 AVERAGE ription Average allows the us to ooth the curve through averagin er sm g the value of a point po ts eraging of the points can with a number of surrounding in defined by user This av 9 75 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 76 eta VPG3 3 POST PROCESSING make Usag the curve become smoother e Select the Average type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular butto Click CONT rompt the user to input s The user may enter the appr n below the FILTER ing the Select button the DATA ROL windows will pop up and p the number of the points for averaging a Figure 9 76 is shown opriate coefficient in the input box which plays the default value dis of 10 Figure 9 76 DAT CO ter A NTROL Window of AVERAGE Fil Afte the Pres 9 12 Desc r the user enters the appropriate coe p ses OK to accept the input value and exit fficient res DATA CONTROL window
334. including part colors See Figure 10 1 1 F ure ig 10 1 1 Change Color Menu CHANGE PART COLORS Description This function change the colors of s selected parts The user may activate a o color change when the parts are on r off Usage 1 VPG prompts 10 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY ART ele r ci u ayed part element and pressing the left mouse s he user may select any part le COLO T isplays e c dge of the screen The user may select at th co gt SELECT PART TO CHANGE COLOR gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A P The user s cts a pa t as follows A By pla ng the c rsor on a displ button B VPG di plays the part list from which t 2 Once user se cts a part VPG prompts the T gt SELEC R FROM COLOR BAR OR EXI VPG d th olor bar on the right e a desired color via the mouse 3 EXIT termin es is mmand COLOR BAR Description Once the user execu s this command VPG te displays the color bar and the G removes the color bar when the user activates the REDRAW or CLEAR command assigned colors and numbers on the right edge of the screen VP 10 1 2 MAGNIFY WINDOW Description This function magnifies an object in the display area Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER MAGNIFICATION The user may enter any positive number as the magnification factor If the it will cause the size of the object in the display If the num
335. ine parameters for thickness optimization Usage 1 VPG prompts user to select a part from the part list 2 After a part is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER MINIMUM MAXIMUM THICKNESS FOR SELECTED PART MINIMUM gt 0 0 NGE RESOLUTION gt 0 0 mpts STRESS gt 0 0 RDS TO RUN DYNA JOB gt 0 6 After memory size is entered VPG mpts gt ENTER NUMBER OF EVALUATION gt 0 valuation is entered VPG prompts to export input file to run VPG MODULES 3 After the minimum and maximum thickness is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER RESOLUTION FOR THICKNESS RA 4 After the resolution is entered VPG pro gt ENTER MAXIMUM Von Mises 5 After maximum stress is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER MEMORY SIZE NUMBER OF WO pro 7 After number of e 7 85 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION ANALYSIS Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION VPG allows the user to define CASE CONTROL ANALYSIS or to submit an analysis for execution directly from the VPG interface using the functions found in the ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu The CASE CONTROL option will lead user to define each case user can select BOUNDARY CONDITIONS and LOADS defined in database for each needed case all these cases share the same finite elements model so user doesn t need to define B C and LOADS in several databases which will save user much time and energy The ANALYSIS SUBMISSSION Menu contains functions that create the necessary Co
336. ing types are available t the SPC reaction force data from the spcforc file The ORCE Z FORCE X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT X FORCE Y F 9 65 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 66 eta VPG3 3 POST PROCESSING tion SUBSYSTEM STATISTICS SSSTAT Descrip The user can plot the subsystem statistic data from the ssstat file The g types are available KINETIC ENERGY GLOGAL INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 2 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 1 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 3 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 2 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 4 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 3 X MOMENT 1 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 4 X MOMENT 2 INTERNAL ENERGY GLOBAL X MOMENT 3 MENT 4 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 2 Y MOMENT 1 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 3 Y MOMENT 2 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 4 Y MOMENT 3 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 1 Y MOMENT 4 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 2 Z MOMENT 1 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 3 Z MOMENT 2 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 4 Z MOMENT 3 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 1 Z MOMENT 4 Description followin INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 1 X MO SPOTWELD RIVET FORCES SWFORC The user can plot the spotweld rivet force data from the swforc file The following types are available AXIAL SHEAR TEMPERATURE OUTPUT TPRINT De scription The foll ERNAL ENERGY NOTE The available Usage user can plot the temperature output data from the tprint file The owing types are available HEAT GENERATION TOTAL HEAT GENERATION CHANGE INTERNAL E
337. into DYNA material NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 PSHELL SECTION_SHELL PSOLID SECTION_SOLID PBAR SECTION_BEAM resultant PBEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant PELAS SECTION_DISCRETE PROD SECTION_BEAM truss PTUBE SECTION_BEAM integrated 4 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 MAT1 1 MAT_ELASTIC 4 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET NODE FORCE LOAD_NODE_SET SHELL PRESSURE LOAD_SHELL_SET INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY 4 5 OTHERS APPENDIX C C 11 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C General Comments Convert NODE SET ELEMENT SET NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 LOAD CURVE DEFINE_CURVE LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM 5 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO NASTRAN 5 1 ELEMENT General Comments Delete SEATBELT amp JOINT elements DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN BEAM CBAR CBEAM CROD CTUBE according to element Prop CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY RBE2 T SHELL SOLID SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID DISCRETE CELAS1 Create LCS for spring direction MASS CONM2 CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD RBAR INERTIA CONM2 CONSTRAINED_NODE_SET RBE2 5 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY General Comments Delete SEATBELT section Convert spring stiffness into element property DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN SECTION_BEAM integrated PBAR PTUBE According to ELFORM and CST SECTION_BEAM resultant PBAR SECTION_BEAM discrete PBAR SECTION_BEAM truss PROD SECTION_BEAM spotweld PBAR SECTI
338. ion step 1 If the user selects a node number by KEYBOARD ENTRY that does not exist in the database VPG prompt ser selects a node number by KEYBOAR gt NODE xxxx IS NOT CONNECTED TO ANY PART JECT This fun ction projects a node or group of nodes onto a plane surface s or mesh 6 82 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR The nodes may be refere ced referenced nodes would then project the finite element mesh Usage nced or unreferen 1 VPG promp gt SELECT PROJECT OPTION H go to step 2 PLANE IN LOCAL UV go to step 3 ption F E MESH gt SELECT PLATE ELEMENTS FOR TARGET SURFACE ENTS D E 3 Option PLA gt DEFINE PROJ gt C gt P K N VPG tem to define the UV plane A thoro cal coordinate system is covered in Loc gt A o step 9 N 5 Option SU prompts gt SELE exits without action DONE completes the operation and continues to gt PROJECT TO SURFACE ALONG THE NORMAL Y N NO go to step 7 Prompts FOR ORIGIN define the projection vector 8 VPG d and prompts gt A If the user selects YES VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FOR PROJECTION DONE or EXIT completes the operation and exits the PROJECT NODE menu ts EXIT F E MES SURFACE go to step 5 2 O gt SELECT ELEM ABORT exits without action ON completes the operation and prompts the user to step 7
339. ion defines pressure outflow boundary conditions These boundary conditions are attached to solid elements using the Eulerian ambient formulation and defined to be pressure outflow ambient elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further on BOU Description descripti NDARY CARDS RADIATION This functi defines radiation boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS SLIDING PLANE Description on structural analysis The preceding commands yield varying definition This function defines a sliding symmetry plane The option applies to continuum domains modeled with solid elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOU Description NDARY CARDS SPH this function is used to define cards for SPH Smooth Particle Hydrodynamics Description This function defines nodal single point constraints After selecting CREATE NODE VPG displays the following dialogue box Once the DOF is determined in the dialogue box VPG prompts the user to select the nodes DONE finishes the selection and displays the nodes with their SPC set number 6 122 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR The optio ns in the top and bottom of the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box represent alte ottom can be sele both X Y SYMMETRY Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the X
340. ions air bags seat belt parts dummies and barriers These entities are either unsupported in the translation or the adequacy of the translation is questionable A complete list of all translations follows RADIOSS INTERFACE 1 The new RADIOSS interface template supports all RADIOSS cards in version 4 4 4 1 3 1 and 2 3 2 VPG 3 2 allows model manipulation of RADIOSS materials element properties boundary conditions local coordinates loads initial velocities contact and rigid walls 3 VPG 3 2 also supports the following functions accelerometer sensor fixed velocity section and monitored volume 4 Rigid body and cylindrical joint elements were enhanced to use node set 5 Multiple RADIOSS input files can be read at one time and directly read write RADIOSS input files in DYNA970 NASTRAN database KEY SUMMARIES FOR CONVERSION RADIOSS TO LS DYNA970 ELEMENT 1 Primary Nodal Rigid Body should be re calculated by VPG 3 2 2 Beam Truss and Spring elements in Radioss converts to Beam element in LS DYNA V970 APPENDIX C C 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 3 Joint element in Radioss convert to CONSTRAINED_NODAL_BODY and one CONSTRAINED_JOINT_CYLINDRICAL when number of node is equal 4 Otherwise VPG converts one CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY 4 Rigid Body element without mass and inertia in Radioss convert to CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY but when the Rigid Body element with mass and inertia in Radioss con
341. iption PRE PROCESSOR in ent type selected NTIFY ELEMENT This function allows the user to identify an element and its nodes by cursor s election Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR VPG identifies the element s respective type number part and nodes The selected element will be highlighted and element and node numbers will be displayed in the dialogue window The user also has the option to key in the number of a desired element to identify its location and characteristics It will also identify 6 55 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 9 LABEL Description This function toggles the element label on or off When LABEL is executed and parts are turned ON the screen displays the elements and the element ID numbers in the Usag database e 1 D gt gt W ment labels are superimposed on their respective elements epending on the current state of the toggle VPG prompts either ELEMENT NUMBER WILL BE LABELED or ELEMENT NUMBER WILL NOT BE LABELED hen ON the ele The elements displayed with their element numbers 6 3 10 MIRROR N ELEMENT TYPE ASTRAN LS DYNA ELEMENT TYPE MOLDFLOW CBAR BEAM PLATE RBE2 RIGID EL COLD RUNNER PLOTEL ER PLOTEL HOT RUNN PLA TE PLATE CONNECTOR SOLID SOLID CELAS2 SPRING CELAS1 SPOTWELD RBAR MASS CTUBE JOINT ISO SHL T
342. is command rotates the model about the global X the X axis is as displayed in the coordinate system at the lower left side of the screen When the user selects this e of the screen Moving the cursor up or present 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right sid down causes the model to rotate tick marks re VY VIRTUAL Y ROTATION u he Y axis is as displayed in the r d rne When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right hand side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation This command rotates the model abo t t global Y the coordinate system in the lowe left han co r of the screen VZ VIRTUAL Z ROTATION a ro te the mo lobal Z the Z axis is as displayed in the coordinate system in the lower left corner of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or ses o n increments g e l t This comm nd ta s del about the g down cau the model t rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotatio Clickin th ef mouse button stops the rotation TOP VIEW This command automatically displays or XY plane the model from the TOP SIDE VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the SIDE or XZ p
343. ith the ability to create and edit lines surfaces ele properties and element properties Chapter 6 ments material The nu are described in their own individual sections that follow Pre Processor subme s Note DYNA MISC only appears when the analysis code is set to LS DYNA SUPERELEMENT only appears when the analysis code is set to NASTRAN 6 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 LINE The functions of the LINE MENU are intended to create a new set of line data or to modify existing line data VPG currently has a limitation of 150 000 lines or 200 000 points per database The following options are available in the LINE MENU Each option le to select the menu item or by typing the first two lett Message Window A detailed description o ch 6 1 1 ADD PO escription is se ctable by using the left mouse button ers of each command in the prompt in the VPG f ea function is given in the following sections INTS D This function allows the user to add points to an existing line either randomly or between two selected points Usage prompts INE FOR ADDED POINTS 2 G gt SE N LINE The user may create new points by placing the cursor anywhere on the line button or the user may select one the following B 1 VPG gt SELECT L VP prompts LECT POINT LOCATION O and pressing the left mouse options ETWEEN 2 POINTS 6 2 eta V
344. ition load and constraint for model Usage 1 VPG prompts BOUNDARY HARDPOINT User can define boundary conditions such as velocity acceleration and displacement on hard point of suspension 7 23 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S BOUNDARY PART User can define boundary conditions such as velocity acceleration and LOAD HARDPOINT User can add load on hard point of suspension load type can be defined as constant ramp up sinusoidal or by curve e can be defined as constant ramp up sinusoidal or by curve CONSTRAINED PART efine constrain between master part and slave part User can define analysis parameter such as termination time and output time step etc 7 2 12 2 DELETE Description displacement on part of suspension LOAD PART User can add load on part of suspension load typ User can d CONTROL CARD This option allows the user to delete already defined boundary condition load and constraint in suspension model 7 2 12 3 L Descriptio IST n This option lists already defined boundary condition load and constraint in suspe 7 2 12 4 MO Description nsion model VPG MODULES DIFY This option allows the user to modify already defined boundary condition load and constraint in suspension model ripti 7 2 12 5 READ BLC STF FILE Desc on This option allows the user to read in a BLC STF file 2 6 G VALUE SPRUNG
345. iven in the following sections 7 9 1 DROP Description DIRECTION model when e fter entering this menu T This funciton will automatically calculate the center of gravity location for the ntering this menu The user can adjust the drop direction a he model will rotate the view according to the user s definition 7 79 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S op direction is along Z axis The executable the direction from The default dr direction adjustment contains CG TO ND1 the center of gravity to the selected node ND1 TO ND2 the direction from node 1 to node 2 urrent view X AXIS along X axis in the current view Y axis in the current view ALONG Y AXIS along Y axis in the current view ALONG Z AXIS along Z axis in the current view VECTOR along the defined vector direction 7 9 2 G AND DROP HEIGHT Descriptions ALONG X AXIS along X axis in the c ALONG ALONG Y AXIS along VPG MODULES This function allows the user to use the default gravity acceleration of 9810 0 cceleration The user m enter of gravity the lowest nod ein the model low 7 9 1 and a user selected node After entering th e determined accordingly 004196mm s 2 or an arbitrary drop a ay define the drop height according to the c est value according to the drop direction see e drop height the height to the floor will also b G define drop acceleration 9810mm s 2 d
346. ize the calculated zz component strain values via color fringe plots The zz component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSxy Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated xy component strain values via color fringe plots The xy component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSyz Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yz component strain values via color fringe plots The yz component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSzx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated zx component strain values via color fringe plots The zx component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area REMOVE THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined thickness values obtained from a thickness calculation The user must then recreate a shell section or material thickness using the appropriate modeling parameter REMOVE STRESS EPS Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined stress and resultant strain values obtained from calculation Chapter 10 UTILITY
347. l C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES cros OCESSING ELEMENTS AND NODES gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT turns the user to the tire parameter window s section along with mass and pressure values and prompts gt PR NO re 3 If the user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts gt DEFINE WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES 7 33 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES Note For tire tuning procedures see the eta VPG applications manual sections 1 5 and 2 4 7 34 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 4 Introduction to VPG Safety The automotive industry is legally required to design vehicles to meet the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS or ECE EEC Homogenous Regulations and or Corporate Industry Standards Various experimental and simulation approaches have been adopted to achieve these requirements The most commonly performed vehicle crashworthiness and occupant safety simulations are somewhat standardized and various groups using different pre post processors have established what are known as best practice procedures ETA s consulting group has been performing simulations on vehicle development programs for over a decade and developed the crash tools and simulation technology to meet customer requirements roughout the process he VPG Safety Module is organized into three 3
348. lane 10 11 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY REAR VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the REAR or YZ plane ISOMETRIC VIEW This command automatically displays the model form the ISOMETRIC 60 Degree Isometric point of view FREE RO A T TION an on FR combination of SX and SY Moving the do n ni lat se left right manipulates SY Moving the mouse diagonally combines the movements of both commands Clicking the left mouse ng Control and the left mouse button can also activate this The Freeh d Rotati EROT command is a mouse up w ma pu es SX Moving the mou button stops the rotation Pressi function PAN This command translates the model by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the screen the cursor reappears at the center of the screen Clicking the left and the middle mouse button can also ac mouse button stops the pan Pressing Control tivate this function UTILITY CURSOR ZO M O nt abou del is centered about this point and the sor p o and out Pressing Control and the right mouse bu cti The user picks a poi t which to zoom The mo User may move the cur u r down to zoom in tton can also a vate this function WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display e butto e mouse diagonally down until the desired window size is reached Release the left button The section inclu
349. lated criteria The user is able to alter these values according to individual case test requirements The simulation results have to be output according to their case requirements Therefore the nodes contact surfaces and sections are defined either automatically or by user defined node set segment set and section during the setup process The output request and the frequency sampling rate are also defined for post processing purposes Legislated criteria such as HIC TTI and Femur Load are calculated in addition to the crash pulse impact force and contact force and can then be post processed All simulations have more than one possible setup process The VPG Safety module offers the user great flexibility in the various utility routines to perform the simulations This manual documen ne recommended processing approach for each case to demonstrate the program Each s a documented proven procedure for setting up the case submitting the analy ng the results The approach is technically sound and will provide correc highly recommended that new users run their simulatio ual at least once before developing their own procedure using the various utility features and functions 7 4 2 Crash Tool Library ETA has dev s presented in this manu ts over the last decade This set of crash tool models is included as part of the software license agreement and should not be used with other pre post processors The cr ers the flexibility to store their
350. lation model A total of 21 different governmental or insurance institute test procedures are contained within VPG Safety 1 5 eta VPG Special Features eta VPG was initially designed with unique features specifically for virtual proving ground simulations These features are not found in competing general purpose pre and post processors The development of these features and functions was necessary to satisfy the following VPG requirements 1 Generation of complicated full vehicle full system models and retention of complex non linear material properties contact definitions etc 2 Generation and retention of user defined libraries and modules such as a tire library proving ground road surface libraries etc 3 Post processing of potentially large amounts of analysis data displacement forces acceleration stress and strain derived from time domain solution of multiple events and the conversion from time domain results into frequency domain results frequency mode shape and PSD etc INTRODUCTION 4 Post processing of stress and strain results of multiple events and conducting the fatigue life prediction 5 Modeling and set up of vehicle impact analyses using FMVSS ECE and Insurance Institute standard testing procedures The key features are briefly described below A more detailed explanation of these features is found in Chapter 7 LS DYNA 971 Interface Module eta VPG incorporates a complete direct LS DYNA version 971 interface e
351. ld for a specific pa d Enter a number in the MARGIN to de 9 17 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING feature can also be used to scale the picture margin 9 7 5 3 ORIENTATION Description e Select the drop down option next to UNIT to choose the unit inch or mm used for paper size and This function defines the image orientation as landscape or portrait on the printed copy 9 7 5 4 OPTION Description These options are for defining printer output and layout on the paper Usage PRINT BACKGROUN If this function is toggled on the background color of the screen will be included in the print out If this function is t be no background color on the print out e s border This function prints eta VPG at the lower right corner of the picture PRINT GRAPHIC DESCRIPTION If the function is toggled on the field below the toggle switch is enabled to use User can enter a string of characters to describe the current image to be printed on the print out 9 7 5 5 NUMBER OF COPIES D oggled off there will BOUNDING BOX This function draws a line frame around the pictur PRINT TIME STAMP This function prints the current time at the lower right corner of the picture PRINT FILE NAME This function prints the file name at the lower left corner of the picture PRINT ETA LOGO Description This function allows the user to print multiple copie on the PRINT TO FILE option s
352. line interpolation constraint Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA RAINT CARDS SPOTWELD Desc User s Manual for further description CONST ription This function defines massless spot welds between non contiguous nodal pairs Refer to section 6 3 4 for more details ARDS TIE BREAK CONSTRAINT C Description This function defines a tied shell edge interface that can release locally as a function of plastic strain of the shells surrounding the interface nodes A rather ductile failure is achieved Usage 1 displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description When CREATE is selected VPG 6 128 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR CONSTRAINT CARDS TIED NODES W FAIL Description This function defines a tied node set with the failure based on plastic strain The n Usage odes must be coincident is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA Us 6 8 DS Descriptio 1 When CREATE er s Manual for further description 3 INIT COND CAR n Initial condition cards provide a way of initializing velocities and detonation points Usage ompts gt SELECT OPTION 1 VPG pr Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREATE command respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages spl
353. lines the prompt will read gt SELECT 3 LINES AT TOP Select the second set of three lines in the same order as the first set of three lines 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER MESH TYPE 1 OR 2 gt EN 1 TER NO OF ELEMENTS N1 X N2 X N3 gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines REMESH will not accept mesh and prompt for new N1 N2 N3 2 gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS ON ALONG THE FACE EDGE gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS BETWEEN THE FACES 4 Once N1 N2 and N3 have been entered the prompt will read 6 65 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R ID MESH 8 LINE SOLID MESH SOL Description This function is intended for automatic 8 node solid element generation in a volume Th surface enclosed by 4 lines Each line must be defi ed beforehand line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible A row of N2 elements will be generated from the starting end of line 1 along line 4 on the bottom surface The pattern will be repeated N1 times along line ottom surface will be repeated N de sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follow rection of line 1 using the right hand rule The created elements will be i ENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function e volume is defined by a top and bottom
354. llows the user to separate part s from a structure For example two parts that are connected by common nodes may be quickly separated or disconnected using SEPARATE PART This function also provides the user with the option to create zero length RBARS between the separated parts Common nodes between parts become new nodes once the parts are separated Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE RIGID LINKS BETWEEN SEPARATED PARTS Y N YES creates a part called ZEROBAR in PART CONTROL that automatically contains all of the newly created RBARS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART OR ALL SP A E 3 If the user selects ALL PARTS VPG prompts gt XXXX of RBE2s RBE2S CREATED BETWEEN SEPARATED PARTS All modeled parts in the database separate from each other This includes PLATES SOLIDS CBARS CBEAMS CELAS1 CELAS2 ELEMENTS PLOTEL ELEMENTS CROD CTUBE ELEMENTS These entities do not separate RBE2 RBAR ELEMENTS CONM2 ELEMENTS CORD2R ELEMENTS 4 If the user enters SELECTED PARTS VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO SEPARATE gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART The parts separate from each other and VPG prompts gt XXXX of RBE2s RBE2S CREATED BETWEEN SELECTED PARTS 10 3 17 TRANSPARENT MODE Description This function makes selected parts transparent during the shading operation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A LINE L ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART 2 The user makes the appropriate selection then enters DONE to exit
355. m local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system Once the coordinate system is determined VPG prompts the user to magnitudes for the transformation respec If MOVE was selected gt ENTER U V W INCREMEN i e 0 0 1000 This will copy the selected element s 1000 units along the Z axis Ente If NORMA PRE PROCESSOR L offset was selected gt ENTER THICKNESS IN NORMAL DIRECTION Thickness is the distance away from the plane of the elements in the direction of the ele 6 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE COPIED ELEMENTS IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO COPY MAPPING LCS tion Mapping allows the user to copy and move or simply move selected elements from o ordinate system to another user defined coordinate system along the UV Usag ne user defined co plane e 1 pied elements to the new on COORDINATE This defines the orientation of the selected elements VPG prompts gt KEEP SELECTED ELEMENTS YES copies the selected elements and moves the co location NO removes the selected elements to the new locati 2 VPG prompts gt DEFINE FIRST LOCAL 6 37 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE SECOND LOCAL COORDINATE This defines the new orientation for the selected elements VPG aligns the copied or moved elements according to their UV orientation 6 3 4 CREATE Descripti
356. me of the defined sets VPG isplays an ID number next to each element node part d Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part S EXIT Note Because more than one set ID number may be assigned to each element node part viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific set at a time D ALL type SET VPG displays all node sets and returns the user to the set submenu 6 6 13 SET ON OFF PART escription This function allows the user to turn on et It allows for convenient organization of pa and off parts included in a selected part s rts in a complicated model and manipulation of he of output control data The following options are available in the SET menu when the analysis code is set to NASTRAN in the large numbers of parts in a sub assembly level 6 7 SET MENU NASTRAN functions in the SET MENU create sets that facilitate the organization T SETUP MENU 6 108 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Note If the analysis code is set to LS DYNA see section 6 6 Each option contains a similar submenu with the following options for manipulating the output control of their respective set groups CURRENT DELETE REMOVE EMPTY SETS REMOVE UNREF SETS INCLUDE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS REVIEW LIST SHOW SET A d iption of ea
357. me technique to simulate the tire air pressure behavior under an impact condition The simulation of the frictional contact of the tire model with the rigid road surface was extremely realistic and correlated with existing tire data To complete the system level simulation the need for dynamic test based boundary conditions was necessary ETA therefore formed an agreement with MGA Research Corporation to model the company s vehicle proving ground facility located in Burlington Wisconsin ETA created road surface profiles that could be digitized from the proving ground construction drawings in a CAD surface format FEA mesh could be generated from the CAD surface data and produced a selection of specific road profiles representing the characteristics of the proving ground testing conditions After years of development and evaluation it has been confirmed that VPG technology produces repeatable reliable and correlated analysis results The level of confidence from users and correlation results has lead to aggressive simulation use and a broad application scope Dr John Hallquist at Livermore Software Technology Corporation LSTC has been instrumental in the development of the VPG application technology by implementing various features and functions of LS DYNA to meet VPG system modeling requirements This partnership with LSTC has allowed the VPG methodology to grow in scope of application and reliability The release of VPG 1 0 in 1998 was an effo
358. mits is recommended that the user of the number Too small a Attenuation factors commonly range between 10 and 50 It choose a passhand frequency that is approximately 5 to 20 9 78 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING numb er will cause the program to stall Usag er will cause a computational error and too large a numb e After the user enters the appropria e rameters ROL win t pa icks the OK and accept the input parameters and exit the DATA CONT dow Press Apply to display the filter result ON cl 9 12 7 COMPUTATI Description This function allows the user to create a new curve through the algebraic operation of several selected curves including Add Subtract Multiply Divide and so on ADD ction enable to each other This fu e curves to be selected and added n s two or mor SUBT C RA T This function enables two or more curves to be selected and subtracted form each other MULTI LY P c n enabl es to be selected and multiplied This fu tio es two or more curv n DIVIDE This function enables two or more curves to be selected and the values are divided to from a quotient curve BRACKET c n enabl iority level of an expression This fun tio es the user to change the pr TRAN SLATE c n h two selected curves The new Y axis value of the first selected curve and the new Y axis value of the second curve UL CU VE Description This fun tio
359. mpts for the number of copies 4 Once the n be gt MOVE OR MO RO lected enter the angle increment right hand rule the same as the ABO 5 VPG gt IN GINAL PART Y N YES mpts the user to select mpts the user to create a lo ect the global coordinate system Re for a thorough explanation of this procedure d coordinate system has been defi um r of copies has been entered VPG prompts for the method of copy ROTATE M R VE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS i e 0 0 1000 This copies the surface s 1000 units along the W axis or global Z TATE If ROTATE is se about the W axis The remaining commands are MOVE option RT prompts CLUDE COPIED SURFACE IN ITS ORI NO 6 2 3 CREATE S LINES Description This function creates sectional line data on the selected surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 edge numbers on the surface and Once the surface is selected VPG places 6 19 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR prompts th u ges 1 and 2 3 lines along edges 1 and 2 These lines are included in the current part 6 2 4 DE Descripti e ser to enter a number of section lines along ed VPG creates a set of section LETE on This function deletes the selected surfaces from the database Usage rompts the user to select a surface on the screen 1 VPG p sel ST fr
360. n 1 on the bottom surface The element pattern on the b 3 times toward the top surface The no s the di ncluded in the CURR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES FOR BOTTOM NT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines INE LINE function in the LINE The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE menu 2 V gt 3 O gt ENTER NO OF ELEM N1 N2 N3 sitive integer greater than one for the number of elements along the selected lines ce N1 N2 and N3 have been entered the prompt will read gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH SOLID MESH 9 LINE SOLID MESH Desc on LINE SEGME for the 8 LINE SOLID function as in the COMB menu The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 8 LINE SOLID PG prompts SELECT LINES FOR TOP PRE PROCESSOR nce the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read N1 any po N2 any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines N3 any positive integer for the number of elements between the bottom and top surface 4 On YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines REMESH rejects the mesh and prompts for new N1 N2 N3 ripti This function allows the user to generate 6 or 8 node solid elements automatically in a v is defined by 9 lines 3 lines for the top surface 3 lines for the bott
361. n 6 3 4 Usage 6 19 4 DELETE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to delete connections of the five types Choose one type of them and select a connection Usage DONE The selected connections would de deleted from the database BORT DO nothing and exit 6 19 5 Description A REPLACE PART This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT A PART AS TARGET TO BE REPLACED Select a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it 2 After click EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT A PART TO REPLACE TARGET PART Select a new part by choosing its name or an element of it to replace the part that has been selected 3 VPG prompts 6 203 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt REPLACE TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N YES The target part will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE DEFAULT VALUE 10 Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part 6 19 6 REPLACE PART SET Description This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set the nodes index on the ol
362. n adds additional elements to the current element set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS FOR ELEMENT SET XXXX gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 When the user has finished selecting elements and exited the menu VPG prompts ded to the set and numbered accordingly Description gt xxxx ELEMENTS IN SET XXXX The selected elements are ad 6 7 18 LIST This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 19 REMOVE ELEMENTS Description This function deletes elements from the current element set Usage gt SELECT ELEMENTS FROM ELEMENT SET XXXX 2 When the user has finished selecting elements and has exited the menu VPG mpts gt xxxx ELEMENTS REMOVED FROM SET XXXX 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS pro 6 115 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 7 20 R Desc iption EVIEW LIST r This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selec 6 7 21 SH ELE Description ted the elements of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window OW SET MENT This functio the user to display all or some of the defined element sets VPG displays the appropriate ID numbers on the screen next to each defined element Usage n allows 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST ment sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT UNDO EXIT t sets and returns the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu 6 7 2
363. n enters DONE to exit the menu 10 3 4 CONNECTING ELEMENTS gt R W LL BE ADDED TO PA Description This function is used to determine element connectivity from one part in the model to another Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR CONNECTING ELEMENTS gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR A PART NAME OF A PART 2 After selecting the desired part VPG prompts XXX IS SELECTE M NT X PARTS CONNECTED TO XXXX ELEMENT TO TURN ON The connecting elements are highlighted Once the part is selected VPG prompts gt PART XX D FR gt XXXX ELE E S OM XX gt PICK AN OR PART NAME 3 gt PART XXXX IS TURNED ON 10 15 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON ed unti xit I NODE Description This step is repeat l the user selects e 10 3 5 CONNECT NG S This function is used to determine node connectivity from one part in the model to another Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR CONNECTING ELEMENTS gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR A PART NAME OF A PART lt part list gt CURSOR AT ELEMENT CURSOR AT LINE CURSOR AT SURFACE CURRENT PART UNDO EXIT 2 After selecting the desired part VPG prompts gt PART XXXXX IS SELECTED gt XXXX ELEMENTS FROM XXX PARTS CONNECTED TO XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON lt connected part list gt ALL CONNECTED PARTS SELECT BY ELEMENT UNDO LAST EXIT The connecting nodes are highlighted 3
364. nately larger elements from the selected corner A bias factor less than 1 0 generates proportionately smaller elements from the selected corner Note This function may be used with only the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S functions EDGE BIAS MESH toggle Description This option allows the user to enter an element bias factor 0 625 to 1 6 relative to the selected edge of the line data that is to be modeled This function multiplies each adjacent element that is created from the selected edge by the bias factor Note A bias factor greater than 1 0 generates proportionately larger elements from the selected edge A bias factor less than 1 0 generates proportionately smaller elements from the selected edge Note This function may be used with only the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S functions AUTOMATIC BACKUP toggle Description VPG will automatically create a backup database for the current VPG database This parameter controls the frequency of this back up process The default for this parameter is OFF The back up database is stored in the file named bak where is the name of the current database In the event of a software failure or database corruption this file may be renamed or copied and then reopened in VPG ELEMENT TYPE DISPLAY Description The toggle switches in the ELEMENT TYPE DISPLAY determine what element types will be shown in the drawing window The default setting for all the switches is ON TYPE IDENTIFIER Des
365. nction deletes sets with no nodes assigned to them 6 7 6 REMOVE UNREF SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets that have not been assigned boundary conditions constraints initial conditions or loads 6 7 7 INCLUDE NODES Description This function adds additional nodes to the current node set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NODE SET XXXX gt SELECT NODES 2 Once the nodes have been selected and the user has exited the INCLUDE submenu VPG displays the nodes with their node set number 6 7 8 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window OVE NO De 6 7 9 REM DES scription This fu letes selected nodes from the current node set Usage nction de VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NODE SET XXXX nd the user has exited the REMOVE submenu RENUMBER SET D 1 gt SELECT NODES 2 Once the nodes have been selected a VPG removes the nodes from their node set 6 7 10 escription This function allows the user to renumber any of the defined sets This may be performed on a single set or an all sets contained in the database Usage 6 111 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTED OPTIONS s 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW NODE SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 4 gt T mpts XIT W LIST De ripti 2 If entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompt
366. nd h end lim at the user choose a passhand frequency that is app mately 5 to 20 of the number Too small a num e the program to sta Us maximum passband ripple should not be too close to either the given low or hig ended th its Attenuation factors commonly range between 10 and 50 It is recomm roxi ber will cause a computational error and too large a number will caus ll age After the user enters the appropriate paramete clicks the OK and accept rs ameters and exit the DATA window the input par CONTROL 9 12 De Select Apply to display the filter result 6 24 SAE FILTER scription This function allows e er smooth curves acco th us to rding to the Society of Aut Us omotive SAE filter specification age Select the SAE type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button belo Clic A C N and prompt the user to inp 8 s ow appropriate value in the DA ys e d w the FILTER king the Select button the DAT O TROL windows will pop up ut the Cutoff value as Figure 9 7 h n e user may enter the Th TA CONTROL windows which displa th efault values for Figure 9 78 DATA CONTROL Window for SAE Filter Afte cept the input parameters and Sele r the user enters the appropriate value clicks the OK and ac exit the DATA CONTROL window ct Apply to display the filter result 9 77 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 12
367. nd the e user may modify the propertie type of material that the user has defined in he wi Define Properties 6 11 7 ER REF MATL Descripti n SE UN A o This function automatically deletes all materials that have no parts assigned to them Usage re found VPG 1 VPG deletes any unreferenced materials If unreferenced materials a 6 154 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R shows the number of materials found and prompts gt OK TO DELETE 1 UNREFERENCED MATERIALS Y N materials are found VPG prompts O D and return rial menu S Des If no unreferenced gt N UNREF MATERIALS FOUN s to the mate 6 11 8 LIST MATERIAL cription This function lists the defined materials in the MATERIAL LIST 11 9 MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF 6 Description This function toggles the display of parts between the material and part color 6 11 10 ON OFF D tion escrip This function toggles the selected material on or off Usage The user selects a material by picking an element C or material name M of a material 2 The selected material and parts are turned on off 6 11 11 RENUMBER ID Description 1 VPG prompts the user to select material gt SELECT MATERIAL PRE PROCESSOR This function renumbers the material ID for the selected material or all materials Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS 2 If the user enters AUTOMATIC AL
368. nd the node number displayed on the screen T BY CURSOR Default gram highlights the node that is nearest the cursor Click the left mouse button when ired node is traced The selected node will be ID IDENDTIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element its part and its nodes by cursor selection default or key in ID number The program will highlight the selected element with the element number on the screen and also display the element connectivity in the message window The operation of this function is same as the IDENTIFY NODE function Figure 9 4 shows the CONTROL OPTION window when the function starts Figure 9 4 Identify Element Control Option Window DISTANCE BETWEEN TW This function calculates the distance between two nodes selected by cursor pick or key in node number The program displays a CONTROL OPTION window as shown as Figure 9 5 O NODES Figure 9 5 Measure distance Control Option window 9 8 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING The operation on SEELECT BY CURSOR and KEY IN ID is same as in IDENTIFY NODE function REJECT LAST allows user to reject the last selected node Once two nodes are selected the program labels the distance and X Y Z components between the selected nodes on the screen an tputs the information in the message window d also ou ANGLE BETWEEN THREE NODES This fun node define rtex of the angle The program displays a CON
369. ne to extend 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER Input any real number 4 Selecting UNDO will undo the last extend operation ripti This function allows the user to draw a line between nodes or points via a com and mouse selections The created lines are incorporated into the CURREN L MENU Usage bination of keyboard T PART or see PART CONTRO 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE INCREMENTAL XYZ The user may enter an additional DX DY DZ from the previous point or node selected to continue drawing the line KEY IN XYZ The user may enter up to 3 points globally to define a point or node NODE POINT es from work plane to generate lines Set work plane parameters including coordinate total size and grid size starts the generation of a new line 6 1 11 IDENT Desc WORK PLANE Select nod WORK PLANE SETTING REJECT LAST DONE completes the creation of the line and EXIT will terminate this function IFY ription This function allows the user to identify any node or point and its corresponding al location in X Y Z coordinates e glob Usag 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS ALL NODES KEY IN NODE NUMBER 6 8 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR NODE EXIT numbers If NODE is selected the number of the node nearest the cursor location will appear on screen The following message
370. nlinear analysis stone Onc CE MENU is selected the active ON interfaces are displayed with the s the stonewalls are drawn as rectangular sh the slave nodes are labeled with small color filled squares The segments slave no otted in the interface color The segment letters for master and slave may be tu the control button SEGMENT SYMBOL in the SETUP dialog box A detailed descriptio s Note Contact inte finition is implemented for a LS DYNA RADIOSS or PAM CRASH analysis only 6 13 1 COPY cription e the CONTACT INTERFA active parts The master segments are drawn as interior outlines of the elements where the egments are defined The letter M is labeled in the middle of the master segments Likewise slave segments are labeled with the letter S The apes and des and stonewalls are pl rned OFF by setting n of each function is given in the following section rface de Des This func faces Usage tion allows the user to copy previously defined inter pts gt SELECT CARD TO COPY 2 nterface card from the menu VPG prompts gt CO ACT ID X 6 13 2 CREATE Description 1 VPG displays the CONTACT CARD LIST which lists the defined interfaces and prom Upon selecting an i NTACT ID XX DUPLICATED FROM CONT T Usage hi function allows the user to define new interfaces s 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CONTACT OPTION 6 163 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S
371. nsions tha eria 6 93 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 gt ENTER MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM LENGTH CRITERIA If the length of the of the edges of the elements is greater than the user defined MINIMUM and is less than the user defined MAXIMUM then VPG gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK n the user defined MINIMUM or is greater than the user defined MAXIMUM then VPG echoes one of the following messages gt ELEMENT xxxx FAILED CHECK or 2 to place them into a part Y N The PART DEFINITION window pops up The failed elements are removed from the original pa s and added to the NEW PART N and CURRENT NO ck individual elements for their size DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 scriptio VPG prompts A valid response is any real number greater than zero echoes the message If the length of the of the edges of the elements is less tha gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK If failed elements exist then VPG prompts the user gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART YES rt The new part is O gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR ELEMENT SIZE The user can cursor che 11 CHECK SKEW De n This function allows the user to check any skew in the plate or solid elements ge Usa 1 VPG prompts TER SKEW CRITERIA DEGREE A valid response is any real number greater than zero a then VPG
372. nt ikedit iflush 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 5000 iprtf 0 CONTROL_SHELL wrpang itrist irnxx istupd theory bwc miter proj 20 000 1 1 0 2 2 1 0 rotascl intgrd lamsht 0 0 0 0 CONTROL_TERMINATION endtim endcyc dtmin endeng endmas 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CONTROL_TIMESTEP dtinit tssfac isdo tslimt dt2ms lctm erode ms1st 0 0 0 90000 0 0 0 1 100E 3 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I If you don t have RADIOSS ENGINE file VPG will set up DYNA DATABASE cards for you as following 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DATABASE_ABSTAT dt 0 5 DATABASE_GLSTAT dt 0 5 DATABASE_MATSUM dt 1 000 DATABASE_NODOUT dt 0 5 DATABASE_RCFORC dt 0 5 DATABASE_RWFORC dt APPENDIX C C 19 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C 0 5 DATABASE_SECFORC dt 0 5 DATABASE_ELOUT dt 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DATABASE_BINARY_D3PLOT dt cycl lcdt beam npltc 5 000 0 0 0 DATABASE_BINARY_D3DUMP dt cycl 100000 DATABASE_BINARY_RUNRSF dt cycl 1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO RADIOSS 9 1 ELEMENT Delete PLOTEL CONSTRAINED_INTERPOLATION element DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 BEAM BEAM DISCRETE SPRING Convert DYNA s VID into RADIOSS s third node INERTIA MASS MASS M
373. ntrol Cards and Analysis Parameters to specify a complete analysis model file The ANALYSIS Menu allows users to define what type of analysis results will be generated from the analysis through the definition of DATABASE cards nd to write and execute the analysis model from the ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu or alternately the option to export a file for later execution VPG provides a comma VPG provides a comma 8 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION 8 1 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual ANALYSIS Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION VPG allows the user to define CASE CONTROL ANALYSIS or to submit an analysis for execution directly from the VPG interface using the functions found in the ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu The CASE CONTROL option will lead user to define each case user can select BOUNDARY CONDITIONS and LOADS defined in database for each needed case all these cases share the same finite elements model so user doesn t need to define B C and LOADS in several databases which will save user much time and energy The ANALYSIS SUBMISSSION Menu contains functions that create the necessary Control Cards and Analysis Parameters to specify a complete analysis model file The ANALYSIS Menu allows users to define what type of analysis results will be generated from the analysis through the definition of DATABASE cards nd to write and execute the analysis model from the ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu or alternately the op
374. nts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SEATBELT ANCHORAGE CRASH INFORMATION 7 61 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE CENTER OF LOWER BLOCK 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE CENTER OF UPPER BLOCK 4 VPG prompts TOR TO MOVE SEATBELTS gt DEFINE A VEC VPG MODULES AXIS TO ROTATE SEATBELTS 5 VPG prompts gt DEFINE AN 7 62 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 5 1 3 FMVSS225 CHILD RESTRAINTS ANCHORAGE Description This function will create child restraints anchorage in the model Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER CHILD RESTRAINTS INFORMATION 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE FIRST SEAT LEFT SIDE CLAMP Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE FIRST SEAT RIGHT SIDE CLAMP 3 VPG prompts 7 63 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 5 1 4 FM Description VSS208 KNEE BOLSTER This function will create knee impacto n them in the model in order to conduct a knee bolster analysis Usage rs and positio E BOLSTER CRASH INFORMATION VPG MODULES 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER KNE 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE DRIVER LEFT KNEE Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as
375. nu NASTRAN Section 6 7 Boundary Conditions LS DYNA Section 6 8 Boundary Conditions NASTRAN Section 6 9 Material Property LS DYNA Section 6 10 Material Property NASTRAN Section 6 11 Element Property Section 6 12 Contact Interface Section 6 13 Dyna Miscellaneous Section 6 14 Super Element NASTRAN Section 6 15 Mass Menu LS DYNA Section 6 16 Assembly LS DYNA Section 6 17 Mass Menu NASTRAN Section 6 18 Assembly NASTRAN Section 6 19 CHAPTER 7 VPG MODULES Road Menu Section 7 1 Suspension Menu Section 7 2 Tire Model Section 7 3 Safety Module Section 7 4 Occupant Safety Section 7 5 Dummy Positioning Section 7 6 Delete Model Section 7 7 ALE FSI Module Section 7 8 DTM Module Section 7 9 Heeds Section 7 10 CHAPTER 8 ANALYSIS Case Control Section 8 1 Analysis Submission Section 8 2 iii CHAPTER 9 POST PROCESSING Introduction Section 9 1 General Overview Section 9 2 File Manager Section 9 3 Icon Bar Section 9 4 File Format Section 9 5 Configuration File Section 9 6 File Menu Section 9 7 Edit Menu Section 9 8 Tool Menu Section 9 9 Option Menu Section 9 10 Post Process Section 9 11 Graph Section 9 12 CHAPTER 10 UTILITY Viewing Options Section 10 1 Icon Bar Section 10 2 Part Control Section 10 3 Utility Section 10 4 Display Options Section 10 5 Macro Section 10 6 A P P E N D I C E S
376. o an angle increment right hand rule ts in the normal direction by the specif POIN from one point to the other coordinate system local or global this step is not required for rough explanation of how to create a local coordinate along the selected ax A NORMAL OFFSET moves the selected plate elemen ied thickness T TO POINT moves the selected plate elements 3 VPG prompts for a desired NORMAL OFFSET A tho 6 68 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 4 VPG prompts for the transformation value The elements are transformed 6 V ne of the following options 5 PG prompts the user to select o AGAIN performs the same transformation again with the same specifications NEW TRANSFORM begins another transformation operation REVERS E 6 3 23 HOLE FILL Description E rejects the previous transformation XIT exits the function This function allows user to fill the element holes Usage 1 VPG prompts hlighted g an inner boundary VPG prompts NO If YES is selected filled elements will be tangent to original elements If NO is selected filled elements will not be sure to tangent to original 6 3 24 BALL MESH Description gt LEFT BUTTON SELECT MIDDLE BUTTON ABORT gt SELECT AN INNER BOUNDARY TO FILL All inner element holes are displayed hig 2 A
377. o step 1 4 EXIT returns the user to the PART SET submenu 6 7 26 INCLUDE PARTS Description This function adds additional parts to the current part set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PARTS FOR PART SET XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user has selected a part VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS SELECTED The user is returned to step 1 until EXIT is selected 6 7 27 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 28 REMOVE PARTS Description This function deletes parts from the current part set Usage gt SELECT PARTS FROM PART SET XXXX gt P EM OF A PART 2 When th as f the sel parts fro 6 7 29 RENUM Description 1 VPG prompts ICK AN EL ENT OR PART NAME e user h inished selecting parts and has exited the menu VPG removes ected m the set BER SET This function renumbers sets U the defined sage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTED OPTIONS 2 If entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST PART ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 118 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT This prompt is repeated until all sets are entered new set ID SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST Once set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW PART SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO
378. ocal or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 Once the coordinate system is determined VPG prompts MOVE 6 15 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R ROTATE ABORT tered gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e local W axis or the global Z axis VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR TRANSFORM 5 After tr A L REVERSE OPERATION rn to step 1 LINE POINT points VPG prompts Afte ABORT OR ON LINE INCREMENTAL XYZ NODE POINT REJECT LAST Repeats the previous transformation If MOVE is en i e 0 0 1000 This will move the selected line s 1000 units along the W axis If ROTATE is selected the user enters an angle increment Note All rotational commands are about th 4 ABORT LINE POINT ansformation the following options are available GAIN Repeats the previous transformation INE POINT Reverses the previous transformations DONE EXIT EXIT will retu 6 VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR TRANSFORM ABORT PRE PROCESSOR 7 After selecting lines or gt SELECT REFERENCE LOCATION ABORT KEY IN X Y Z NODE POINT REJECT LAST DONE 8 r selecting reference location VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET LOCATION CURS KEY IN X Y Z DONE 9 After tran
379. ocal system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordin 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES ABORT exits the function without creating a section line DONE will complete the section line and return the user to step 3 EXIT completes the section line and exits this function 6 1 19 SHOW 6 13 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Description The user may identify any existing line or line direction using this function The lighted the starting point is labeled with a circle and subsequent points are wheads oriented in the direction of the line selected line is high represented with arro The arrows indicate point locations on the line and line direction Usage 1 VPG gt NE NO enter the line No to select a line EXIT 6 1 0 Desc prompts SELECT LINES ABORT KEY IN LI LINE select line with cursor DONE EXIT completes the show line and exits this function 2 SPLIT LINE ription The user may split a line at a desired cursor location at the nearest point or at an ection inter with another line Us s age 1 VPG prompts SPLIT BY CURSOR is selected go to step 2 SPLIT BY PLANE is selected SPLIT LOCATION ion closest to the intersection of the go to step 4 2 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO SPLIT 3 VPG prompts gt PICK ABORT nywhere the user clicks the mouse CURSOR LOCATION a L
380. ods as following G prompts to select surf Enter TOPO LOGY MESH s to select surface 2 VPG prompt 3 After selecting surface the Mesh Input Window pops up and allows parameters to be set in the window Click OK to close the window 4 VPG prompts 6 61 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR gt CONTINUE MESHING Y N 5 G prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO RE MESH s gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO RE MESH VP Enter TRIANGULAR MESH Enter TRIANGULAR MESH 2 VPG prompts to select surface 3 After selecting surface a mesh input window is pop up 4 After clicking OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO RE MESH 6 3 17 AUTO REPAIR Description This function allows the user to automatically repair mesh Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 After selecting elements VPG prompts gt ENTER MINIMAL ELEMENT SIZE DEFAULT IS 4 000 3 gt NGEL DEFAULT IS 25 00 4 After enteri gt ENTER MAX INT ANGEL DEFAULT IS 150 00 5 After enteri gt ENTER BOUNDARY GAP TOLERANCE DEFAULT IS 1 000 6 T RE REPAIRING After entering the value VPG prompts ENTER MIN INT A ng the value VPG prompts ng the value VPG prompts Then VPG prompts gt ACCEPT REPAIRING RESUL YES NO 6 62 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 18 2 LINE M Description The use
381. offers an option for the user to change the title of X axis ITLE horizontal The x title will be displayed under the X axis 9 12 6 12 Y T Description This function offers a pt for the user to n o ion change the title of Y axis vertical The 9 12 De Y title will be displayed under the Y axis 6 13 MIN MAX scription This function offe s o ion for r an pt the user to change the range of axis of coo 9 12 Description rdination 6 14 NEW VALUE This function allows the user to modify the y value of selected point Clicking a text box is inactive and can t be modified The Y text box is active and the user can modify the value Description point on a curve with left mouse a cross s displaying on the selected i point and the x and y yin he X value of coordinate of the point is displa g on the corresponding text boxes T on it 9 12 6 15 OPERATION This OPERATION allows the user to modify selected curve There are some kinds of operations on curve objects These operations belong to two categories curve data d curve object operations selected before modify the dat ow will display under the curve operation such as integration different square root and so on an such as Copy Delete and Paste One or more curves must be a of the curve Clicking the Operation button the pop up wind window The pop up window is shown in figure 9 75 9 72 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING
382. om surface see 6 LINE MESH and 3 lines connecting the top and bottom surfaces Usage olume The volume 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES AT BOTTOM gt SELECT 3 LINES AT TOP gt SELECT 3 LINES ON THE SIDE STARTING BETWEEN LINE 1 amp 3 9 LINE MESH is similar to 6 LINE MESH with the exception of 3 connecting lines 6 66 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR for all line selections should be 2 See 6 L descriptions SOLID MESH 1 Descriptio Line direction clockwise or counter clockwise consistent INE MESH for further details and the prompt 2 LINE SOLID MESH n This function allows the user to generate 8 node solid elements automatically in a volume T surface see 8 L ting the top and bottom surfaces Usage he volume is defined by 12 lines 4 lines for the top surface 4 lines for the bottom INE MESH and 4 lines for connec 1 VPG prompts SELECT 4 LINES AT BOTTOM gt SELECT 4 LINES AT TOP SH with the exception of 4 connecting lines The user should maintain the consistent direction clockwise counter clock wise for all line selections 2 ESH for further details and prompt descriptions LIN AR MAPPING Descriptio gt gt SELECT 4 LINES ON THE SIDE STARTING BETWEEN LINE 1 amp 4 12 LINE MESH is similar to 8 LINE ME See section 8 LINE M E n This function allows the user to generate solid element
383. om the menu after selecting surfaces and click DONE 6 2 5 2 L Descripti gt SELECT SUFACE Surfaces will be highlighted as they are selected Surfaces may be de selected by ecting REJECT LA the selected surfaces are deleted INE SURFACE on This function generates surfaces between two selected lines The orientation of the surface is independent of the direction of the lines The created surface is included in the CUR RRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage RENT PART The CU ts gt PICK LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 2 LINE SURFACE y check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW n Once the lines have been selected and a surface is created 6 2 6 3 LINE SURFACE Description 1 VPG promp LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 2 LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE The user ma LINE in the LINE sectio This function generates a surface in an area defined by 3 lines line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible The new surface is included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before Usage proceeding with this function 1 VPG EGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 3 LINE SURFACE fun
384. ompts Once the CLOSED or enters OPEN CURVE to DONE CLOSED de 6 30 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R the points selected OPEN CURVE defines a spline curve passing through all the points selected with the first and last point selected as the starting ice 2 VP gt SE DARY AB DONE EXIT ce boundary CU an existing curve on the surface open or on RE 3 VPG prompts LOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY dary will be ed during the trim operation The inner boundary can be a line ment open spline closed spline or circle A DO EXIT BOUNDARY The surface outside of the outer boundary will be trimmed as the inner boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE Deselects the curve selected for the trim operation 4 Y N generates a trimmed surface and retains the original surface 5 he user is returned to step 2 of TRIM SURFACE command TRIM SU Descri and ending points of the curve The user then selects exit tw G prompts LECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUN ORT SURFACE BOUNDARY Selects the outer closed surfa RVE ON SURFACE The user may select closed as the outer boundary of the trim operati JECT LAST CURVE gt SELECT C The surface between the outer boundary and the inner boun retain seg BORT NE NO INNER CURVE ON SURFACE The user may select an existing curve on the surface op
385. ompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG asks for a 6 12 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR prompts gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTORS The user selects the desired scale factors Example The factors 1 1 1 reflect the line size in the negative Y direction across the UV plane the factors 0 5 0 5 0 5 reduce the lines by 0 5 6 1 18 SECTION CUT Description This function will gene ion of s c rate line segments along a user defined UV plane at the intersect ting the UV plane The line section that is created will be included th Usage elected lines interse in e CURRENT PART see PART CONTROL MENU 1 VPG s ate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 3 If the user accepts the coordinate system VPG prompts gt DISTANCE FROM PLANE W Users may now input a distance along the W axis from origin of the selected coordinate system Any real value is a valid response The section line will be created at the distance W in the UV plane A section line is defined at a specific distance from the user defined local coordinate system prompt gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to create section lines VPG prompts the user to create a l
386. on e 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 6 125 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS GLOBAL Description This function defines global constraints Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED GLOBAL DEFINITION window pops up The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA ser s Manual for further description CONSTRA De U INT CARDS INTERPOLATION scription This function defines otion of a single dependent nod an interpolation constraint With this constraint type the m e is interpolated from the motion of a set of independent S JOINT ion PRE PROCESSOR nodes Please refer to section 6 3 4 for details CONSTRAINT CARD Descript This function defines joint stiffness for joints defined by the previous option CO Description NSTRAINT CARDS JOINT STIFFNESS This function defines a joint between two rigid bodies please refer to section 6 3 4 for details Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts OPTION gt SELECT The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LINEAR 6 126 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O
387. on ntent of etween DY This parameter rec latest opened file 9 Description ords the directory of the 7 FILE MENU The options in this pull down menu are used to open save import export and print related files See Figure 9 8 9 13 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Figure 9 8 The File Menu A detailed descri in the following sections 9 7 1 OPEN Description in the following sections 9 7 1 OPEN Description ption of each function is given en This function displays the Open File d log and allows the user to read result file o file dialog is shown in Figure 9 9 ia r model file into eta Post The open Figure 9 9 Select File window Usage To open result file or mo ct File Type that will be read in Locate the desired file using the browser and click model win be displayed in the Graphic Display Window and will be ready for po Eta Post supports LS DYNA d3p TRAN punch and output2 result files for post processing The program le window again for the user to select a Nastran model file after the N It is necessary to select a matching Nastran model in order to post processing the result correctly del data sele OPEN The st processing lot d3eigv and d3drif NAS will display the Select Fi astran result file is loaded 9 14 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 7 2 IMPORT Description
388. on allows users to map pressure from a part to another part SHOW THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated thickness values via color fringe plots The thickness value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPS Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated resultant strain values via color fringe plots The resultant strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGxx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated xx component stress values via color fringe plots The xx component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGyy Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yy component stress values via color fringe plots The yy component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGzz Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated zz component stress values via color fringe plots The zz component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGxy Description This function allows the us
389. oordinates 3 Onc dinates are defined VPG prompts gt E RAG DISTANCE ALONG W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 4 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 5 Once the number of layers is entered the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH prompts to select elements e local coor NTER D DRAG MESH 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG Description This section describes the options for the 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH The line drag commands extrude the selected plate elements to create solid elements bounded by 3 or 4 lines in space 6 54 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 THEN PRESS D OR 4 CONTROL LINES The user must select the 4 volume lines in clockwise or counterclockwise order 3 lines are selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS OF SOLID ELEMENTS ACCEPT MESH Y N Line direction is not important during 4 LINE DRAG but the lines should be of reasonable length to form the desired shape The control lines do not have to 6 3 7 ELEMENT TYPE Description Once the desired pass through the nodes of the plate elements Defines element type prior to utilizing the 2 3 4 LINE MESH or SURFACE MESH Element types are as following Usage after finish g this function elements created in 2 3 4 LINE MESH will be the elem 6 3 8 IDE Descr
390. option is turned on Cli Figure 9 21 Part Attribute Control WIREFRAME This option allows the user to display the selected parts in wire frame when the SHADE option is turned on Click on the WIREFRAME button and select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen The program will not shade the selected parts when th Window Part Material Figure 9 22 Part Attributes Contro Window Transparency l Figure 9 23 Part Attributes control window Wire Frame Figure 9 20 Part Attributes control window Part Color 9 24 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING select parts Click on the NO CONTOUR option and select the parts from the part list window or click the contour of the selected part during CONTOUR ANIMATION Instead the selects parts will be plotted in There are some functional buttons on the Part Attributes window for the user to easily select groups of parts ALL PARTS Enable the user to select all the parts on the RE e user to reverse the selected parts All the selected parts will be unselected and all the unselected parts will be selected CL R ed parts to unselected UN r to cancel the last selected operation before pressing the Apply REDO Enables the user to cancel the UNDO operation APPLY Enables the user to execute the selected operation
391. ost uses 14 different colors to distinguish parts in the model This function enables the user to modify any part color from default setting The program displays the COLOR MAP control window as shown in Figure 9 18 Usage The user may select any color to modify by clicking color block in the on a color palette The program will display a change part color control window as shown in Figure 9 19 The pro Mater 9 8 8 Descr cedure of changing Part Color is same as in Change ial Color that has been described in Section 4 6 PART ATTRIBUTES iption The functions in PART ATTRIBUTES control window allow the user to customize the display characteristics for selected parts in the model There are fives options The default PART ATTRIBUTES control window is shown in Figure 9 20 Usage PART COLOR The user may change part color from the color list Click on the PART COLOR option and select the parts from the part list window or click the part from the screen Figure 9 18 Color Map Control Figure 9 19 Part Color Control 9 23 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the parts on the screen Select a the screen and the part name in the window Please see the Figure 9 20 PART MATERIAL This option allows the user to assign material property to the selected parts when the GRAY SHADE option is turned on The available mater
392. other two global axes TWO POINTS Select the first node to define the origin of the LCS and select second node to define the local W axis and click EXIT to define the LCS The local coordinate system will be defined at the first node with local w axis aligned with the vector connecting the first and the second node THREE POINTS Select the first node to define the origin of the LCS select the second node to define the local U axis and the third node to define the U V plane The local V and W axis will be computed according to the right hand rule Once the local system is defined and accepted the program will display the section lines in part color that represent the section cut of the model in the u v plane The program will activate other options as shown in Figure 9 32 for the user to change or operate the section cut CLEAR SECTION CUT This function enables the user to erase the section cut from the display window NORMAL VIEW This function enables the user to view from the normal of the cut plane SECTION CUT OPTIONS This function controls the export and display of the section cut CUT PLANE POST PROCESSING 9 30 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING The default number of cut planes is 20 if ALL PLANE option is selected This means there will be 20 cut planes equally spaced i CUR PLANE is toggled on the current section cu function EXPORT SECTION CUT If the ALL P section cuts will
393. ous cards for defining the thermodynamic behavior of gas flow into an airbag as well as a reference configuration for the fully inflated bag 6 167 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA Keyword User s Manual for further description 6 14 2 ALE Description This function sets the default control parameters for Arbitrary Lagrange Eulerian and Eulerian calculations Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 6 168 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 3 COMPONENT GEBOD Description This function sets the defau rol parameters for component gebod Usage lt cont PRE PROCESSOR ts gt SELECT OPTION 1 VPG promp The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 4 CONTROL CARDS Description Control cards are optional default settings Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LEFT BUTTON TO DEFINE OR MODIFY RIGHT BUTTON TO REMOVE gt SELECT CARD TO CREATE 6 169 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R A YES in the right column ind
394. ow trace node and define node curve 9 TOOL MENU Figure 9 28 Tool Menu A detailed description of each function and corresponding submenu is given in the following section 9 9 1 Description SECTION CUT POST PROCESSING This function displays the section cut of a finite element model with a defined plane i window are shown e SECTION CUT functions starts ntersecting the edges of elements The functions in SECTION CUT control in Figure 9 29 DEFINE CUT PLANE is the only option available when th 9 28 eta VPG 3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Figure 9 29 Section Cut Operation Usage DEFINE CUT PLANE The section plane is the U V plane of a user defined local coordinate system The local coordinate system may be defined by selecting one two or three nodes from the model The program displays a Control Option window as shown in Figure 9 30 The program also changes the displayed model to gray color Figure 9 30 Define Cut Plane 9 29 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 31 Section Cut Operation ONE POINT Select a node by cursor to define the origin of the LCS then select a global direction as the local W axis and click EXIT The global direction may be either or X Y or Z axis as listed in Figure 9 31 The local coordinate system will be defined at the first node with the local W axes follow the selected direction and U V axes parallel to the
395. ows the user to define and save road surfaces Models may be created using the modeling functions available in eta VPG imported using VPG s IGES translator or selected from VPG s library of road surfaces VPG s library currently consists of 11 models The road surfaces included in this library are digitized models of roads found on the MGA Research proving ground facility in Burlington WI and make up the majority of the 20 000 mile General Durability Test see the eta VPG Applications Manual Section 1 5 By default the road surfaces are defined as rigid bodies with nominal mass At the user s discretion the road surface may be modeled using deformable material definitions The following functions are included in VPG s ROAD DEFINITION menu ROAD DEFINITION A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 1 1 SHO ROAD W cription Des This option allows the user to look at the 12 types of roads and find which road s the user would want to create Usage Select SHOW ROAD from the VPG Road Menu The road surface models contained in the VPG Road Library will be displayed 7 1 2 SELECT FROM LIBRARY Description This option allows the user to read a Road Surface from the library into the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ROAD SURFACE FROM LIBRARY gt ENTER COMMAND USER DEFINED Prompts the
396. p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 1 gt TO MOVE If NODE TO SURFACE is selected VPG prompts SELECT NODE UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT A POINT ON SURFACE RFACE is command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 6 V E TO SURF BOUNDARY 1 If NODE rompts gt CT NODE TO MOVE gt SELECT SU After th MO E NOD TO SURF BOUNDARY is selected VPG p SELE UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This com e UNDARY gt SELECT SURFACE er returns to step 1 mand returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After sel cting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT A POINT ON SURFACE BO After this command is completed the us 6 4 13 PART CONNECTION Description This function determines the names and identification numbers PID of all of the parts that share the selected node The message is displayed in the VPG prompt area of the screen and the nodes are highlighted with small white circles Usage 1 VPG prompts gt S ELECT NODE TO SHOW PART CONNECTION Once o is listed and the user returns to s gt NODE xxxx IS NOT IN DATABASE If the u D ENTRY that is not connected to a part VPG prompts 6 4 14 PRO Description a n de is selected the part connect
397. pension file STF stands for Suspension Template File This file format is an ASCII file format developed by ETA for the purpose of defining suspension topologies connectivity and parameters Additional information on this file format may be obtained from ETA 7 2 7 R Description EAD XML_FILE ADAMS CHASSIS or A 7 2 8 MODI Descripti This function reads in a XML suspension file format as exported by DAMS CAR FY HARDPOINT on defined su e Usage When the user has read in an Adams Pre file this option allows the user to modify sp nsion geometry definitions from within the VPG database 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO MODIFY SUSPENSION HARDPOINT The MODIFY HARDPOINT window is displayed for user to modify hard point X Y Z positions When the user has finished altering the data select OK SHING D 7 2 9 MODIFY BU escription This option allows the user to modify defined suspension models bushing efinition from the V d PG database Usage gt PIC NSION Once a bushing from the s spension is selected the definition window is 1 VPG prompts K A BUSHING TO MODIFY SUSPE u 7 20 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S displayed as shown VPG MODULES he user has finished altering the data select OK to accept this 7 2 10 MODIFY STF_PART Descripti When t change or select cancel to quit on This option allows the user to modify
398. played vertically DO YOU WISH TO MAP ANY LINE ON TO THE X Y PLANE YES 5 If the user selects YES VPG prompts MULTI POINT REGION WINDOW REJECT LAST the XY plane in true view 10 1 FACE REMOVAL toggle De 1 VP gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE POI VPG asks for a desired coordinate system local 2 VPG displays th gt ACCEPT Y N NO returns the user YES continues this ABORT 3 VPG prompts gt KEEP ANY GLOBAL AXIS VERTICAL Y N YES gt ENTER THE VERTICAL GLOBAL AXIS x y z the screen The object remains in its true view if thi No O N option displays the d 4 VPG prompts gt NO exits the TRUE VIEW function gt SELECT LINES ABORT EXCLUDE ON OFF LINE PART DONE 6 Selecting DONE copies the selected lines along 13 HIDDEN SUR scription This function improves the integrity of the 3D simulation of a model The user ma lines on and off while using the SHADING and FILL HIDE PLOT com This ue elements that prevent objects in the background from showing thro oreground Usage y toggle the hidden mands effect creates opaq ts in the f ugh objec 1 VPG prompts gt HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL ON or 10 6 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL OFF Note When checking for penetration make sure the flag HIDDEN SURFACE ON appears along the bottom of the display area 10 1 NC
399. plays the section card list with all defined properties 6 160 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 2 Once the user selects a section to be redefined VPG displays its definition card The us that section 6 12 11 ERASE Description er can then redefine UNREF SECT Th gned to them 6 12 12 LIST NAST Description is function automatically deletes all sections that have no parts assi RAN Th G MENU WINDOW VPG displays the element properties in their corresponding colors when the p the properties are turned OFF ion is function lists the names of the element properties in the VP roperties are turned ON and in white when 6 12 13 LIST LS DYNA Descript This function displays the VPG section card list 6 12 1 Description 4 ON OFF This function turns the selected property and its parts ON OFF Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property gt SELECT SECTION WINDOW MULTI PT REGION O CTION UNDO E 2 VPG tur selected property and its parts on off 6 12 15 PROPERTY toggle Description PRE PROCESSOR ON ALL SECTION FF ALL SE XIT ns the PART COLOR Thi 6 12 16 RENUMBER Description s function toggles the display of the part between its property and part color This function renumbers the ID for a selected property or for all properties Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option PTIONS gt SELECT O 2 If the user
400. pled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DARY CARDS CYCLIC Descripti BOUN on These boundary co ational symmetry such a nditions can be used to model a segment of an object that has rot s an impeller The segment boundaries may be curved or planar Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS ELEMENT METHOD Description This function defines element method boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description Description BOUNDARY CARDS FLUX This function defines flux boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS MCOL Description This function defines MCOL boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s ual for further description Man BOUN Description DARY CARDS NON REFLECTING This function defines a non reflecting boundary The option applies to continuum domains modeled with solid elements as indefinite domains are usually not modeled For geomechanical problems this option is important for limiting the size of the m r further description ion odels Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual fo BOUNDARY CARDS NON REFLECTING2D Descript This function defines a non reflecting boundary The option applies to continuum domains modeled with two dimensional solid elements in the XY plane as indefini
401. point keyboard entry or The elements will be created simultaneously upon selection of the desired s exit this function 1 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONM PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER MASS VALUE AND MO I33 etc MOMENT OF INERTIA The user PG prompts To create th any combination of the three nodes point EXIT or ABORT will CREATE BEAM CBEAM NASTRAN Description This subsection covers the options for the BEAM NASTRAN CBEAM section of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 gt lays a pop up window of CBEAM OFFSET VALUE 2 Once the beam offset value has been entered the prompt will read VPG prompts ENTER CBEAM OFFSET VALUE VPG disp 6 42 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CBEAM ELEMENT rd entry or any combination of the three 3 On gt T OR VECTOR FOR CBEAM ORIENTATION To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboa ce the desired nodes points have been selected VPG prompts PICK NODE P Up to three values may be entered to define a vector normal to the beam s local 4 When user enters VECTOR VPG prompts gt ENTER CBEAM VECTOR i e 0 0 1 CRE TE TRUSS ELEMENT NASTRAN Description XY plane A This section covers the options for the TRUSS ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PROPERTY NAME OR EX TO EXIT
402. position 2 After selecti ECT FIRST REFERENCE NODE 3 After selecting the first reference node VPG prompts gt SELECT SECOND REFERENCE NODE After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 rompts gt SELECT FIRST REFERENCE NODE mmand returns the last node moved to its pr ng a node VPG prompts gt SEL 6 4 12 3 MOVE NODE TO MID DISTANCE 1 If NODE TO MID DISTANCE is selected VPG p UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This urns the last node moved to its previous position 2 Afte gt SELECT SECOND REFERENCE NODE 3 After selecting the second reference node VPG prompts NO If YES is selected two moved nodes are merged 6 4 12 4 MOVE NODE TO SHORTEST PT 1 If NODE TO SHORTEST PT is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE command ret r selecting a node VPG prompts PRE PROCESSOR gt MERGE TWO MOVED NODES YES ABORT After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT FIRST REFERENCE NODE After selecting the first reference node VPG prompts gt SELECT SECOND REFERENCE NODE completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 5 MOVE NODE TO SURFACE 3 After this command is 6 81 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a
403. prompts to select option as following The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD LOAD D N NLINEAR LOAD O escription This fun ubcase definition ction defines and modifies nonlinear loads The loads may be used in the s Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following 2 W hen entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD LOAD TEMPERATURE FIELD Desc ription This function defines and modifies temperature fields The fields may be used in 6 139 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR the s Usage ubcase definition 1 VPG prompts to select option as following When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following 2 6 9 3 SP Desc The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD C ription This function allows the user to create and or modify the SPC single point traint options that constrain nodes in six degrees of freedom cons Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area 2 n the following pages Each of these commands is described i SPC CREATE Description This function creates a new SPC set The SPC set may be used later for subcase definition Usag e 1 When the user enters CREATE SPC VPG prompts TER SPC
404. ption This function assigns materials to selected parts Usage 1 If no materials are present in the da ase VPG gives the message NO gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN MATERIAL aterial will be assigned to the selected elements of the parts The selected in the material color after the user exits this command 6 10 5 CHANGE COLOR Desc on tab MATERIALS DEFINED IN DATABASE and returns to the command prompt 2 Otherwise VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL Users may select an existing material by entering one name or by picking an element on the screen that is assigned to the desired material default 3 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 4 The m parts will be shown ripti This function changes the color of a selected material Usage right edge of the graphic area ECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT rom the color bar PY Desc 1 The color bar is displayed on the 2 After the user selects the material VPG prompts MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt gt SEL 3 The color of the material changes to the user selected color f 6 10 6 CO ription This function duplicates the properties from one material onto another material Usage 1 VPG displays the material card list and prompts gt SELECT MATERIAL TO COPY 2 Once the user selects a material to copy VPG copies the material and prompts
405. pts gt SELECTED ROAD SURFACE SUMMARY gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE TARGET ROAD SURFACE oad surface is selected its characteristics are displayed in the VPG MENU WINDOW R TO EXIT Once the desired r 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER C 7 1 5 MOVE ROAD SURFACE Description This option allows the user to translate a defined road surface It is used primarily to move two road surfaces together before combining them into one Usage 1 VPG prompts gt MOVE ROAD SURFACE IN DATABASE gt SELECT A NODE IN THE ROAD SURFACE TO BE MOVED 2 After the first node is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT A CORRESPONDING NODE FOR THE NEW LOCATION After the second node is selected the road surface is moved by aligning the first selected node with the second 7 7 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 1 6 COMBINE Description This option allows the user to combine 2 road surfaces into a single continuous road surface It is used in conjunction with the MOVE ROAD SURFACE function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt COMBINE ROAD SURFACES IN DATABASE gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE FIRST ROAD SURFACE The selected road surface is highlighted in white 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE SECOND ROAD SURFACE The selected road surface is highlighted in white Note The selected surfaces must be in contact Otherwise VPG will prompt gt BEFORE COMBINING PLEASE MOVE TWO ROADS TOGETHER
406. r may re enter above parameters and repair again ESH Thi function generates elements between two selected lines A rectangular patter N1 is the number of elements along selected line and N2 is the number of elements between the two N4 parameters for the mesh each side may have a different number of elements e g 10 5 8 7 The nodes in the direction of N2 are generated by linear interpretation between the opposing starting end of line 1 to the starting end of line 2 The ttern will be repeated N1 times along line 1 The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 with the right hand rule The created elements are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART ould be verified before proceeding with this function Usage s n of N1 by N2 quadrilateral elements will be generated where the direction of the first lines For a transition mesh it is possible to enter N3 and nodes on the two lines A row of N2 quadrilateral elements is generated first from the pa sh 1 VPG promp gt PICK LINE LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines fo function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE se the desired lines for 2 The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once th ed lines the prompt will read gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS ON EACH SIDE N1 N2 N3 N4 N1 Any positive integ
407. r to change the origin of coordinate systems 10 4 3 DRAW ARROW Description This function allows the user to draw arrows about a specific image on the display screen Arrows created using this function may be removed from the display by selecting the CLEAR function from the icon bar Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK THE TAIL LOCATION FOR THE ARROW CURSOR LOCATION EXIT UNDO LAST 2 After the user selects the location of the tail VPG prompts for the location of the head gt PICK THE HEAD LOCATION FOR THE ARROW CURSOR LOCATION EXIT UNDO LAST 3 After the user defines the location of the head VPG draws the arrow and returns to step 1 See figure 10 4 3 Figure10 4 3 Draw Arrow 10 4 4 DISTANCE Description This function calculates the distance between 2 points 2 nodes or a node and a Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 31 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY point This command is also listed in the ELEMENT OPTIONS and NODE OPTIONS menus Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a node or point gt SELECT TWO POINTS NODES After the user selects the appropriate points or nodes VPG displays in the prompt area of the screen the vector distance and the DX DY and DZ components 2 ABORT DONE or EXIT terminates this function 10 4 5 DEFINE TITLE Description This function allows the user to enter a title or text label at any location on the display screen The title may be removed by selecting the CLEAR function from the icon
408. requency for the model The ROAD Menu allows users to select and place a road surface model in their VPG model This menu is only available if the user is in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu SETUP command 4 5 SUSP e SUSPENSIO automotive suspension types are predefined and users may input their data into the desired suspension template VPG will then construct an LS DYNA based model using appropriate entities for the various model components Chapter 7 This menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu 4 7 SAFETY This menu accesses the VPG Safety Module Access to this menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu 4 8 ALE FSI VPG s ALE FSI menu provides tools for generation and set up of fluid structure interactions and blast modeling 4 9 DTM This module allows users to set up a series of drop tests for a test specimen using a few simple roblem description templates MAIN MENU p 4 10 HEEDS ows users to pe e s to define op r input file and can be used by HEEDS to identify and use these variables in optimization studies he HEEDS menu in T a d output HEEDS fi 4 11 ANALYSIS The ANALYSIS menu allows users to M ny non graphic dels require a results VPG allows users to access all CONTROL CARDS and DATABASE parameters available in LS DYNA Similar capabilities are available for NASTRAN RADIOSS and PAMCRASH model databases 4 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 4 M a i n M
409. reviously saved LS DYNA ASCII graph file When exiting the GRAPH MENU the user has an option to save the graphs in a binary file for future processing This file will be loaded much faster than th 3 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 4 M a i n M e n u Chapter 4 Main Menu he first me Thi nu bar the user encounters when beginning a session with VPG The initial s is t Chapter 4 options unfold into an additional series of submenus These submenus are documented in the following sections e form of finite element data CAD files or a combination of the two h also allows users to SAVE databases It is important to know that eta VPG does h ides functions for RESTART IMPORT and EXPORT functions s y Once sel d is placed in this part Menus are selected by mouse pick and contain all eta VPG functions Each of these menus may be accessed through the Function Keys 4 1 FILE The FILE menu allows for the import and export of data into and out of the eta VPG database Thi ata may be in th s d e FILE menu MAIN MENU T not automatically save the user s data The user must execute the SAVE command to write the database changes to the file T e FILE menu prov 4 2 PARTS Models constructed in eta VPG are organized into PARTS These Parts may contain line surfaces and or elements Parts may contain only one type of entity or may contain an ombination of entity types Parts may be created from the P
410. rference will be shown highlighted Us er can define search tolerance for check result 9 9 14 SPH CONTROL Description This function allows the user to define options of showing SPH results Usage Select particle ribbon or vector as the SPH display type and then define size of pa 9 De rticle ribbon or vector User can select all or a portion of particles to show result 9 15 DRAWBEAD FORCE scription This function allows the user to show drawbead force for metal forming 9 9 16 EXPORT BOUNDARY LINE Description This function allows the user export boundary lines of parts 9 40 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Usage 1 User selects one or more parts and boundary lines of selected parts will be shown highlighted 2 hlighted boundary lines saved as format of lin 9 9 17 MODEL SUMMARY Description Export the hig This function enables the user to display the statistics regarding elements and nodes in the model Figure 9 44 shows a sample model summary POST PROCESSING Figure 9 44 Model Summary 9 41 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY 9 10 OPTION MENU The f the g y window unctions in this menu are shown in Figure 9 45 The user can customize the appearance in raphic displa Figure 9 45 Tool Menu A llowing section 9 De ription detailed description of each option is given in the fo 10 1 AXIS toggle sc The XYZ coordinate system i
411. riangular elements s the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu gt REPLACE WARPED QUADS WITH TRI ELEMENTS Y N YES YES will repla 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR WARPAGE At this point the user may pick individual elements for degree of warpage DONE or EXIT return PRE PROCESSOR 4 If some of the e he user to place them into a new part gt INCLUDE YES The PART pops up The pl will be added to this part and the part will become curren NO gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR WARPAGE At this poi er may pick individual elements for degree of warpage DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu The warped ids quadrilateral elements or newly created triangular elements will remain rts on lements fail and NO is entered VPG prompts t FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N DEFINITION window ates and or solids t nt the us sol in their original pa 6 5 15 FEATURE LINE DISPLAY Descripti This function allows the user to check the angle between plate and solid elements n user specified angle criteria The user can also automatically generate plotel elem isplay the structures main features Usage based o ents at these locations to d 1 VPG gt LINE ANGLE CRITERION DEFAULT 20 DEG An example of warped elements prompts ENTER FEATURE 6 96 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2
412. rompts gt ACCEPT OFFSET DIRECTION YES NO YES creates a line 6 10 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R NO creates a line opposite the displayed direction at the specified distance PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 Descript 14 PROJECT ion This function projects lines and or points onto selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts T SURFACE gt SELEC 2 Once d surfaces are selected click on DONE VPG prompts the user to crea ystem 3 selected entity lines points are projected onto the surface If the ce along the global Z or W vector VPG displays a CTION FOUND FOR XXXX POINT 6 1 15 RESPACE LI Desc the desire te choose a coordinate s F gt DE INE PROJECTION VECTOR gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN After accepting the coordinate system VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR PROJECTION 4 Based on the poi poi nt or nts on the line do not intersect the surfa message gt ROJE NO P NE ription This function allows the user to re space the number of points on the selected line equi Usage distantly 1 NTS VPG prompts gt LINE FOR RESPACING POI SELECT 6 11 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS ON LINE OR E TO EXIT integer greater than two VPG includes the endpoints of the line as ne 3 EXI NE to exit this function 6 1 16 R
413. rs the options for the RIGID LINK subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS U PRE PROCESSOR sage OR 1 TO EXIT Any combination of integers 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 may be entered as degrees of freedom Blanks or commas are not allowed between the degrees of freedom 6 all D O F 2 gt gt ENDENT NODE To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or AT DEPENDENT NODE The user may select up to 200 dependent nodes registers the selection and starts the prompt cycle CR Descripti 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER DEPENDENT D O F DEFAULT 123456 i e 12345 Next VPG prompts for nodes points for element PICK NODES POINTS AT INDEP any combination of the three 3 Once the desired node or point has been selected VPG prompts gt 4 Once the user picks the dependent node s DONE re EATE PLOTEL ELEMENT NASTRAN on This section covers the options for the PLOTEL ELEMENT subsection of CREATE e cross section pattern for the DRAG MESH op U ELEMENTS PLOTEL elements are used as th eration sage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three An element will be created after two nodes points are selected EXIT or ABORT will exit this function ents may be output to a NASTRAN bulk data file They are ignored Note PLOTEL elem 6 3
414. rt to address the specific needs of system modeling by combining the tools created for tire modeling and suspension modeling with the finite element meshing and associated tools found within the eta FEMB product As usage progressed and the needs of users expanded fatigue analysis software was embedded into VPG as were the signal processing tools used in NVH post processing The dual nature of many of the models created in VPG and the desire to construct one model 1 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n for use in several types of simulations drove the development of the VPG Safety module This module was incorporated into eta VPG version 2 0 which was released in 2002 1 3 VPG Methodology for Event Simulations Virtual Proving Ground VPG is a general term used to reference a simulation methodology using the tire and proving ground road surface approach The VPG method is a set of techniques used with an explicit nonlinear dynamic analysis program which allows for the complete analysis of a mechanical system including all joints bushings materials and geometric non linearities using an event based analysis The class of problems targeted is those in which a mechanical system is to be analyzed in a dynamic sense In other words when a mechanical system is in use the displacements forces accelerations and stresses occur in real time The VPG method allows for the calculation of all of these quantiti
415. rted from the librar 6 A ROTATION menu appears in the VPG Menu Window Using these menu options the user may perform 2 D positioning of the dummy rotating the dummy body tibia lower leg or foot position 7 41 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 S 8 VP r dummy OR PASSENGER FMVSS214 DUMMY 9 The passenger dummy is imported and po nt Similar to the driver dummy a rotation menu appears in the VPG Menu Window The user can rotate the whole dummy or just the leg or foot to adjust their positions Select EXIT to compl The M velocities will also be defined in the model elect EXIT G pr the location of passenge gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT F ompts Select KEY IN X Y Z and input values sitioned according to the H poi VPG MODULES ete the dummy positioning DB and dummies will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and Figure 2 An Example of a Generated Dynamic Side Impact Model 7 42 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 4 5 3 FMVSS208 RIGID WALL 0 30 DEG Description This function allows users to create rigid walls to simulate the FMVSS208 0 Degree or 30 Degree Frontal Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RIGID WALL CRASH INFORMATION 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL VPG MODULES 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the bumper part
416. rval of the results and restarts Generating a Rear Suspension Model he rear suspension is generated in the same manner as a front suspension 3 Generating Tire Models After entering the PARAME are edited to the user s parameters Once the tire geometry is defined VPG prompts the user for the location of the tire The user may define the location of the tire through an X Y Z posit node poi 3 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 3 G e t t i n g S t a r t e d GETTING STARTED 7 Analysis Submission From the ANALYSIS menu select DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS edit submit the analysis For additional information please see Section 8 1 8 Displaying Results Enter the POST PROCESSING menu and select D3PLOT LS DYNA the analysis d3plot from the File Menu The results from each of the analysis steps will then be read into eta VPG A binary result file ot pp Since the results are no be reread into the post processing menu when the user his file is read much faster than the d3plot files ng To graph the results select GRAPH from the Post Processor Menu The user then has the e LS DYNA ASCII files the dialogue box and 1 result file Then select t saved to the eta VPG will be created at this time named d3pl database this binary file should wishes to view the results again T The results are now ready to be post processed using a variety of features Graph Plotti 9 option of reading in a p
417. s DELETE SHELL THICKNESS deletes the thickn N scription This function allows the user to generate one dimensional elements along a selected line automatically The elements created will follow the direction of the selected line The node sequence of the element begins at the starting point of the selected line according to the right hand rule The created elements will be included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage A list of available element types will be displayed as following 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT TYPE 2 VPG then prompts gt SELECT LINE FOR LINE MESH en made VPG prompts gt PICK NODE PT OR VECTOR FOR BEAM GAP ORIENTATION 3 Once the line selection has be gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS ON SELECTED LINE Any integer greater than 1 is valid 4 VPG then prompts for the beam orientation 5 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO 6 58 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R YES NO YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines 6 ABORT DONE or EXIT exits this function 6 3 13 ENUMBER Description R This function allows the user to renumber all elements in the existing database w ting a summary table report of the element ranges between each part The user may renumber elements in sequence or by p
418. s gt PICK THE FIRST NODE ON RIGID BODY 3 After selecting the first node VPG prompts gt PICK RIGID BODY TO LOCATE BUSH SECOND NODE 4 After selecting the second rigid body VPG prompts gt PICK THE SECOND NODE TO DEFINE BUSH AXIAL DIRECTION 5 After selecting the second node VPG prompts gt PICK THE THIRD NODE TO DEFINE BUSH ORIENTATION After selecting the third node material card for bush definition pops up After clicking OK the bush definition is finished 6 17 Description EXIT 4 MODIFY CONNECTION This function allows the user to modify connections Choose one type of them and se Usage lect a connection Please refer to section 6 3 11 1 After entering MODIFY CONNECTIO pts gt ENTER COMMAND N VPG prom 6 17 5 DELETE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user delete connections of the five types Choose one type of them and select a connection Usage DONE The selected connections would be deleted from the database ABORT Do nothing and exit 6 17 6 REPLACE PART Description This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part Usage SELECT A PART AS T Select a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it 1 VPG prompts gt ARGET TO BE REPLACED 6 197 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P
419. s gt SELECT 2 POINTS NODES 3 VPG displays angle information gt ANGLE XX XX TOP XX XX SIDE XX XX REAR XX XX 4 DONE or EXIT returns the user to the UTILITY menu 10 4 2 COORDINATE SYSTEM Description The functions in this menu create and modify local coordinate systems Note The COORDINATE SYSTEM command requires several submenus To help guide the user each submenu is described in the following subsections Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND 10 4 2 Coordinate System Menu 2 After the user enters the appropriate system VPG lists the options specific to that system CREATE Description This function creates local coordinate systems The CS command is used in conjunction with the ASSIGN COORDINATE SYSTEM TO NODE command Usage Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 29 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCAL SYSTEM TYPE NODES SYSTEM VECTOR 2 VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 After the user enters one of the options above the local coordinate system appears on screen with its C S number DELETE Description This function deletes local coordinate system sets from the database Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE COORDINATE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE 2 EXIT deletes the selected coordinate system from the database and resets the node
420. s Apply to display the filter result 6 19 FIR FILTER ription This function allows the user to smoo the curve accord th ing to the finite impulse respo Usag nse FIR filter specifications e Select the FIR type from the pop up list window a clicking the down tri vi angular button below Click pt the user to input sh ropriate coeff ON RO wi efault values for the FILTER ing the Select button the DATA CON RO windows will pop up and prom T L the corresponding parameters as Figure 9 77 own The user may enter the app icient parameters in the DATA C T L ndows which displays the d Figure 9 77 DATA CONTROL FIR Filter of 9 12 6 20 PASSBAND FREQUENCY Description The maximum passband re is determined through the equ f quency ation Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Pass default value is 10 of the p 9 12 Desc banduser Total Number of Points on Graph Time Duration The assband frequency 6 21 STOPBAND FREQUENCY ription Stopband frequency is formulate opband Passband d St Passbanmax Pass 9 12 Desc user band The default value depends t Passband user on he user 6 22 MAXIMUM PASSBAND RIPPLE MAX PASSBRIPP ription Passband ripple value is be 0 and 1 0 dB tween 0 9 12 N De 6 23 MINIMUM STOPBAND ATTENUATION MI ATT 1 0 DB scription Stopband attenuation must be greater n 1 0 dB T tha he stopband frequency a
421. s displayed in the lower left corner of the display window This option allows the user to toggle the axes on off 9 10 2 TITLE toggle Description The title of the result file is displayed in the upper left corner of the display window option al Th lows the user to toggle the title on off 9 Description is 10 3 COLORBAR This function shows color bar when animate results 9 10 4 MIN MAX MARKER Description This function shows the minimum and maximum marker at relative value position POST PROCESSING 9 42 eta VPG 3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 10 5 LOGO toggle Description This function toggles the logo ETA POST at the lower left corner of screen on and off 9 10 6 NORMAL COLOR toggle Description This option allows the user to display the part color on positive side and gray color on the negative side of the finite element model hen PLATE NORMAL option is selected in the DISPLAY OPTIONS window This er to visually check the part for reversed normal of the finite element mesh Figure 9 46 shows a part displayed with NORMAL COLO w option is essential for the us R and PLATE NORMAL option Figure 9 46 Typical display with Normal Color and Plate Normal option 9 10 7 BOUNDARY LINE toggle Description Boundary lines are shown black when this option is on 9 10 8 ELEM OUTLINE toggle Description Element outlines are shown black when this option is on POST PROCESSING 9 43 eta VPG version 3 3
422. s element property CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY RBE2 T SHELL SOLID SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID DISCRETE CELAS1 Create a LCS for spring direction APPENDIX C C 25 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual APPENDIX C MASS CONM2 CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD RBAR INERTIA CONM2 CONSTRAINED_NODE_SET RBE2 11 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY VPG seletes SEATBELT section and converts spring stiffness into element property DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN SECTION_BEAM integrated PBAR According to it s ELFORM and CST SECTION_BEAM resultant PBAR SECTION_BEAM discrete PBAR SECTION_BEAM truss PROD SECTION_BEAM spotweld PBAR SECTION_DISCRETE PELAS SECTION_SHELL PSHELL SECTION_SOLID PSOLID SECTION_SOLID_ALE PSOLID SECTION_TSHELL PSOLID 11 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All material MAT1 11 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET SPC INITIAL_VELOCITY INITIAL V ELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_NODE INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION INITIAL VELOCITY LOAD_NODE_POINT NODAL FORCE LOAD_NODE_SET NODAL FORCE LOAD_SHELL_ELEMENT SHELL PRESSURE LOAD_SHELL_SET SHELL PRESSURE 11 5 OTHERS Convert NODE SET ELEMENT SET Delete all other cards that can t be converted DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN DEFINE_COORDINATE_NODES LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_VECTOR LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_CURVE LOAD CURVE 12 CONVERTING FROM RADIOSS TO NASTRAN APPEND
423. s for the crash target for MDB gt PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEH 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model alues The EUROPEAN SIDE IMPACT DUMMY VPG MODULES 4 VPG prompts for the location of the driver dummy gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR ECE95 DUMMY 5 Select KEY IN X Y Z and input v is imported from the library and put on the specified location 6 A ROTATION menu appears in the VPG Menu Window The user can rotate the dummy or leg to adjust their position The default rotation angle increment is 1 degree You can select CHANGE ANGLE to change it 7 49 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 Select EXIT to finish Dummy Position Figure 9 An Example of a Generated ECE95 Dynamic Side Impact Model 7 4 6 4 ECE R66 Description This function will generate ground platform and supporters to simulate an ECE R66 bus roll over Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ECE R66 INFORMATION 2 VPG prompts to locate the supporters gt PICK FRONT LEFT TIRE TO LOCATE FIRST SUPPORTER 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from front left tire VPG prompts gt PICK REAR LEFT TIRE TO LOCATE SECOND SUPPORTER 4 Select an element from rear left tire the s
424. s model by linear mapping Usage Select source elem e the same The distributi ents and target elements and the numbers of both elements should b ons of node locations are similar and VPG will automatically look for 6 67 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR the aligning nodes in the model After setting the number of layers between source elements and target elements click on the Apply button to generate solid elements by linear mapping SO ID MESH TETRA MESH Descripti L on This function allows the user to generate 4 or 10 node solid elements auto atically in a volume Usag m e 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TETRA MESH OPTION 2 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART are selected VPG automatically generates 4 10 nodes tetra mesh 6 3 22 T Description After parts RANSFORM This function allows the user to transform selected elements by move rotate mapping LCS and normal offset The normal offset option only applies to plate elements It should ted that the normal of the plate elements should be consistent for a proper normal offset Usage be no 1 V 2 VPG then PG first prompts the user to select the desired elements prompts the user to select the desired transformation O M VE moves the selected elements to a new location according to the distance entered is ROT TE rotates the selected elements t
425. s to the global system Note To remove the local systems definitions from individual nodes the user must reassign the nodes to the global coordinate system refer to ASSIGN COORDINATE SYSTEM on page 3 of this section ERASE UNREF LOCAL Description This function allows the user to delete any local coordinate systems not referenced by any entity in the model MODIFY Description This function modifies the definition of an existing local coordinate system Usage 1 VPG displays the define coordinate card list and prompts gt EXIT TO CONTINUE 2 After selecting the coordinate system VPG displays the CSYS DEFINITION CARD which allows the user to select and edit the coordinate systems data 3 Once the user accepts the modified card the new local system appears on the screen All local systems belonging to the modified coordinate system automatically adjust to match the labeled coordinate system CURRENT Description This function switches the current coordinate system from local to global DISPLAY ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of local coordinate systems on or off Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 30 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual UTILITY RENUMBER Description This function changes the ID of selected local coordinate systems The user may select individual local coordinates or may renumber all or a portion of the local coordinate systems in the model database TRANSFORM Description This function allows the use
426. sage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER STATIC SIDE DOOR INTRUSION INFORMATION Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK THE FRONT EDGE IN THE LOWER SURFACE OF THE RAM gt PICK A NODE OR INP RAM UT THE Y VALUE OF THE 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the door outer panel as target position The rigid ram will be positioned to desired location Proper contact and velocity will also be defined in the model Figure 1 An Example of a Generated Side Door Intrusion Model 7 40 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 4 5 2 FMVSS214 DYNAMIC SIDE IMPACT Description This function allows the user to import the FMVSS214 US Moving Deformable Barrier MDB and dummies and position these according to the requirements of FMVSS 214 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FMVSS214 SIDE IMPACT INFORMATION 2 Input values and press OK 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEHICLE CLEARANCE Select a node from the left most part of the vehicle The MDB is import d put on the specified location n of the dummy POINT FOR DRIVER FMVSS214 DUMMY IDE IMPACT DUMMY is y and put on the specified location ed from the library an 4 VPG prompts for the locatio gt PICK TEST POINT H The H POINT is a reference point of the dummy based on which the dummy is located 5 Select KEY IN X Y Z and key in input values The US S impo
427. section specify which nodes or elem ry file ents are outputted into the binary histo Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DATABASE P Description The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description NODAL FORCE GROU The definition cards in the NODAL FORCE GROUP subsection specify a nodal force group for output into ASCII files Usage 1 ys one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA rther description DATABASE SPRING FORWARD When CREATE is selected VPG displa User s Manual for fu 6 175 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Description The definition card in the SPRING FORWARD subsection creates a spring forward nodal force file Usage 1 G displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE SUPER PLASTIC FORMING When CREATE is selected VP Description The definition card in the SUPER PLASTIC FORMING subsection specifies the output intervals to the superplastic forming output files Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA anual for further description DATABASE TRACER Des User s M cription The definition card in the TRACER subsection allows the user to create tracer part ASCII file TRHST Usage icles which will save a history of
428. ser to change the displaying type of cu There are four kinds of display type available rve SOLID DASH DOT DASH DOT Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POS Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 71 eta VPG3 3 POST PROCESSING Usage The default type is SOLID and the user can press the button on the right of the text box to select a desired type Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 3 CURVE MARK Description This function offers an option for the user to change the type of curve marking which is displayed at each point There are six kinds of curve mark type available ROUND SQUARE GULAR UP TRIAN DOWN TRIANGULAR DIAMOND NO MARK Usage The user can press the button on the right of the text box to select a desired type Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 4 CURVE COLOUR Description This function offers an option for the user to ch colour of curve ange the Usage The colour of the current curve is displayed on the button The user can click this button and the colour panel will pop up and prompt the user to select the desired colour for the curve The colour panel is shown in figure 9 74 If don t want to change the colour after the colour panel have popped up the user can click anywhere else on the screen to cancel the colour select Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 5 BACKGROUND COLOR Figure 9 74The Curve alette Color P Description This function
429. sformation the following options are available AGAIN LINE 6 16 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR POINT OPERATION Reverses the previous transformations EXIT EXIT will return to step 1 6 1 Des REVERSE DONE 22 BRIDGE LINE cription This function creates a spline curve to connect selected two lines Usage 1 VPG prompts CATION gt SELECT LI E BY PLACING THE CURSOR NEAR THE CONNECTING END gt SELECT NODES POINTS BRIDGE LINE WILL BE CONNECTED TO THE LAST LO N SELECT LINE Selects the first line NODES POINTS veral nodes to create a line segment for the first line definition line selects the second line then a spline curve will be created atically after bridge line is created Selects se REJECT LAST Rejects last selected line EXIT 2 After selecting the first to connect these two lines Lines created by method NODES POINTS will be removed autom 6 17 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 SUR Comma rts surface data rmat The CAD Import function in the FILE Menu is sed to import externally created CAD data FACE nds in this menu are used to create and modify CAD surface data in VPG VPG impo and line data and converts it into VPG fo u d description of each function is given in the following sections A detaile Th
430. sion A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 12 1 ASSIGN PROPERTY Descripti window the user can assign and create properties that are solver code spe perty menu and its function y assi on This function assigns element properties physical to selected parts Usage 1 VPG gt The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that r by selecting a property name the prompts the user to select a section SELECT A SECTION contains a desired property default o If no properties are present in the database the user will be prompted with 6 156 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R message NO PROPERTIES DEFINED IN DATABASE and the command ill return 2 VPG prompts the user to designate a part s to accept the selected property s After the user exits the selected parts will be shown in the property color 6 12 2 CHANGE COLOR D prompt w gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN SECTION gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 3 The property will be assigned to the elements in the selected part escription This function changes the color of a selected property Usage displayed at the right edge of the graphic area 2 VPG prompts the user to select a section gt SELECT SECTION TO CHANGE COLOR hat contains a desired property default or by selecting a property name 3 ec
431. sion 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES NODES VECTOR Select two nodes to define a vector SHELL NORMAL The head will align with the normal of the element selected SHELL REVERSE The head will align with the reverse normal NORMAL direction of the element selected 4 Select SHELL NORMAL Figure 11 An Example of a Generated Side Pole Impact Model 7 53 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 4 7 3 IIHS 40 ODB FRONT Description This function will create ODB at the 40 front of the vehi Usage cle 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER IIHS 40 ODB CRASH INFORMATION 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER AGAINST ODB RIGHT UP CORNER Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED Figure 12 An Example of a Generated IIHS 40 ODB Impact Model 7 4 7 4 IIHS SIDE PASSED IMPACT Description This function will create ODB at the side of the vehicle Usage 7 54 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES IDE IMPACT INFORMATION 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FMVSS IIHS S 2 VPG prompts for the crash target for MDB gt PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEHICLE CLEARANCE 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part
432. spension is moved with the second coordinate now occupying the first 7 18 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 2 4 MODI Description FY This option allows the user to modify defined suspension models from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO MODIFY SUSPENSION Once an element from the suspension is selected VPG prompts gt OK TO MODIFY THIS SUSPENSION Y N the suspension model like in th create method The NSION MENU the user to the SUSPENSION MENU 7 2 5 READ ADAMS PRE Desc YES Modify step by step user returns to the SUSPE e NO Returns ription This option allows the user to read in 10 types of Adams Pre format suspension e VPG database files to th Usage 1 VPG prompts gt READ ADAMS_PRE MENU The READ ADAMS_PRE FILE MENU window is displayed for user to OPEN a fst rst database file ADAMS PRE SUSPENSION TYPES SUPPORTED ARE SLA Front Suspension McPherson Strut Front Suspension F SPENSION n RONT SU SLA Multilink Front Suspensio Hotchkiss Rear Suspension Trailing Arm LS Independent Rear Suspension S 3 Link Suspension 4 Link Suspension Quad Link Struct Rear Suspension REAR SUSP Quad Link UCA Rear Suspension ENSION 7 19 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 2 6 READ STF_FILE Description This function reads in a STF sus
433. suspensions TIRE MODEL Defines and auto generates tire models SAFETY Analyzes vehicle impact and occupants safety ALE FSI Sets up ALE models especially for explosion analysis DTM Sets up a series of drop tests for a specimen HEEDS Define HEEDS parameters for optimizations ANALYSIS Sets up model execution parameters and submits analysis FEATURES 2 6 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s FATIGUE Post Processes stress data for fatigue analysis POST Provides options for viewing the results of an analysis Plots dynamic characteristics of the structure vs time velocity etc in X Y Curve format UTILITIES Provides a series of VPG tool kit functions which allow configuration of the user environment VIEWING OPTIONS Manipulates the display position and perspective of the model MACRO Records commands executed by VPG and replays commands in automated fashion 2 5 FUNCTION KEYS Function keys 1 through 8 act as shortcuts the most frequently used menus The F1 Function key 1 is reserved for the Main Menu F1 Main Menu F5 Model Checker F2 Element Options F6 Node Options F3 File Open F7 Surface Options F4 Line F8 Pre Processor FEATURES 2 6 DISPLAY WINDOW VPG divides the screen into six distinct regions The regions are used to receive input or display messages for the user The six regions are illustrated on the
434. t proc i are desc s of icon on the eta Pos on off views and dynamic rotation The second group of icons controls the type of po ess ng to be performed deformed shape stress vector plots of graphing Each of these ribed in the following sections of this chapter Figure 9 6 Post Processing Icons 9 9 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING NS Description 9 4 2 DISPLAY OPTIO The DISPLAY OPTIONS window displays the current part and contains the followi d functions ng commonly use 9 4 Figure 9 7 Display Options 2 1 SHADE toggle Description This command displays the elements as if they were illuminated by a light source Elements that are not directly exposed to the light source are appropriately shaded to simulate the actual shading effect Eta methods for object shading flat and smooth Flat shading shades each 9 4 2 2 SMOOTH SHADE toggle Description Post uses two polygon upon the intensity of the light over a series of polygons making the elements appear flat and angled This function to make the model appears more sm s between adjacent elements are smoothed by this shading m Note The SMOOTH SHADE option is only available when the SHADE option is on uses the Gourand shading method oothly The feature angle ethod 9 4 2 3 GRAY COLOR toggle Description This function can only be used in SHADE mode If the function is toggled on t
435. t Rear Suspension types can be au 2 SUSPENSION MENU e functions in the SUSPENSION MENU allow the user to auto generate Front and Rear tomotive Suspension beam models from a library of suspension types and easily attach them to vehicle body model e beam chassis suspension model is commonly used in VPG applications Although a number different and detailed finite element suspension models can be used the simulations will take ch more CPU time than they would for simplified beam models Unless s m dis ommended and is both adequate and efficient for most VPG applications such as full vehicle uctural durability analysis road load prediction full vehicle system NVH analysis and ride and ndling analysis For more inf ha Ma to generated A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 2 1 CREATE Description This option allows the user to define and auto generate suspension models sage U 1 VPG prompts gt GENERATE SUSPENSION MODEL gt ENTER COMMAND 7 10 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 2 Depending on the suspension type VPG will display one or both of the following two tables The first table displays suspension specific options such as stabilizers springs and attachments and is only necessary for some suspension types VPG prompts gt MODIFY SUSPENSION OPTIONS VPG MODULES When the user has finished altering the data and has selec
436. t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR LOAD CARDS REMOVE PART Description This card defines to delete the elements of a part Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS RIGID BODY Description This card applies a concentrated n applied at the center of mass or a moment is a odal force to a rigid body The force is pplied around a global axis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description Description LOAD CARDS SEGMENT PRESSURE This card defines a distributed pressure load over one triangular or quadrilateral for further description LO D segment defined by four nodes Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual AD CARDS PLATE PRESSURE escription This card defines a distributed pressure load over one shell element or shell element set Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description RDS SUPERPLASTIC FORM Description LOAD CA This card is used to perform superplastic forming analyses This option can be applied to both solid and shell elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further descr LOAD CARDS SURFACE STRESS Description iption This ca ressures from contact and applied pressure loads on the upper an Manual for further descripti LOAD CARDS SUB SE Description rd is used to Store segment p d lower surfaces of the shell surface Refer to the LS DYNA User s on A rd defines the effects of the primary explosion and the s
437. t file list box also depends upon the selected type on type list box Moreover the same as the item on type list only the actual contained data types will be displayed and the list box item may change depending upon the items specified in the analysis 9 12 5 PLOT Description Figure 9 69 Graph Control Window This button allows the user to plot the selected item on Component list box with graph in current Curve window The example is shown on Figure 9 70 POST PROCESSING 9 67 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Figure 9 70 The eta Post Processor Interface Window 9 D 12 6 CURVE OPERATION TOOLBAR escription The Curve Operation Toolbar that is shown in Figure 9 71 Figure 9 71 The Curve Operation Toolbar I x buttons can be used and the detailed functional description is given in the following section Usage n the Curve operation toolbar there are si PRINT This function enables the user to print or save the content of the current curve window CLIPBOARD This function enables the user to copy the content of the current curve window to the clipboard and can be used for other text edit tool such as MS Word Copy to Clipboard is the standard Windows method of transferring data between a source and a destination Copy to Clipboard is a system service shared by the entire Windows session Using this 9 68 eta VPG3 3 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING
438. t from the part as the t ge surface will be positioned in the desir be defined in the model VPG MODULES ar t position The rear rigid wall and a rigid road ed locations Proper contacts and velocities will also Figure 5 An Example of a Generated FMVSS301 Flat Rear Impact Model Descripti n 7 4 5 6 FMVSS301 70 REAR IMPACT o This function will generate a Moving Deformable Barrier and a rigid road surface to simulate FMVSS301 70 rear impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER REAR MDB INFORMATION 7 45 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE REAR MDB gt PICK VPG MODULES URSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the rear bumper target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the 3 Select C part as desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model Figure 6 An Example of a Generated FMVSS301 70 Rear MDB Model 7 4 6 ECE REGULATIONS 7 4 6 1 ECE 94 40 OFFSET FRONTAL IMPACT Description This function will create 40 ODB and a rigid road surface to simulate an ECE 94 Frontal Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts 7 46 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES gt ENTER ECE 40 ODB CRASH INFORMATION Inp va 2 VPG gt ST ODB RIGHT UP CORNER ut lues and press OK prompts PIC
439. t s this function CREATE SPRING ELEMENT CELAS 1 NASTRAN escription This section covers the options for the general SPRING ELEMENT subsection of REATE ELEMENTS C e Usag 1 ECTION 1 to 6 AT EACH END ired one for each end of the spring e g 1 1 for the x ated for the same connectivity ired slational along the global X axis l Y axis for the spring VPG prompts the ter a property If no properties exist in the database at the current or any combination of the three will be created ction ion VPG prompts gt ENTER SPRING DIR Two entries are requ direction Any number of spring elements may be cre depending upon the number of directions requ PRE PROCESSOR 1 tran 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the globa 6 rotational along the global Z axis Once the desired direction has been entered user to en time VPG prompts to create one 2 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CELAS1 ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry Select 2 nodes points The element EXIT or ABORT will exit this fun CREATE RIGID BAR RBAR NASTRAN Descript This section covers the options for the RIGID BAR section of CREATE TS Usage ELEMEN 1 VPG CNB CMA CMB integers 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 may be entered as degrees
440. ta VPG reads and writes all LS DYNA 971 entities eliminating the need for text editing of the input deck It creates and retains all material nonlinear properties contact definitions loading conditions control cards and database requests Tire Model Generator eta VPG s tire model generator allows for easy construction of tire models The tire model generation tool employs specific tire geometry and inflation pressure to automatically construct a three dimensional finite element model Tire models are used for both vehicle durability and NVH applications Specialized tire models are available for users requiring detailed models of tires These models are suitable for use in detailed tire focused analysis and require detailed material information Suspension Model Generator eta VPG s sophisticated suspension model generator automates the FEA modeling of the most popular suspension types Suspensions may be modeled using flexible finite element representations or rigid members Material properties of the suspension component can be 1 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n specified using the nonlinear stress strain characteristics of the material Included in eta VPG s suspension libraries are these suspension types MCPHERSON H ARM TRAILING ARM MCPHERSON A ARM HOTCHKISS SOLIDAXLE TWIST BEAM FIVE LINK HONDA 5 LINK QUADRA LINK SHORT LONG ARM Road Surface Library eta VPG S ro
441. te dom t modeled For geomechanical problems this option is important for limiting t User s Manual for further description B UNDARY CARDS OUTFLOW CFD ains are usually no he size of the models Refer to the LS DYNA O 6 121 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR De ription sc This function defines outflow CFD boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description Description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESCRIBED CFD This function defines prescribed CFD boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESCRIBED MOTION Description This function defines an imposed nodal motion velocity acceleration or displacement on a node or a set of nodes Also velocities and displacements can be imposed on rigid bodies If the local option is active the motion is prescribed with respect to the local coordinate system for the rigid body Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DARY CARDS PRESCRIBED ORIENTATION Desc BOUN ription This function defines an imposed orientation for a rigid body Refer to the LS DYNA BOUNDARY CARDS PRESSURE CFD SET Descr User s Manual for further description iption This function defines pressure CFD set boundary conditions Refer to the LS D A User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESSURE OUTFLOW YN Description This funct
442. ted OK VPG forwards the user to the next suspension table on the following page 3 VPG prompts gt MODIFY GEOMETRY DATA When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT THESE GEOMETRY DATA Y N YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 4 NO returns the user to the SUSPENSION GEOMETRY table 7 11 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 4 VPG displays the following pop up window with suspension stiffness data and VPG prompts gt MODIFY BUSHING STIFFNESS DATA gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT STIFFNESS DATA Y N YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 5 NO returns the user to the SUSPENSION BUSHING STIFFNESS table Note If the user selects cancel at any time during the suspension creation process the process is ended and the suspension is not defined VPG MODULES 5 VPG displays the following pop up window with spring damper rebound initial offset data and VPG prompts gt MODIFY INITIAL OFFSET gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT INITIAL OFFSET Y N 7 12 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 6
443. the maximum and minimum node results in a time history graph of the selected part The function only works during Contour Animation with ELEMENT RESULT options selected 9 9 Desc ip 7 NODAL VALUE CURVE r tion This function allows the user to plot the result in a time history graph of the selected nodes The function only works during Contour Animation The user should start a co sult component before using this function The program d igure 9 42 ntour animation of a selected re isplays a dialog window as shown in F 9 36 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 37 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual POST PROCESSING Figure 9 42 Select Nodes Control Option The procedure of selecting nodes is common with other functions described in previous sections After selecting desired ode curve result is shown as in Figure 9 43 nodes exit the function the n Figure 9 43 Node Curve Result 9 9 8 ELEMENT VALUE CURVE 9 37 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Description This function allows the user to plot the result in a time history graph of the selected el orks during Contour Animation with ELEMENT RESULT options selected D ements The function only w 9 9 9 NODAL DISPLACEMENT CURVE escription This function allows the user to plot the displacement result in a time history graph of the selected node The fun
444. these menus branches into various submenus and functions display window These options are always displayed and can be used at any time during an eta Post session s and messages to t 9 3 MENU BAR POST PROCESSING ANAGER Imports and exports data from eta Post see Section 9 7 Organizes the functio FILE M EDIT TOOLS eta Post s tool kit OPTIO HELP The men scribed in the related sections 9 4 IC The ico a the user easy access to the most commonly used functions in eta Post So s The user m e menus ns for model operation N Provide options in the graphics display window Displays the program information and phone number for technical support us and functions will be de ON BAR n b r is designed to give me of the functions represented in the icon bar are also located in the different menu ay simply click these icons to activate the functions instead of navigating through th OPEN Open file s a result or model 9 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING PRINT Creates a postscript file of the display area and sends it to the printer default or writes the image to a file Prior to printing the printer must be initialized to accommodate the print out from eta Post software PART ON OFF This the selected part s on off Once the function is selected the PAR layed shown as Figure 9 2 function enables the user to turn T ON OFF dialog window is disp PO
445. thod is not very convenient for new use 9 12 8 1 APPLY Description This function executes the selected operation or changes in the function due to rve pe tio filtering or cu o ra ns 9 12 8 2 UNDO Description This function allows the ncel the last selected operation before user to ca selecting the Apply button 9 12 8 3 CLEAR Description This function allows the user to cancel all the selected operations before pressing rv so a operations require the sample frequency and rit eti me other unary operations require a minimum ti If the user used these operations without ro es e popped up as disc se All the filters have default parameters classes cursive and recursive Butterworth erage filter are non recursive filters The than that for Butterworth However the less signal loss Description the Apply button NOTE During the operation for cu es me curve dat intervals are the same e g binary a hm c operation So number of samples e g Differentia on Integration etc a r respecting these requirements n e r m sage box will b There are four digital filters us d earlier in Graph for convenience There are two of digital filter non re ve filter is the lowpass recursi filter and the FIR and av computation requirement for the FIR filters is lower Butterworth gives more power and 9 12 9 NEW GRAPH This function allows the user to create the new graph on a new curve window
446. tion the prompt reads gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 4 The new color is assigned to the selected section 6 12 3 COPY NASTRAN Description 1 The color bar is The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen t After the user selects a s PRE PROCESSOR This function copies the properties from one element to another Usage The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that esired property default or by selecting a property name gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED gt SECTION ID XX DUPLICATED FROM SECTION ID X The user exits the function COPY and returns to the ELEMENT PROPERTY 6 12 4 COPY LS DYNA Description 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property gt SELECT SECTION TO COPY contains a d 2 After the user selects the desired property to copy VPG prompts menu This function copies the properties from one element to another Usage 1 VPG displays the SECTION CARD LIST and prompts the user to select a section gt SELECT SECTION TO COPY 6 157 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 After the user selects the desired section to copy VPG prompts D XX DUPLICATED FROM SECTION ID X Description gt SECTION I 6 12 5 CREATE NASTRAN This function allows the user to create define a property Usage 1 VPG prompts the
447. tion 2 3 Menu System Section 2 4 Function Keys Section 2 5 Display Window Section 2 6 Icon Bar Section 2 7 Mouse Functions Section 2 8 Keyboard Entry Section 2 9 Specifications Section 2 10 Line Data Section 2 11 Conventions Section 2 12 VPG File Menu Section 2 13 Recommended Naming Convention Section 2 14 LS DYNA Cards Section 2 15 Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 Entity Selection Section 2 17 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Opening Creating an eta VPG Database File Section 3 1 Setting Up a VPG Model Section 3 2 CHAPTER 4 MAIN MENU File Section 4 1 Parts Section 4 2 Pre Section 4 3 Road Section 4 4 Suspension Section 4 5 Tire Section 4 6 Safety Section 4 7 ALE FSI Section 4 8 DTM Section 4 9 Heeds Section 4 10 Analysis Section 4 11 Fatigue Section 4 12 Post Section 4 13 Utilities Section 4 14 View Section 4 15 Macro Section 4 16 Help Section 4 17 ii CHAPTER 5 FILE MANAGER New Section 5 1 Open Section 5 2 Restart Section 5 3 Save Section 5 4 Save As Section 5 5 Merge Database Section 5 6 Import Section 5 7 Export Section 5 8 Print Section 5 9 Print Setup Section 5 10 Exit Section 5 11 CHAPTER 6 PRE PROCESSOR Line Section 6 1 Surface Options Section 6 2 Element Options Section 6 3 Node Options Section 6 4 Model Checker Section 6 5 Set Menu LS DYNA Section 6 6 Set Me
448. tion allows the user to output connection information to a file The output format is a simple xml file which contains the mass location and properties This file may be generated outside VPG and imported to create the necessary masses within VPG The functions in this menu are organized as follows 6 195 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR Select one c Usage onnection type 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes the chosen connection information to the file and returns the user to the WRITE CONNECTION menu 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE xml ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N YES Overwrite the file with new data NO Exit and do nothing 6 17 3 CREATE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to create connections of five types as following Usage ODAL RIGID BODY N Refer to section 6 3 4 for detail SPRING DAMPER Refer to section 6 3 4 for detail J R CONST NOD Refer to section 6 3 4 for detail BUSHING 1 VPG prompts gt PICK RIGID BODY TO LOCATE BUSH FIRST NODE OINT efer to section 6 3 4 for detail E SET 6 196 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 After selecting a rigid body VPG prompt
449. tion analysis CREATE create a variable DELETE delete defined variables LIST list defined variables MODIFY modify defined variables EXIT exit and returns to the upper menu 7 10 4 TAGGING Description This function allows the user to TAG defined variables to material or section parameters Usage 1 The variable cards list pops up and VPG prompts gt SELECT VARIABLE CARD TO TAG 2 After a variable is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION MATERIAL the defined materials list will pop up SECTION 7 84 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S the defined sections list will pop up 3 After a material or section is selected their definition card will pop up user now can toggle on an option and click OK then the selected variable will be tagged to this option successfully 7 10 5 EXPORT HEEDS FILE Description This function helps user to export DYNA input file a HEEDS input file with the same name will be exported simultaneously Usage 1 The export file dialog pops up and VPG prompts user to enter the DYNA input file 2 After input file name is entered DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS dialog pops up now user can input some information such as analysis title etc click OK the DYNA input file is exported and a HEEDS input file with the same name will be exported simultaneously 7 10 6 THICKNESS OPTIMIZATION Description name This function guides user to def
450. tion of part entities PRE Contains a menu of preprocessing functions LINE Creates and modifies line surface data SURFACE OPTIONS Creates and modifies surfaces in VPG ELEMENT OPTIONS Creates and modifies elements NODE OPTIONS Creates copies transforms and manipulates nodes MODEL CHECKER Checks element criteria warpage boundary aspect ratio etc SET MENU Creates node and element sets for Super element files substructure files etc BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Creates and verifies constraints and loads on a finite element model MATERIAL Creates and assigns material properties ELEMENT PROPERTY Creates and assigns element properties CONTACT INTERFACE Creates and modifies sliding rigid wall interfaces for LS DYNA DYNA MISCELLANEOUS Handles distinct LS DYNA miscellaneous data NASTRAN MISCELLANEOUS Handles distinct NASTRAN miscellaneous data SUPER ELEMENT Assigns and modifies SUPER ELEMENT ID numbers only for NASTRAN application MASS MENU Creates and modifies MASS ASSEMBLY Arrange and assemble parts or part sets connections CONSTRAINT Creates and Modifies constraints LOAD CARDS Creates defines and modifies LOAD CARDS LS DYNA INITIAL CONDITION Creates defines and modifies INITIAL CONDITION CARDS LS DYNA ROAD MENU Selection of Road Surfaces from a library or import of user defined road surfaces SUSPENSION MENU Defines and auto generates front and rear automotive
451. tion to export a file for later execution Chapter 8 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION ANALYSIS 8 1 CASE CONTROL The o define or delete case control CASE CONTROL menu allows the user t 8 1 1 DEFI Descrip NE CASE tion this function allows the user to define the cases all cases definition will be finished in the following pop up window All of the BOUNDARY_SPC_ BO TION_ LOAD_NODE_ LOAD_SHELL and fined in database will be listed in the window Users select UNDARY_PRESCRIBE_MO LOAD_SEGMENT cards de needed for each case Figure 8 1 Case Control definition window ADD A new case will be cre ase DEL Current case will be deleted and the next case will be set as current case OK Cases definition finished and exit CANCEL No cases modification will be done and exit 8 1 2 REMOVE ALL CASE Description ated and set as current c this function deletes all already defined cases 8 2 ANALYSIS SUBMISSION The ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu allows the user to interactively run the VPG solver LS DYNA from the Graphical User Interface window The option buttons in the ANALYSIS 8 2 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION ANALYSIS SUBMISSION window CONTROL CARD BOUNDARY CARDS CONSTRAINT CARDS etc pro ry functions for completing a DYNA input file The toggle button at he N ANALYSIS writes an input file and submits the job for analysis hen the user selects O
452. tire is 3 The user is then prompted for the location of pied to that location co 7 29 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 3 4 CREATE COMPOSITE Description This option allows the user to auto generate composite tire models based on user defined Usage parameters 1 VPG displays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts gt CREATE TIRE PROFILE splays the tire cross se gt PROCESSING ELEMENTS AND NODES gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT NO returns the user to the tire parameter window 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG di ction along with mass and pressure values and prompts 7 30 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 3 If the user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts gt DEFINE WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES VPG MODULES Note For tire tuning procedures see the eta VPG applications manual sections 1 5 and 2 4 7 31 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 7 3 5 CREATE DIRECT MATRIX Description This option allows the user to auto generate direct matrix tire models based on user defined parameters Usage 1 VPG displays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts gt CREATE TIRE PROFILE VPG MODULES 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG displays the tire 7 32 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manua
453. tity Other commonly used selection options are described belo rag window is defined by clicking the left mouse button dragging the cursor ross the screen until the desired entities are within the window and releasing the MUL A multi point region polygon is defined by clicking the left mouse button in succession to enclose the desired polygon region Click on the right mouse button to reject the last defined point Click on the middle button to complete the region Entities within this region will be selected If part of an entity is outside of the region it will not be selected The part names will be listed in the menu area Pick the name from the part list or pick an entity from the screen to select the part Selected parts will be highlighted in white in the MENU WINDOW All entities in the part will be selected This a X AS LOCAL W AXIS This defines a local coordinate system that is parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global X axis and the local origin at the first reference point Y AS LOCAL W AXIS This defines a local coordinate system parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global Z axis and the local origin at the first reference point YE NO The user returns to step FEATURES The us 17 ENTITY SELECTION es line ction w WINDOW A window d diagonally ac left mouse button to complete the selection If an entity is partially outside the window
454. to assign a residual I D number to selected nodes displayed in the VPG database SUPERELEMENT I D 0 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN OPTION FOR RESIDUAL gt E EXIT I INDEPENDENT D DEPENDENT S SELECT residual I D number to the independent nodes of all the displayed RBE2 and RBAR elements If the user enters SELECT NODES VPG assigns a residual I D number to the nodes that are specified by the user 2 When SELECT NODES is entered VPG prompts gt e nodes that are to receive a residual I D number O fun n the screen above the appropriate nodes 6 15 2 ASSIGN S E ID Descr If the user selects INDEPENDENT NODES VPG automatically assigns a SELECT NODES The user specifies th nce the user selects the residual nodes DONE or EXIT terminates this ction VPG denotes the residual nodes with a small zero 0 o iption This function is a one command operation that assigns a SUPERELEMENT I D to all nodes in the entire VPG database the SUPERELEMENT I D is the same as the PID number of the corresponding part 6 189 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 15 3 CHANGE S E ID Description This function allows the user to change or assign a SUPERELEMENT I D to selected nodes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW SUPER EL I D OR 0 ZERO TO EXIT The user may now enter the desired SUPERELEMENT I D 2 VPG prompts gt NEW S E ID DOES N
455. to define a vector SHELL NORMAL The head will align with the normal of the element selected SHELL REVERSE NORMAL The head will align with the reverse normal direction of the element selected Figure 17 An Example of a Generated 30 Degree Pendulum Bumper Impact 7 5 1 FMVSS REGULATIONS 7 5 1 1 FMVSS201 HEAD IMPACT n 7 5 OCCUPANT SAFETY VPG MODULES Descriptio This function will position a FMVSS201 Head Impact Head Form model in the Usage VPG model database and apply appropriate boundary conditions 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER HEAD IMPACT INFORMATION 2 VPG prompts gt PICK MOST OUTSIDE SKIN TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE HEAD Define the target on the pillar where the head will impact 7 60 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRCETION AGAINST HEAD There are four approaches to define the head direction KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector NODES VECT ctor SHELL NORMAL The head will align with the normal of the element OR Select two nodes to define a ve selected SHELL REVERSE NORMAL The head will align with the reverse normal direction of the element selected VPG MODULES 7 5 1 2 FMVSS207 210 SEATBELT ANCHORAGE Description This function will import and position the body block used in the evaluation of seat belt anchorages to support the simulation of FMVSS 207 and FMVSS 210 requireme
456. to specify the desired part If ROTATE is entered R ANGLE INCREMENT degrees gt INCLUDE COPIED LINE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N unction is terminated 6 1 6 COMBIN Description 2 VPG gt CREATE gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is asking for a desired coo prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 Once the desir screen 3 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A YES NO If If NO then go to step 2 If AB prompts VPG prompts gt MOVE OR MOVE ROTATE ABORT If W axis gt INCLUDE COPIED LINE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N gt ENTE i e 200 degrees Allow the user to specify the desired part If ABORT is entered then the f E LINES T a new line num al lines will be deleted after they are combined The combined line should be selected in a logical sequence to form the new line Usag his function allows the user to combine multiple lines into a new single line with ber The origin e VPG prompts 1 gt PICK LINES TO COMBINE 6 6 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 2 nc command 6 1 7 SPL E Descripti O e all the lines are selected DONE or EXIT combines the lines and exits the IN CURVE on his function allows the
457. to the file names that speci types s are listed in the option area of the display screen 1 esult f d3plotaa d3plotint 2 del 3 sult f ue analysis d3eigv 4 N re op2 5 AN m at 6 ORM VPG FEMB LINE DATA file lin eta Post can open ult file results directly After the NASTRAN result file is loaded the progr uire l sponding NASTRAN model file The user may import LINE DATA NAS 9 6 CONF ION F The etapost con initial default setting of eta Post This file is located in the inst ctory normal content of the etapost config file REJECT Rejects the previous selection RMAT naming fil ring an eta Post sess fy the file The appropriate file name DYNA r ile d3plot d3drif dynain DYNA mo DYNA file dyn ile of eigenv re NASTRA al sults file pch NASTR odel file nas d DYNAF DYNA res s to process the am will req DYNA or oading the corre TRAN model files IGURAT ILE fig file or ization file controls the allation dire and can be edited via the text editor The is 9 6 1 GRAPHIC ENGINE D escription The parameters in this group are arious graphics cards used to customize the OpenGL behavior with v Usage Z buffer Bit Sets the bits of Z buffer when rendering a model the default value is 16 9 12 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING Color buffer Bit Setting the bit r buffer wh
458. to the printer It has no effect RINT Description 9 7 5 6 P This function will send the model to a selected printer or prompt the user to enter a file name to save the file 9 7 5 7 CANCEL Description This function allows user to exit the function and reject any selections made 9 18 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING POST PROCESSING 9 7 6 PRINT TO FILE Description This function prints the result to a file 9 7 7 QUIT ALT Q Description Selection of this option ends the current eta Post session and returns back to eta VPG pre processing environment If the user is executing eta Post from a stand alone mode this option terminates the eta Post software 9 19 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 8 The fun u allow the user to modify the setting of the model display Figure 9 13 shows the drop down list of the Edit functions EDIT MENU ctions in the Edit men Figure 9 13 Edit Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 9 8 1 CREATE LINE Description This function enables the user to create a line by selecting a set of nodes In eta Post a line is formed by a sequence of points The program displays the line by a set of straight line segments between adjacent points in sequence The generated lines are included in a new part The program displays a CONTROL OPTION window as shown as Figure 9 14 POST PROC
459. translat motion Figure 9 35 shows the dialog window of the Constraint Motion Figure 9 35 Constraint Motion Dialog Window cement of the node it will be stationary in the constrained direction del will be displaced relative to the reference point in Disregarding the displa during the animation The rest of the mo the un constrained direction s Figure 9 36 Constraint Motion Dialog Window Note When Axis is selected as the constraint axis the function will be labeled with asterisk When toggle on Show Reference Node the function will be labeled with asterisk and when animate the reference node will be labeled with highlighted circle Please see the Figure 9 36 Description 9 9 3 MIRROR RESULT BY XYZ Th There are three mirror planes XY PLANE YZ PLANE and ZX PLANE as shown in Figure 9 37 is function allows the user to select a mirror plane to mirror the analysis result 9 33 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 37 Mirror Result Control Option Window Usage The following example is to mirror a quarter of the model and result as shown in Figure 9 38 When selecting MIRROR RESULT BY XZ PLANE the program mirrors the model and result as shown in Figure 9 39 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 38 Example of Mirror Function Input 9 34 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 39 Mirror Results by XZ Plane MIRROR RESULT on the Control Option Window the
460. tscript file of display area and sends the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized to accommodate the eta VPG software The user can define the printing default 5 10 PRINT SETUP This function allows the user to define the default setting for printing of image files The options are shown in Figure 5 11 1 5 10 1 PAPER CUT The user can specify a given paper size and margin Standard paper sizes are supported such as 8 5 x11 11 x17 A4 etc FILE MANAGER 5 14 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r Figure 5 10 1 Printer Setup r of the 5 10 2 PR NTER he user can select a printer or select a format to print to a file nter the printer name in field or select from the list below If Print To File is toggled on the user can choose a format by selecting the drop list beside Print File Format Select drop list at the right of PAPER CUT to choose a paper size Enter a number in the field beside PAPER MARGIN to define the shorte paper s two margins top and bottom Select the button beside Paper Length Unit to choose a unit in or mm I T E VPG supports postscript PS encapsulated postscript EPS GIF and JPG file formats Note When PRINT is selected the user will be prompted enter a file name instead of the File being directly sent to the printer 5 10 3 ORIENTATION This function sets th
461. ty giving CPU economy The tire has the ability to interact al road surfaces in a manner consistent with actual tires This allows for the pre spension with greater accuracy VPG s tire g The tire s tr afer are Mooney Rivlin type rubber materials modeled with eight node solid elements The tire s top ply and sidewall are modeled as shell elements with elastic material The wheel is lements Tire inflation pressure is defined according to the formula pV T constant where p is pressure V is the volume confined within the top ply side wall and the wheel hub and T is a temperature assumed to be constant during the simulated testing process The finished VPG Tire model contains a total of 2441 nodes and 2264 elements including 1304 shell elements and 960 solid elements The TIRE MENU allows the user to generate tire models with user defined characteristics with three dimension diction of lateral and longitudinal force within the vehicle su enerator creates tires with the following characteristics and properties ead and ch made of rigid shell e A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 26 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 7 3 1 CREATE VPG TIRE Description This option allows the user to generate VPG tire models based on user defined parameters Usage 1 VPG displays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts gt CREATE
462. ubsequent bubble oscillations Refer to LOAD CARDS SF FEN Description This ca the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description IF PART This card de staged construction Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further des n fines for criptio LOAD CARDS THERMAL Description This card defines nodal temperatures that thermally load the structure Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS VOLUME LOSS Description This card defines to represent the effect of tunneling on surrounding structures it is commo re defined fraction of the volume occupied by the tunnel is lost during the con rocess Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description n to assume that a p struction p 6 133 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 9 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS NASTRAN The functions of the BO D ds on finite element mo fu follows f the BO D ds on finite element mo fu follows UN ARY CONDITIONS MENU create and verify constraints and loa UN ARY CONDITIONS MENU create and verify constraints and loa dels The dels The nctions in the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU are organized as nctions in the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU are organized as A detaile ction is given in the following sections Note If the s code is LS DYNA a separate menu with different options will appear See Section 6 8 BOUNDARY CON 6 9 1 SUBCASE CO TR
463. uffix dat will be listed in the op c 5 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r 5 7 1 5 READ M OLDFLOW FILE gt READING MOLDFLOW INPUT FILE gt ENTER THE ROO OW INPUT FILES files are available VPG displays the MOLDFLOW model 3 If the user is reading data into an existing model VPG prompts unused node element number tains only the original nodes and elements i e if the MOLDFLOW file contains all duplicate node and element numbers the new part will read in with 4 VPG rea the FILE MANAGER menu 5 7 1 6 READ NASTRAN BULK VPG ses r may import and export models and mesh Thi ctly into VPG All existin ined e VPG FILE MENU and prompts 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART CONTROL OPTION FOR CBARS suffix nas will be listed for you in the options area PBAR ID ME CBARS will be grouped by their individual part names 3 If the us gt UMBERS Y N at the lowest available unused node element number all duplicate node and element numbers the new part will read in without the presence of elements or nodes This function allows users to read MOLDFLOW data directly into VPG 1 VPG prompts T NAME OF THE MOLDFL 2 After entering the root file name assuming that the mfl mod and tri gt OFFSET NODE AND ELEMENT NUMBERS Y N YES renumbers the new data at the lowest available NO compares the node element numbers and ignores the d
464. uplicates VPG re out the presence of elements or nodes ds in the file and returns the user to u NASTRAN as a file translator so that the use s function allows the user to read a NASTRAN bulk data file dat dire g properties materials and subcases are reta FILE MANAGER 1 VPG displays th gt DEFINE NASTRAN BULK DATA FILE The files with the MAT1 ID CBARS will be grouped by common MAT1 ID CBARS will be grouped by common PBAR ID PART NA er is reading data into an existing model VPG prompts OFFSET NODE AND ELEMENT N YES renumbers the new data NO compares the node element numbers and ignores the duplicates VPG retains the only original nodes and elements i e if the NASTRAN file contains 4 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 6 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 5 F i l e M a n a g e r FILE MANAGER 5 7 1 7 READ PAMCRASH FILE This function allows the user to read a PAMCRASH pc file directly into VPG Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix pc will be listed in the options area The user may then select the desired file 5 7 1 8 READ RADIOSS FILE This function allows the user to read a RADIOSS data file directly into VPG VPG can read fixed format input files from RADIOSS Versions 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 4 1and 4 4 VPG can write RADIOSS 4 4 fixed format input files VPG supports all input cards of RAD
465. upporters ground and a platform will be 7 50 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model 7 4 7 OTHER STANDARDS 7 4 7 1 FRONT RIGID POLE Description This function will create a rigid pole at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RIGID POLE CRASH INFORMATION 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE FRONT POLE Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAIL DIRECTION AGAINST POLE 3 VPG prompts 4 VPG prompts gt ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED 7 51 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S Figure 10 An Example of a Generated Front Rigid Pole Impact Model PACT 7 4 7 2 SIDE POLE IM Description This function will create a rigid pole at the side of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SIDE POLE CRASH INFORMATION VPG MODULES 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE SIDE POLE Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST POLE proaches to define the head direction KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector There are four ap 7 52 eta VPG ver
466. user for a previously defined road surface library name and allows the user to select saved road surfaces from that library 7 3 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S When one type of road surface library is selected VPG p rompts gt SELECT C S TYPE VPG MODULES The desired road surface is displayed on the screen 1 BODY TWIST LANE 2 ALTERNATE SURFACE 7 4 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 3 PO TRACK 1 THOLE TRACK 1 5 RIPPLE VPG MODULES 4 POTHHOLE TRACK 2 6 RIPPLE TRACK 2 7 CHATTERSTRIP 8 COBBLESTONE TRACK 9 WASHBOARD SURFACE 2 7 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S 10 PAVE SURFACE VPG MODULES 11 WASHBOARD SURFACE 2 12 23 DEGREE RAMP SURFACE 7 1 3 DELETE Description This option allows the user to delete a defined road surface Usage 7 6 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 7 V P G M O D U L E S VPG MODULES 1 VPG prompts gt PICK ELEM C OR ROAD NAME R gt CURSOR PICK AT ELEMENT 2 Once the road surface is selected VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART XXXX OF ROAD XXXX The road is deleted DONE or EXIT returns the user to the ROAD DEFINITION MENU 7 1 4 SUMMARY Description This option gives a summary of a selected road surface i e Part Name number ts PID and number of elements of par Us ge a 1 VPG prom
467. ut data from versions 971 and earlier As a result models generated using eta VPG require no external editing to complete the file for execution The input cards are arranged as they are in the LS DYNA manual eta VPG displays the necessary input parameters in windows as shown in Figure 2 15 1 and as described below CARD SELECT BUTTON The CARD SELECT BUTTON displays the number of definition cards and allows the user to jump conveniently to the desired card The card button is not an option when only one card is needed to define the selected property or the number of cards is dependent on user defined values CARD DESCRIPTION FIELD N FIELD allows the user to enter a name for the defined properties d the LS DYNA defined range VPG prompts the user when the user d or card Example When reading in a line data file VPG prompts for a line data file name all file Names in that directory with the selection convenient and organizes the user s work directory FEATURES The CARD DESCRIPTIO EDITING FIELDS VPG s smart editing field only allows values within the specified range to be entered If the alue entered is beyon v tries to move to another fiel 2 14 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s Figure 2 15 1 Card Definition Window ndent on another field that ust be edited first rw CANCEL Exits with ENTER Pressing TE data FIELD DESCRIPTION
468. ve no parts assigned to t hem Usage 1 VPG deletes any unreferenced materials If unreferenced materials are found VPG shows the number of materials found and prompts EFERENCED MATERIALS Y N s are found VPG prompts gt NO UNREF MATERIALS FOUND and returns to the material menu 6 10 11 LIST Description gt OK TO DELETE 1 UNR If no unreferenced material This function lists the defined materials in the MATERIAL CARD LIST 6 10 12 MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of parts between the material and part color 6 10 13 Description ON OFF This function toggles the selected material ON OFF Usage 1 VPG p Users may select an existing material by picking an element or material f a material 6 10 14 RENUMBER Description rompts the user to select a material name o 2 The selected material and parts are turned ON OFF This function allows the user to assign a new material ID MID number to a mate Usage rial type 1 VPG prompts T PTIONS Methods as following gt SELEC O 6 10 15 SHOW BUSHING Description This function shows bushing Clicking the Clear screen icon turns bushing off 6 150 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 16 THERMAL MATL MENU Description This Usage function creates thermal materials 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION Methods as following
469. velocities SELECT This function allows the user to create and or modify the MPC Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area 6 144 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages MPC CREATE Description This function allows the user to create the MPC Usage 1 When the user enters CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following After the user enters MPC or MPCADD the BOUNDARY MPC DEFINITION MP ETE Desc window pops up and the user can set parameters in the window C DEL ription This function enables the user to remove the sel base ected MPC cards from the data PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG pr gt SELECT TO DELETE A PC cards are listed in the MPC CARD LIST box M LIST Desc ompts CARD le M ll availab PC ription This function lists the defined MPC cards in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG gt L Description prompts IST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE MPC MODIFY This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any MPC card Usag e 1 VPG gt S 2 After pops up and th prompts ECT CARD TO MODIFY EL the user selects an MPC card the BOUNDARY MPC DEFINITION window arameters in the window e user can modify p 6 145 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE
470. verts to CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA The Radioss primary node number RBID be used as the parameter NODEID on card 2 of CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 Delete VOID RIVET property in Radioss 2 BEAM converts SECTION_BEAM RESULTANT TRUSS converts SECTION_BEAM TRUSS and SPRING converts SECTION_BEAM DISCRETE 3 SPRING elements TYPE 4 8 12 and 13 in Radioss convert into DYNA V970 material Type196 MAT_GENERAL_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM This Model permits elastic and elastoplastic spring with damping to be represented with a discrete beam element type 6 For elastic behavior a load curve defines force or moment versus displacement or rotation For inelastic behaivor a load curve yield force or moment versus plastic deflection or rotation which can vary in tension and compression MATERIAL PROPERTY 1 Radioss material type 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC converts to MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 2 Radioss material type 21 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP converts to DYNA V970 material type 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM 3 Radioss material type 28 ORTHOTROPIC converts to DYNA V970 material type26 MAT_HONEYCOMB in relative SECTION_SOLID and creates new HOURGLASS card in relative PART s HGID field in DYNA970 input file The Radioss yield functions for the HONEYCOMB material which as the abscissa values must be converted into DYNA V970 curves with abscissa values 4 AIRBAG MONITORED VOLUMESS MONITORED VOLUMES in Radioss converts SIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIR
471. w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s This function displays the stress results of each individual element as opposed to the contour plot functions which display the stress results in terms of the average stress at each node A color legend for the corresponding color values is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen TIME HISTORY PLOT eta VPG s TIME HISTORY PLOT functions enable the user to visualize the results of an analysis with XY plots VPG offers a wide range of tools to manipulate the information on the display screen with labels colors multiple graphs and a host of advanced filtering techniques e g FIR Butterworth SAE scaling smoothing and averaging FFT FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM The TIME lt gt FREQUENCY function allows the user to convert time domain to frequency domain response for signal processing analysis The FFT equation is used to convert time domain to frequency domain and frequency domain to time domain for any graph plot 2 4 MENU SYSTEM The program starts in the MAIN menu see figure 2 4 1 and branches out into submenus The user selects a sub menu by mouse pick or keyboard entry Descriptions for these menu options are located in their respective sections FEATURES Figure 2 4 1 Main Menu 2 5 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 2 A n O v e r v i e w o f e t a V P G F e a t u r e s FILE Imports and exports data to and from VPG PART Creation display control and manipula
472. ween the road surface and the tires are determined using the FIVE_NODES_TO_SURFACE interface type The road is then constrained in the Y Z and rotational directions using the material property assigned to the road Next a velocity is assigned to the road using the BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION card Details on ROAD SURFACE libraries may be found in Chapter 7 Section 1 5 Adding a Body Model The body to chassis suspension attachment process depends upon what type of body model the user wishes to use for analysis deformable or rigid Rigid Body The rigid body model is constrained to the rigid beams that define the body attachment points on the suspension Deformable Body The specific coordinates for the body attachment points must be entered when the user defines the Extra Node Coordinates for the front rear suspension models This ensures that the generated suspension would fit the specific body model The user then creates weld spiders between the mounts on the vehicle and the rigid body beams on the suspension Next the user defines the BODY_LOAD_DEFINITION_CARD to define the gravity After defining the gravity the user pre loads the suspension using the ELEMENT DEFINITION CARD 6 Defining VPG Analysis Control Parameters First the CONTROL ENERGY and CONTROL TERMINATION cards must be defined Next the output control interval data for the ASCII database must be determined Then the BINARY DATABASE cards must be edited to control the output inte
473. with filled color master is shown as red slave is shown as blue Usage 1 VPG prompts gt THIS CONTACT TYPE CANNOT BE SHOWN The CONTACT CARD LIST is as following Note The displayed contact may be erased by clicking the CLEAR button in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW 6 166 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual C h a p t e r 6 P R E P R O C E S S O R PRE PROCESSOR 6 14 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS The DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU contains distinct LS DYNA specific functions VPG defines these functions in two ways graphically when defining such things such as a box or vector and with cards based on the definition cards found in the LS DYNA Keyword User s Manual An example of a definition card can be found in Section 2 13 Note Th DYNA MISCELLANEOUS option does not appear in the PRE PROCESSING MENU when the analysis software Note All of differs with plained in the following pages CREATE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT Description e is NASTRAN these options share this standard submenu except CONTROL CARDS Only the CREATE command respect to each function and will be ex Defines a new card DELETE 6 14 1 AIRBAGS This function provides vari
474. y allows the user to adjust the b o P is turned on The user may click and drag the slider in each l st the light property Slide to the right r ness or reflection of the display U rightness and shininess of the part by adjusting the setting f Ambient Diffuse and Specular light The LIGHT ROPERTY only is operational when the SHADE option ight property to adju esults in more bright sage AMBIENT Ambient light is a uniform light source coming from all directions to the part ming from the light source direction This light is reflected he part surface tion RESET LIGHT property to the default setting D DIFFUSE Diffuse light is a parallel light source co evenly from t SPECULAR Specular light is similar to the diffuse light except the light is reflected sharply in a particular direc Reset the light 9 8 6 MATERIAL PROPERTY escription eta Post allows the user to modify different material properties for rendering the Figure 9 16 Light Property Control Option Window part The material property only takes effect in the SHADE mode with GRAY COLOR option Usage ATTRIBUTE function MATERIAL COLOR The program provides adjustment for MATERIAL User may select the material from the Material drop down list The available materials are aluminum steel copper iron silver bronze and rubber User may assign a material to selected parts by using the PART 9 22 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual
475. yed once the icon is selected For a description of the command P to PARTS PART ON OFF in Sectio 1 0 3 10 2 2 VIEWING MANIPULATION SX SCREEN X ROTATION 10 10 eta VPG version 3 3 User Manual Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY axis is parallel to the e VPG displays a ruler Mo causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation This shortcut rotates the model about the screen X axis where the X horizontal edge of the screen When the us r selects this command bar on the right side of the screen ving the cursor up or down SY SCREEN Y ROTATION This shortcut rotates the model about the screen Y axis where the Y axis is parallel to the displays a ruler bar the curso the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments mouse button stops vertical edge of th on the right side of the screen Moving r up or down causes e screen When the user selects this command VPG Clicking the left the rotation SZ SCREEN Z ROTATION This command rotates the model about the screen Z axis where the Z axis is perpendicular to the plane of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation VX VIRTUAL X ROTATION Th
476. ying defi INT CARDS BUTT WELD INT CARDS BUTT WELD This function defines a butt weld between master node set and slave note set Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the BUTT WELD window pops up The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS EULER IN EULER Description this fuction is used to define EULER IN EULER card Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED EULER IN EULER window pops up The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA CONSTR ES Description User s Manual for further description AINT CARDS EXTRA NOD This function defines extra nodes for a rigid body Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts NODE SET The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA urther description Description gt SELECT OPTION User s Manual for f CONSTRAINT CARDS GENERALIZED WELD This function defines spot and fillet welds Coincident nodes are permitted if the local coordinate ID is defined For the SPOTWELD a local coordinate ID is not required if the nodes are offset Failures can include both the plastic and brittle failures These can be used either independently or together Failure occurs when either criterion is met The welds may undergo large rotations since the equations of rigid body mechanics are used to update their Usag moti

eta/VPG version 3.3 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents